
58f]33Hj 

. • 


>n?« 


(v KfflRinNn 

I’vi v * .- r.f *» 




LIBRARY OF CONGRESS 


PF 


3111 


G69 




I 




. t". 






/ • • 




;•• ;i :;.rv ! ; i;; .; : ; ^ 

1 -'-I- ;.V’» 


'. •■ ■ 'r : ; rfthjjjhK ‘ - -r 

HUAftHT 






•1 




■ *. 


W, !» 


rut 


i : 


□ DDD3tiimfih 


»v{> 4 2 ;o'v 

bH&SsKS 


iiSSBSms 


teii 




mu 


Ns 


'V. 
















































































































Copyright ^ 0 


COPYRIGHT DEPOSIT. 






























































AN INTRODUCTION 

TO THE 


GERMAN LANGUAGE 

FOR 

English-speaking Students 


By 

Jane Faulkner Goodloe, M.A. 
Instructor in German at Goucher College 


Published by 
Thomsen-Ellis Company 
Baltimore, Maryland 
1924 






COPYRIGHT 1924 
BY 

JANE F. GOODLOE 



NOV 19 i924 

©Cl A 807877 

"h* / 


INTRODUCTION 


The English language and its relation to German. 

At the dawn of history England and France were inhabited by a Celtic 
race. France or, as it was then called, Gaul, was conquered by the 
Romans and became thoroughly Latinized, her language being today 
largely the descendant of Latin. France was later conquered by the 
Franks, a Germanic tribe, which gave their name to the country and 
affected, though not fundamentally, the language. Very different was 
the fate of England. Caesar's conquest affected Britain, as is was then 
called, but slightly and only few words remain in the language today 
as a result of that period. In 449, however, Britain was conquered 
by the Angles and Saxons, Germanic tribes from the northern part 
of the continent. This conquest was complete. The ancient Britains 
were exterminated; only a few escaped to the mountain fastnesses of 
Wales and Cornwall. The name of Britain gave way to the name 
England, the land of the Angles, and the Celtic language disappeared 
before the English, or language of the Angles. 

In 1066 England was again conquered, this time by William, Duke 
of Normandy, who, with his French barons, and retainers spoke 
French. The English language, like the English people, was relegated 
to the fields, to the use of the conquered, while French became the 
exclusive language of the new nobility. This political division of the 
country we find still mirrored in our language. Not only is our 
language today a mosaic of Germanic and French elements, but we 
have actually such pairs of words as show the social strata of those 
early days. OX, STEER, COW, SHEEP, SWINE were the Germanic 
or English names for those animals alive in the pasture, where the 
conquered English peasant tended them. They are so still today. 
BEEF, MUTTON, PORK were the French names for the animals, but 
as the French nobility had no other contact with the animals than at 
table, their names have come to have that special significance of the 
meat of the animal served as food. (German: Ochs, Stier, Kuh, Schaf, 
Schwein; French: boeuf, mouton, pore.) 

While English was thus assimilating this tremendous foreign element 
and, perhaps partly because of the effort involved in that assimilation, 
sloughing off inflectional endings to become the modern language we 
speak, the German on the continent, unaffected by such outside 
causes, was developing in a very different way. 

The explanation of what the German was doing at this time (around 
1100), we owe to the philologian, Jakob Grimm, famous as the col¬ 
lector of the Fairy-Tales which bear his name. The German of the 
highlands, that is of South Germany, underwent a shifting of certain 
consonants. The shifting was so regular that Grimm was able to enun- 


ciate the Law which bears his name, and according to which Germanic 
or English th, d, t, p became respectively in High German (South 
German) d, t, s (ss, z), pf (f). Examples: thick— dick, deed— Tat, 
sat— sass, Path— Pfad. 

Knowing the history of the English language and its fundamental 
relation to the German, we shall be able to approach it with a sense of 
security, realizing that we are not leaving behind us all familiar liguistic 
phenomena. On the contrary we shall expect to find as regards the 
vocabulary some words, at least, which have maintained their identity 
of form in the two languages in spite of the different trend of develop¬ 
ment which each has followed. We shall find also a much more numerous 
group, easily recognized by the application of Grimm's Law. We shall 
find too, especially in the contemporary languages, a number of infil¬ 
trations from the German into the English, and, especially in the matter 
of nautical and sport terms, from English into German. We shall 
find that the names of our neighbors of German descent mean some¬ 
thing just as do Smith, Brown and Little in English. 

But even more than in the vocabulary, we shall find in the grammar 
a series of phenomena which either agree with modern English or which 
preserve an agreement with Anglo-Saxon, which is most interesting 
to students. The plurals of the nouns, at first glimpse so different from 
the English rule, are seen on reflection to have their counterparts at 
least in the rare forms like ox, oxen, sheep, sheep, man, men. The 
pronoun reveals that English, in the course of dropping superfluous 
forms, lost the accusative of the masculine and retained the dative 
HIM in the accusative function. The so-called strong verbs, i.e. those 
with vowel change in the principal parts, are almost identical in the 
two languages. If a German strong verb has not an English cognate, 
a glance at Anglo-Saxon will reveal the cognate, lost in favor of some 
new word usually from the Scandinavian. 

Let us then approach the study of German in the spirit of curiosity 
and adventure. We shall find a language not only interesting for itself 
and as the key to a great and beautiful literature, but interesting in 
the opportunity its study affords for becoming acquainted with many 
interesting facts about the history and development of our mother 
tongue, the marvellously composite and amazingly adequate English 
language. 


Masculine Nouns 


5 


ERSTE AUFGABE—FIRST LESSON 

I. The following nouns are German words as well as English: 
Arm, Ring, Finger, Hunger, Hammer, Ball, Wind, Winter, Wolf, 
Name. 

1. The German letters, whether written or printed, differ slightly 
from the English or Latin letters. The printed letters resemble very 
much the letters we are familiar with in engraving and know as Old 
English. 

2. All German nouns begin with a capital letter. This was also 
customary in English as late as our colonial period. 

3. The German word is pronounced differently from the English. 
See chapter on pronunciation. 

4. These German nouns differ from their English equivalent in 
being of the MASCULINE GENDER. This means that when they 
are referred to by a personal pronoun, they are referred to, not as it, 
but as HE—er and that the definite article THE in the nominative 
case of the singular number is der. Note er—der! 

Caution. As other German nouns are feminine and neuter and 
each noun must be referred to as he, she or it according to its gender, 
it is absolutely essential that the beginner should learn the gender of 
each noun as carefully as the spelling and pronunciation of the noun 
itself. 

Read, therefore: der Arm, der Ring, der Finger, der Ball, der 
Wind, der Winter, der Wolf, der Name, der Hunger, der Ham¬ 
mer. 

II. The following adjectives are German words as well as English: 

bitter, blind, mild, wild, warm, still. 

1. German adjectives are written with a small letter even when 
derived from a proper noun: englisch—English, except when the 
adjective is being used as a noun Englisch—English, the language. 

2. German adjectives differ from English adjectives in taking 
various ENDINGS when attributive, i. e., when they stand with a 
noun expressed or understood. For that reason we shall use them for 
the present only in the predicate where they are uninflected, as in 
English. 

III. The following German words differ in spelling from their 
English equivalent but sound like it: der Schuh—the shoe, der Ton— 
the tone, braun—brown. 

ERSTES LESESTUCK—FIRST READING-PIECE 

Der Arm ist lang. Der Ring ist neu. Der Finger ist warm. 
Der Hammer ist still. Der Ball ist rund. Der Wind ist warm. 
Der Winter war kalt. Der Wolf ist wild. Der Name ist lang. 
Der Schuh ist braun. Der Ton ist laut. 


6 


Masculine Nouns, Cont. 


FRAGEN (QUESTIONS) 

1st das der Arm? 

1st der Arm lang? 

Was ist das? 

Was ist lang? 

Wie ist der Arm? 

WORTSCHATZ 

das—that 
was—what? 
ist—is 

war—was (cf. were) 
ja—yes 
wie—how? 

IV. There are in German, as 
questions: 

1. By inverting the verb: Ist da 

2. By using an interrogative w< 


UND ANTWORTEN (ANSWERS) 

Ja, das ist der Arm. 

Ja, er ist lang. 

Das ist der Arm. 

Der Arm ist lang. 

Er ist lang. 

(VOCABULARY) 

lang—long 
laut—loud 
rund—round 
und—and 
neu—new 

in English, two ways of forming 

is der Finger ?—Is that the finger? 
)rd: Was ist das?—What is that? 


ERSTE UBUNG—FIRST EXERCISE 

Form questions like the above on all the sentences of the Lesestiick 
and answer them, using, where possible, the pronoun in the answer. 


ZWEITE AUFGABE—SECOND LESSON 

V. Many German words are easily recognized and remembered 
by their great similarity to their English equivalent: der Freund— 
friend, der Vater—father, der Sohn—son, der Gast—guest, der 
Mann—man, der Hut—hat, der Fuchs—fox, der Ochs—ox, der 
Sommer—summer, der Kaffee—coffee, der Tee—tea, der Kuss— 
kiss, blau—blue, grim—green, grau—gray, fett—fat, alt—old, 
kalt—cold, kiihl—cool, schlau—sly, jung—young. 

VI. The indefinite article A for masculine nouns in the nominative 
singular is ein. Note that the indefinite article ein has not the charac¬ 
teristic masculine ending -er. 

1. Ein also means ONE. When ein means one, it receives a vocal 
accent. For the vowel change between English and German compare 
Stein—stone, allein—alone, so also ein—one. 

2. When ein meaning ONE is used as a PRONOUN referring to a 
masculine noun it has the characteristic -er: einer. Ein Mann ist 
jung, einer ist alt—One man is young, one is old. 

ZWEITES LESESTUCK—SECOND READING-PIECE 

A. Der Fuchs ist schlau. Der Hut ist grau. Der Mann ist 
blind. Der Ochs ist fett. Der Kaffee ist kalt und bitter. Ist der 


Comparison of Adjectives 


7 


Tee warm oder kiihl? Der Sommer ist lang und warm. Der 
Sohn ist jung. Der Vater ist alt. Der Vater war jung. Er ist jetzt 
alt. Der Gast ist ein Freund. Der Vater war ein Sohn. Der Sohn 
ist jetzt ein Vater. 

B. Ein Hammer ist neu, einer ist alt. Ein Ball ist blau, einer 
ist grim. Ein Winter war mild, einer war kalt. Ein Name ist 
lang, einer ist nicht lang. Ein Ton ist laut, einer ist nicht laut. 
Ein Mann ist blind, einer ist nicht blind. Ein Ochs ist fett, 
einer ist nicht fett. Ein Sommer ist warm, einer ist kiihl. Ein 
Mann ist jung, einer ist alt. Ein Hut ist grau, einer ist blau. 

C. Ein Wolf ist wilder als ein Ochs. Ein Ball ist runder als 
ein Hut. Ein Ochs ist fetter als ein Fuchs. Ein Fuchs ist schlauer 
als ein Ochs. Der Vater ist stiller als der Sohn. Der Kaffee ist 
bitterer als der Tee. Der Arm ist langer als der Finger. Der 
Sommer ist warmer als der Winter. Der Winter ist kalter als 
der Sommer. Der Sohn ist jiinger als der Vater. Der Vater ist 
alter als der Sohn. Ein Hut ist grauer als der andere. Ein Ton 
ist lauter als der andere. 


Fragen 

Ist der Mann blind? 

Wie ist der Mann? 

Wer ist blind? 

Wie ist ein Hammer? 

Wie ist der andere? 

Welcher ist wilder, ein Wolf 
als ein Ochs. 


Antworten 
Ja, er ist blind. 

Nein, er ist nicht blind. 

Er ist blind. 

Er ist nicht blind. 

Der Mann ist blind. 

Ein Hammer ist neu. 

Der andere ist alt. 

ler ein Ochs? Ein Wolf ist wilder 


Welcher ist jiinger, der Vater oder der Sohn? Der Sohn ist 
jiinger als der Vater. 


WORTSCHATZ 

als—than (after comparatives) 

ander-e—other 

oder—or 

jetzt—now 

nein—no 

nicht—not 

welcher—which? (masculine) 
wer—who? 

Note: er, der, wer, welcher and the pronoun form einer! 

VII. Adjectives are compared in German, as in English, by add¬ 
ing -er to the positive to form the comparative (and -st to form the 
superlative). This is true of ALL GERMAN ADJECTIVES, HOW¬ 
EVER LONG: bitterer. 


8 


Neuter Nouns 


1. Most monosyllabic adjectives containing the vowels a, o, u 
(not au) modify the vowel in the comparative (and superlative): warm 
warmer; jung, jlinger; alt, alter. Compare English OLD, ELDER. 

ZWEITE UBUNG—SECOND EXERCISE 

Form and answer questions according to suitable models on all the 
sentences of the Lesestiick and be prepared to write either from 
dictation or to answer in writing question asked in German or to turn 
into questions sentences given in German. 

DRITTE AUFGABE—THIRD LESSON 

VIII. The following words are German as well as English: Band 
(ribbon, not musical group), Horn, Land, Nest, Gold, Gas. 

1. The German word differs from the English in pronunciation. 

2. These German words are of NEUTER GENDER and are 
referred to by the pronoun IT -es. The form of the definite article used 
with neuter nouns in the nominative and accusative singular is das. 
Note es—das! 

a. The form of the indefinite article A in the nominative and 
accusative singular is, as for the masculine nominative, ein. 

Note this first of many identities between masculine and neuter 
forms. 

b. When ein meaning ONE is used as a pronoun referring to a 
neuter noun, it has the characteristic ending -es: Ein Band is blau, 
eines ist grim. One ribbon is blue, one is green. For the vocal accent, 
cf. VI. 1. 

IX. The following German words differ in spelling from their 
English equivalent but sound like it: das Bier—beer, das Boot—boat, 
das Eis—ice, das Glas—glass, das Gras—grass, das Haus—house. 

X. Other easily recognized and remembered words are: das Ende— 
end, das Feuer—fire, das Haar—hair, das Paar—pair, das Knie— 
knee, steif—stiff, frei—free, klar—clear, sauer—sour, voll—full. 

Neuter words used in the headings: das Stuck—piece, das Wort- 
word. 


DRITTES LESESTUGK—THIRD READING-PIECE 

A. Das Band ist blau. Das Horn ist neu. Das Land ist wild. 
Das Nest ist warm. Das Gold ist nicht warm. Es ist kalt. Das 
Gas ist klar. Ist das Bier sauer? Ist das Boot braun oder griin? 
Das Haus ist neu. Das Eis ist kalt. Das Glas ist klar. Ist das 
Gras griin oder braun? Das Ende ist frei. Das Feuer ist warm. 
Das Paar ist jung. Ist das Haar lang? Ist das Knie steif? Ist 
das Lesestiick lang? Welches Boot ist neuer? 


Feminine Nouns 


9 


B. Ein Band ist blau, eines ist grim. Ein Horn ist neu, eines 
ist nicht neu. Ein Nest ist warm, eines ist kalt. Ein Boot ist 
braun, eines ist grim. Ein Glas ist klar, eines ist nicht klar. 
Ein Ende ist frei, eines ist nicht frei. Nur ein Knie ist steif, das 
andere ist nicht steif. Ein Knie ist steif, das andere ist steifer. 
Das Wort ist alt. Das Stuck ist neu. Das Glas ist voll. 

WORTSCHATZ 

nur—only 

welches—which (neuter)? 

DRITTE UBUNG—THIRD EXERCISE 

1. Turn the statements above into as many questions as you can, 
especially questions with welches and answer them. 

2. Answer the questions above, using es or eines wherever possible. 

VIERTE AUFGABE—FOURTH LESSON 

XI. The following German words are identical in form with their 
English equivalent: Hand, Butter, Bank (for money). 

Identical in sound is: Maus—mouse. 

Easily recognized and remembered are: Mutter—mother, Sonne— 
sun, Suppe—soup, frisch—fresh, scheu—shy, nah—near, fern—far. 

Words already used in the headings are: Aufgabe—lesson (what is 
assigned), Frage—question, Ant wort—answer, Ubung—exercise. 

1. These words are of FEMININE GENDER and must be re¬ 
ferred to by the pronoun corresponding to English SHE—sie. The form 
of the definite article THE to be used with feminine words in the 
nominative and accusative singular is die. Note sie—die! 

a. The form of the indifinite article A to be used with feminine 
words in the nominative and accusative singular is eine. Note sie, die, 
eine! 

b. When ein meaning ONE is used as a pronoun referring to a 
feminine noun the nominative and accusative singular is eine, exactly 
like the indefinite article. For the vocal accent, cf. VI. 1. 

Note this first evidence of the much greater simplicity in the feminine 
forms than in the masculine and neuter forms. 

VIERTES LESESTUCK—FOURTH READING-PIECE 

A. Die Hand ist warm. Die Butter ist frisch. Die Bank ist 
nah. Die Maus ist scheu. Die Sonne ist fern. Die Suppe ist 
warm. Die Aufgabe ist lang. Die Frage ist leicht. Die Antwort 
ist schwer. Die Mutter ist nah. 

B. Wie ist die Hand? Was ist frisch? Wo ist die Bank? Ist die 
Sonne nah? Nein, sie ist fern. Ist die Aufgabe lang? Nein, sie 


10 


Infinitives 


ist kurz. 1st die Frage schwer ? Nein, sie ist leicht. 1st die Antwort 
leicht? Sie ist schwerer als die Frage. Es ist leichter zu fragen 
als zu antworten, nicht wahr? Die Ubung ist leicht zu lesen. 
Die Aufgabe ist schwer zu lernen. 

C. Eine Aufgabe ist langer und schwerer als die andere. 
Eine Frage ist leichter als eine andere. Ist eine Bank naher als 
die andere? Ist die Sonne ferner als der Mond? Ist die Suppe 
warmer heute als gestern? Sie war warmer gestern, nicht wahr? 
Ist das Wort schwer zu sagen? Welche Bank ist naher? Das 
Gold ist schwer (cf. XIII). Ein Glas Bier ist gut, nicht wahr? 
(Cf. XIV). 


WORTSCHATZ 

kurz (curt)—short lernen—to learn 

leicht (light)—easy fragen—to ask (questions) 

schwer (sore)—heavy, difficult sagen—to say 
welche—which (feminine)? antworten—to answer 

zu—to lesen—to read 

nicht wahr? (Is it) not true? This is used after all forms of ques¬ 
tions, just as is the French N'EST-CE PAS and the Spanish ; NO 
ES VERDAD? c 

gut—good 
heute—today 
gestern—yesterday 
wo—where? 

XII. All German verbs have the infinitive ending -(e)n. 

XIII. Nouns used in the generic or abstract sense require the 
definite article, as in French, Spanish and Italian: gas—das Gas, 
gold—das Gold. 

XIV. In expression such a GLASS OF BEER, a CUP OF TEA 
the OF is not expressed in German, the second noun being in apposition 
with the first. 


VIERTE UBUNG—FOURTH EXERCISE 

Write in German: Hunger. Kiss. The hand is still. The boat is far 
(away). The winter is bitter cold. The bank is new. The hammer is 
still. The house is quiet. The hair is brown. The name is difficult to 
say. The exercise is new. The tea is cold. The fire is close. The house is 
distant. The butter is cold. The sun is further than the moon. A fox 
is slyer than an ox. A lesson is longer than an answer. The father is 
older than the son. The son is younger than the father. A mouse is more 
shy than an ox. A man is more sly than a fox. The shoe is heavier than 
the hat. The arm is longer than the finger. A finger is shorter than an 


German Words in English 


11 


arm. One word is more difficult than the other. One glass of beer is 
colder than the other. How was the summer? Where is the bank? 
What is that? Is the guest blind? Is the friend here today? Was the 
father here yesterday? Where is the son? One ball is blue, one is green. 
One hand is warm, one is cold. One pair is new, one is old. One knee is 
stiff, one is not stiff. One is stiffer than the other. Gold is heavy. Gas 
is light. One glass is full. One ribbon is long. The question is easy. 
The lesson is hard to learn. The moon is nearer than the sun. The 
finger is shorter than the arm, is it not? The man was here yesterday, 
was he not? The tone is clear. A wolf is wild, an ox is mild. A friend is 
near. Where is the mother? That is the end. 

FUNFTE AUFGABE—FIFTH LESSON 

XV. Many words and syllables which we use commonly in English 
can help us in the acquisition of a useful German vocabulary: bal- 
LAST—burden, load, iceBERG—a MOUNTAIN of ice, KINDER- 
GARDEN—a school in which CHILDREN develop naturally as 
flowers in a GARDEN, COLE slaw—slaw made from CABBAGE, 
MEERSCHAUM—clay, light as SEA FOAM, of which pipes are 
made, delkkatESSEN—prepared FOOD or MEAL (really the 
verb to eat used as a noun) GettysBURG—Gettys TOWN or CITY, 
originally stronghold or CASTLE, SCHWEIZER cheese—SWISS 
cheese, SAUER KRAUT—SOUR HERBS. 

der Berg—mountain das Essen—food, meal die Burg—castle, city 
der Garten—garden das Kind—child die Last—burden, 

der Kindergarten— Kinder—children load 

kindergarden das Kraut—herbs die Schweiz— 

der Kohl—cabbage das Meer—sea (cf. mermaid) Switzerland 

der Meerschaum—sea-foam, kind of clay 
der Schaum—foam 

XVI. Many proper names of persons of German ancestry are 
common and useful German words: Jaeger, Knabe, Kraft, Kaufmann, 
Klein, Muller, Ritter, Schoen, Schwarz, Strauss, Keller. 

der Jager—hunter die Kraft—power, strength 

der Keller—cellar 
der Knabe—boy 

der Kaufmann—merchant, i.e. man who buys. 

der Muller—miller 

der Ritter—knight, i.e. one who rode. 

der Strauss—bouquet, posy. 

schon—beautiful, handsome, fine. 

klein—little, small schwarz—(swarthy)—black 

Note that ae, oe (also ue) are usually written a, o, (u) except in proper 
names. 

FUNFTES LESUSTUCK—FIFTH READING-PIECE 

Die Last ist schwer. Der Berg ist blau. Das Kind ist klein. 
Der Garten ist grim und schattig. Der Kindergarten ist eine 
Schule. Das Essen ist warm oder kalt. Die Burg ist schon. Der 


12 


Proper Nouns 


Kohl ist gut zu essen. Die Schweiz ist in Europa. Das Kraut ist 
grim. Der Schaum ist leicht. Der Meerschaum ist auch leicht. 
Das Meer ist schon und blau. Wir essen Kohl. Der Jager und 
der Muller essen Kohl. Der Kaufmann ist in Europa. Der Knabe 
ist jung und klein. Der Schuh ist schwarz. Der Strauss ist 
schon und frisch. Der Keller ist still und kiihl. Das Meer hat 
Kraft. Was hat Kraft? Wie ist der Garten? Wo ist die Schweiz? 
Was ist die Schweiz? Sind Deutschland, Frankreich, Italien 
und Russland auch in Europa? Ist England in Europa? Nein, 
England ist nicht in Europa. England ist eine Insel. Baltimore 
ist in Amerika. Wo ist Baltimore? Was essen der Jager und der 
Muller? Sie essen Kohl. Der Ritter war alt. Wie war der Ritter? 


WORTSCHATZ 


essen—to eat 
auch—also 
hat—has 
in—in 

schattig—shady 
sind—are 
wir—we 


das Deutschland—Germany die Schule—school 

das Frankreich—France die Insel—island 

das Italien—Italy (cf. insular) 

das Russland—Russia 

das Europa—Europe 

das Amerika—America 

das Baltimore—Baltimore 


XVII. Names of cities are neuter, but the article is not expressed 
unless the name of the city is modified by an attributive adjective, as 
BEAUTIFUL BALTIMORE—das schone Baltimore. 


XVIII. Names of countries are nearly all neuter, but the article 
is not expressed with neuter names of countries unless the name is 
modified by an attributive adjective as COLD RUSSIA—das kalte 
Russland. 


a. If, however, the name of the country is feminine, the definite 
article must be used always: Switzerland—die Schweiz, Turkey—die 

Tiirkei. 


XIX. Names of people, likewise, if modified by an attributive 
adjective, take the definite article: der kleine Karl—little Charles, 
der alte Heinrich—old Henry, die kleine Marie—little Mary. 

XX. The first and third persons plural and the second person, 
singular and plural of formal address of all verbs except the verb 
TO BE are in the present tense identical with the infinitive. The first 
person ends regularly in -e: 

ich esse Kohl—I eat cabbage; wir essen Kohl—we eat cabbage 
Sie essen Kohl—you (sing, and plu.) eat cabbage 
sie essen Kohl—they eat cabbage 

Note that in German one spells ich with a small letter and Sie—YOU 
with a large one. Note that sie—THEY is spelt with a small letter, 
except at the beginning of a sentence. Then it can be distinguished from 
Sie—you only by the context, just as in English you know whether 
t-e-a-r is a verb of a noun only by the context or r-e-a-d is the present or 
the past of the verb. 


Latin Words in German 
FUNFTE UBUNG—FIFTH EXERCISE 


13 


1. Turn the statements of the Lesestiick into one or more questions 
and answer them. 

2. Answer the questions by turning them into statements. 

3. Translate the Lesestiick into English in writing. Then put 
it back into German until you can write all the sentences correctly. 
This will prepare you to write from dictation or to translate into 
German English sentences given in class. 


SECHSTE AUFGABE—SIXTH LESSON 


XXI. Early in the Christian era the Germans came into contact 
with Roman civilization. Traders brought Roman luxuries into the 
fixed habitations of the erstwhile. nomads and with the object came 
the name. In addition to doors, Germans now became acquainted 
with windows (Latin fenestra, French fenetre, Italian finestra, German 
das Fenster). Their rude boards were replaced by the long TABLE 
(Latin tabula, French table, German die Tafel) and the round table 
(Latin discus, German der Tisch). Nowadays Tisch is used for all 
tables whether round or not and Tafel in the sense of table is reserved 
for such elevated occasions and personages as “the festive board,” 
“the royal board.” In another sense it means blackboard. Latin 
WINES replaced generally the German mead made from honey and 
SALAD came to take its place in the German diet. Missionaries 
founded churches and SCHOOLS and with these institutions came 
the Latin terminology similarly introduced into the English language. 
CLOISTERS arose within whose walls (Latin murus, English mural, 
German die Mauer) MONKS recited the MASS, PREACHED 
and conducted SCHOOLS where STUDENTS and SCHOLARS 
STUDIED Latin TEXTS in their CLASSES and learned to write (Latin 
scribo, English inscribe, Scriptures, German schreiben) with INK 
(Latin tincta, German die Tinte). One curious and useful word of this 
group is the German word for letter (in correspondence) der Brief 
from Latin brevis, which in its loss of all idea of brevity may be com¬ 
pared with the English “lawyer's brief.” Roman ideas of government 
carried with them such words as Kaiser (Latin Caesar) and regieren 
(Latin regere—to rule), the STATE, the paved road or STREET, 
the POSTAL service, the names of the months and some other time 
words. Later the names of many exotic animals and plants were taken 
into the German from the Latin such, for example, as ROSE, TIGER, 
etc. 

der Brief—letter das Fenster—window die Klasse—class 

der Kaiser—emperor, czar das Kloster—cloister die Mauer—wall (outer) 

der Monch—monk die Messe—mass 

der Sack—sack die Minute—minute 


der Salat—salad 

der Schuler—scholar, pupil 


die Post—post-office, mail 
die Schule—school 


14 


Present Tense 


der Student—student at a univ. die Strasse—street, road 

der Staat—state die Rose—rose 

der Text—text die Tafel—board (black) 

der Tiger—tiger die Tinte—ink 

der Tisch—table 

der Wein—wine 

der Januar, Februar, Marz, April, Mai, Juni, Juli, August, 
September, Oktober, November, Dezember. (All are masculine 
and require the article) predigen—to preach, regieren—to rule, 
schreiben—to write, studieren—to study at a university. 

Note. With the words schreiben and Brief of Latin origin 
contrast the Germanic words ritzen (Eng. to write)—to scratch, 
der Buchstabe (literally, beechstave or chip of beech)—letter of the 
alphabet and lesen (literally to pick out)—to read. These Germanic 
words tell the story of the primitive custom of drawing lots by scratch¬ 
ing symbols on bits of beechbark, throwing the chips into a receptacle 
and then drawing them out in order to choose a leader or otherwise to 
cast lots. Hence also das Buch—book. 

XXII. The definite article is required with the names of the 
months: January—der Januar. 

SEGHSTES LESESTUCK—SIXTH READING-PIECE 

Ein Brief ist lang oder kurz. Der Tisch ist braun. Der Wein 
ist sauer. Ist der Schuler hier heute? Ist der Text klar? Der 
Sack ist voll. Wir essen Salat. Was essen wir? Was essen wir 
auch? Maryland ist ein Staat in Nordamerika. Wo ist Mary¬ 
land? Was ist Maryland? Dis Klasse ist nicht still genug. Ist 
die Tinte schwarz oder blau? Die Minute ist kurz. Die Strasse 
ist lang und schattig. Die Mauer ist grau. Das Fenster ist klar. 
Der Tiger ist hungrig. Der Marz ist langer als der Februar. 
Ist der Juni langer oder kiirzer als der Juli? Der Tisch ist nicht 
rund. Der Monch lernt Englisch. Wir lernen Deutsch. Wir 
schreiben Deutsch. Wir sprechen Deutsch. Die Rose ist schon. 
Die Tafel ist lang und schwarz. Wer predigt? Wo ist die Schule? 
Was schreiben Sie ? Ich schreibe die Aufgabe. Regiert ein Kaiser 
jetzt in Deutschland? Wo ist die Post? Wo ist das Kloster? 
Ist die Messe lang? Wo studiert der Sohn? Was lernen Sie? 
Ich lerne Deutsch. Die Rose ist frisch. 

WORTSCHATZ 
genug—enough 
hungrig—hungry 
englisch—English cf. II. 1 
deutsch—German cf. II. 1 
sprechen—to speak 

XXIII. The verb in the third person singular of the present 
indicative regularly ends in -(e)t, which in regular verbs takes the 
place of the infinitive ending -(e)n: er hat, er ist, er predigt, er 
studiert, er lernt. The complete present tense is then: 


Other Foreign Words in German 


15 


ich lerne—I learn, do learn, am learning, wir lernen—we learn, etc. 


Sie lernen—you learn, etc. 



sie lernen—they learn, etc. 


Note. Do not attempt for the present to use lesen, sprechen, 
essen in the third person singular, as they present a peculiarity there. 

XXIV. Note that the verb with Sie—you is, as in English always 
plural, whether Sie—you is used to one person or to more than one. 
Sie—you is always spelt with a capital, which often distinguishes it from 
sie—they, but not always. Sie—she is always distinguishable by 
having its verb in the singular. 


SECHTE UBUNG—SIXTH EXERCISE 


1. Turn the statements of the Lesestiick into one or more ques¬ 
tions and answer them. 

2. Answer the questions of the Lesestiick. 

3. Translate the Lesestiick in writing and put it back into German 
until you can write all of it correctly. 


SIEBENTE AUFGABE—SEVENTH LESSON 

XXV. Besides the large number of Latin words common to English 
and to German, there are many words which have come into the two 
languages from some other common source such as the Greek and the 
French. 

der Onkel—uncle das Metall—metal die Gousine—cousin 

der Park—park das Museum—museum die Dame—lady 

der Philosoph—philosopher das Theater—theatre die Familie—family 

der Photograph—photographer das Papier—paper die Mode—fashion 

der Plan—plan die Tante—aunt 

Note the un-Germanic accent of Metall, Museum, Philosoph, 
Photograph, Papier, and from Lesson VI. Student, April, August, 
Salat. 

XXVI. The German always writes -er and -el, never -re and-le, 
as we sometimes do in English, due to French influence: 

der Artikel—article das Theater—theatre die Bibel—Bible 

der Mantel—mantle, cloak die Nadel—needle 

der Muskel—muscle die Waffel—waffle 

der Titel—title 


)■ 


16 


Plural of The Pronoun 


XXVII. In some common words the English has developed a B 
after an M, where the German shows MM: 

der Kamm—comb das Lamm—lamb die Nummer—number 

der Schlummer—slumber 

kammen—to comb, schlummern—to slumber 

XXVIII. The words der, das, die, when pronounced with an 
accent mean THAT: der Mann—that man, das Kind—that child, 
die Mutter—that mother. Gf. ein—one, VI. 1. 

SIEBENTES LESESTUCK—SEVENTH READING-PIECE 

Das Gold ist ein Metall. Der Park ist schattig. Der Philosoph 
ist alt. Der Photograph ist jung. Der Onkel ist freigebig. Die 
Tante ist schon. Die Cousine ist in Europa. Die Familie ist 
gross. Das Papier ist blau. Wo ist das Theater? Wo ist das 
Museum? Der Mantel ist warm. Die Mode is neu: Die Bibel ist 
alt. Der Titel ist interessant. Eine Waffel ist rund und braun— 
und gut zu essen, nicht wahr? Die Dame kammt das Haar. 
Ist die Nadel lang oder kurz? Ist der Muskel steif oder nicht? 
Was ist der Artikel? Der Plan ist klar. Ist der Kamm neu? 
Schlummert das Kind? Der Schlummer ist sanft. 

WORTSCHATZ 

freigebig—generous, i.e. giving freely 

gross—great, big, large 

interessant—interesting 

sanft (soft)—gentle (not in the sense of tame) 

SIEBENTE UBUNG—SEVENTH EXERCISE 

1. Turn the statements of the Lesestiick into questions and answer 
them. 

2. Answer the questions. 

3. Write out a translation of the Lesestiick and then retranslate 
your translation into German until you make no mistakes. 

ACHTE AUFGABE—EIGHTH LESSON 

XXIX. We have already seen that the plural of the personal 
pronouns er, es, and sie was the one form sie—THEY, identical in form 
with the singular feminine sie—she and only to be distinguished from 
it by the verb in agreement with it. This is the first of many identities 
in form between feminine and plural forms. The article with any noun, 
regardless of gender, is in the nominative and accusative plural die, 
identical in form with the article in the nominative and accusative of 
the feminine. Note sie—die! Since there is but one form for the plural 
article and pronoun, we shall henceforth distinguish between forms as 
masculine, neuter, feminine and plural. 


Plurals of Nouns 


17 


But though distinctions of gender fall away in the plural forms, the 
formation of the plural of a German noun depends primarily upon its 
gender, as we shall see,—another reason for learning the gender of 
every noun as an integral part of the noun. 

XXX. English forms the plural of nouns regularly by adding -s 
to the singular. But there are other ways: 1. ox-OXEN; 2. sheep, 
SHEEP; deer, DEER; 3. man, MEN, foot, FEET, goose, GEESE. 
These rare English plurals will serve as our introduction to the for¬ 
mation of German plurals. 

In German the manner of forming the plural of any noun depends 
first and foremost on the GENDER of the noun and secondly, on 
whether the noun is a POLYSYLLABLE or a MONOSYLLABLE. 

XXXI. FEMININE nouns form their plural (like ox, oxen) by 
adding -(e)n to the singular POLYSYLLABLES add -n, MONOSYL¬ 
LABLES -en. 

ACHTES LESESTUCK—EIGHTH READING-PIECE 

Eine Schule und zwei Schulen sind drei Schulen. Eine Bank 
und drei Banken sind vier Banken. Eine Minute und vier 
Minuten sind funf Minuten. Eine Nadel und fiinf Nadeln sind 
sechs Nadeln. Eine Bibel und sechs Bibeln sind sieben Bibeln. 
Eine Burg und sieben Burgen sind acht Burgen. Eine Strasse 
und neun Strassen sind zehn Strassen. Eine Frage und zehn 
Fragen sind elf Fragen. Eine Ubung und elf Ubungen sind 
zwolf Ubungen. Drei und zehn sind dreizehn. Vier und zehn 
sind vierzehn. Fiinf und zehn sind fiinfzehn. Sechs und zehn 
sind sechzehn. Sieben und zehn sind siebzehn. Acht und zehn 
sind achtzehn. Neun und zehn sind neunzehn. Zehn und zehn 
sind zwanzig. Die Antworten sind lang. Die Aufgaben sind 
schwer. Die Klassen sind gross. England und Japan sind Inseln. 
Sind die Waffeln warm und gut zu essen? Die Mauern sind 
grau. Wie viel sind acht und drei? Wie viel sind acht weniger 
drei? Wie viel sind drei mal drei? Wie viele Nadeln haben Sie? 

WORTSCHATZ 

zwei—two, drei—three, vier—four, funf—five, sechs—six, sieben 
•—seven, acht—eight, neun—nine, zehn—ten, elf—eleven, zwolf— 
twelve, dreizehn—thirteen, vierzehn—fourteen, fiinfzehn—fifteen, 
sechzehn—sixteen, siebzehn—seventeen,achtzehn—eighteen, neun¬ 
zehn—nineteen, zwanzig—twenty. In counting: eins—one. 

haben—to have das Japan—Japan, cf. XVIII 

mal—times 

wie viel—how much? wie viele—how many? 
weniger—less. Note comparative form. 

XXXII. MASCULINE and NEUTER POLYSYLLABLES, 
like sheep—sheep, do not differ in the nominative and accusative plural 
from the nominative singular, which we already know. For the article 
and pronoun see XXVIII. 


18 


Plurals of Nouns, Cont. 

ACHTES LESESTUCK—II 

Wir haben zehn Finger. Wir haben hier fiinf Fenster. Wir 
haben viele Theater in Baltimore. Wir lesen viele Artikel. Es 
sind keine Schuler in Goucher College. Es sind jetzt keine 
Kaiser in Europa. Wie viele Onkel haben Sie? Hatte der Kaiser 
viele Titel? Zwei Muller und zwei Muller sind vier Muller. 

WORTSCHATZ 

hatte—first and third person singular imperfect of haben: ich, er, 
sie, es hatte—I, he, she, it had. 

kein—negative of ein: NOT A or NO. In the nominative and 
accusative plural keine. cf. die, sie, viele. 

es—there, introductory, as contrasted with the adverb of place 
there—dort, may be followed by a singular of a plural verb according 
to the following noun which is the real subject. 

XXXIII. MASCULINE and NEUTER MONOSYLLABLES, 
like man—men, foot, feet, modify the vowel, if the vowel is a, o, u, or 
au to form the plural. 

1. MASCULINE monosyllables, in addition, add -e to the singular. 

2. NEUTER monosyllables, in addition, add -er to the singular. 

ACHTES LESESTUCK III 

A. Die Ringe sind schon. Die Balle sind rund. Die Wolfe 
sind wild. Die Tone sind klar. Die Freunde sind hier. Die Fuchse 
sind schlau. Die Gaste sind hungrig. Die Sohne sind junger als 
die Onkel. Die Hute sind neu. Die Berge sind blau. Die Briefe 
sind lang. Die Tische sind nicht rund. Die Plane sind nicht 
klar. Die Monche sind alt. 

B. Wie viele Bander haben Sie? Der Ochs hat zwei Horner. 
Wir haben zwolf Glaser. Der Mann hat zwei Hauser. Der Vater 
hat viele Kinder. Deutschland und Frankreich sind zwei Lander 
in Europa. Es sind dort drei Nester. 

ACHTE UBUNG—EIGHTH EXERCISE 

1. Count from 1 to 20; count by 2’s, by 4’s, by 5’s to 20, and to 
18 by 3's. 

2. Turn the statements in the three sections of the Lesestiick 
into one or more questions and answer them. 

3. Answer the questions. 

4. Be able to write any or all of the sentences correctly. 

Note. Nouns, which we have had but which are not included in 
these exercises (father, mother, etc.), have either an irregular plural 
or none at all. 


Present Tense 


19 


NEUNTE AUFGABE—NINTH LESSON 

XXXIV. We have already seen (XII, XXIII) the infinitive and 
present tense of a typical German verb and noted the peculiarities of 
the pronouns. The German has, of course, a THOU and a YE form but 
we shall postpone the learning of them at present for the sake of sim¬ 
plification. 

1. Review carefully paragraphs XXI and XXIII. 

a. Like lernen conjugate the following verbs that we have already 
had: sagen, fragen, kammen, schlummern, schreiben, predigen, 
regieren, studieren, also the following words which have a stem 
identical with the English singen—to sing, sinken—to sink, springen 
—to spring, jump; and the following, which are derived from adjectives 
or nouns already known: andern—to make other, i.e. to change, 
knieen—to kneel, kiissen—to kiss, fiillen—to fill, befreien—to set 
free, bejahen—to affirm, verneinen—to deny, erklaren—to explain, 
erfrischen—to refresh, verkiirzen—to shorten, photographieren— 
to photograph; and kaufen—to buy and jagen—to hunt, from which 
Kaufmann and Jager are themselves derived. 

2. A verb the stem of which ends in d or t has -et in the third 
person singular, merely in order that one may hear both the t or d of 
the stem and the -t of the ending: 

ich antworte—I answer wir antworten—we answer 

Sie antworten—you (sing, or plu.) answer 
sie) she ) 

er [antwortet—he [answers sie antworten—they answer 
es J it J 

a. Like antworten conjugate the two verbs which have a stem 
identical with the English binden—to bind, tie, and linden—to find; 
and the following verbs derived from already known nouns, adjectives 
or verbs: beantworten—to answer (a QUESTION, not with a 
person), befreunden—to befriend, enden—to end (intrans.), 
blenden—to make blind, dazzle, nisten—to nest. 

3. A verb ending in -eln or -ern drops the e of the stem before 
the ending -e in the first person singular: 

ich behandle—I handle, treat, wir behandeln—we treat 
Sie behandeln—you treat 
er ] he 1 

sie fbehandelt—she} treats sie behandeln—they treat 

es J it J 

a. Like behandeln conjugate erleichtern—to lighten, relieve 
and verschonern—to beautify. 

4. Some verbs, as in English, are used only in the third person 
singular. They are called impersonal verbs, since they never have 
any other subject than IT—es. All expressions of time and weather are 
impersonal: 


20 


Hortatory and Imperative 


Es ist zehn Uhr (o'clock). Es ist flinf Minuten vor (before) 
zehn. Es ist zwanzig Minuten nach (after) elf. Es ist halb zwolf 

(It is half past ELEVEN!) 

Es regnet—it is raining. Es schneit—It is snowing. Es donnert— 
It is thundering. Es blitzt—It is lightning. Es hagelt—It is hailing. 

5. Some verbs may be used with an object which is different from 
the subject: I see the man, or with an object which is identical with 
the subject. I SEE MYSELF. The second use is called REFLEXIVE, 
because the action of the verb reflects,i.e. bends back upon the subject. 
Some verbs are always reflexive: I BETAKE MYSELF. One such 
verb in German is sich entfernen—to go away, retire. Sich—ONE'S 
SELF, HIMSELF, HERSELF, ITSELF, YOURSELF, THEM¬ 
SELVES is the only truly reflexive pronoun in German and is used, 
as indicated, for ALL THE THIRD PERSONS, masculine, feminine 
and neuter, singular and plural and for the FORMAL ADDRESS. 
For the first person singular and plural, the proper form of the personal 
pronoun is used, cf. English: Now I lay ME down to sleep. 

ich entferne mich—I go away,wir entfernen uns—we go away 
Sie entfernen sich—you go away 
er 1 he ] 

sie | entfernt sich—she | goes away, sie entfernen sich—they 
es j it J go away 

a. Like sich entfernen conjugate sich nahern—to approach, 
sich erkalten—to catch cold, sich bewegen—to move, sich befinden 
—to be (as to health). As in French it is necessary, when speaking 
of one's health, to avoid the verb TO BE and use either ALLER 
or SE PORTER, so in German it is necessary to avoid the verb TO 
BE and use sich befinden. 

6. For the expression LET US plus an infinitive, the German uses 
a form like our poetic: '“Now TREAD WE a measure!" quoth young 
Lochinvar.' This form, though subjunctive, is in German as in English, 
identical with the indicative WE TREAD but the order of the subject 
and the verb are reversed: Lernen wir!—Let us study. Sagen wir! 
Let us say. 

a. There is one irregular form, that of the verb sein—TO BE: 
Seien wir—Let us be, the indicative being, as we have seen, wir sind. 

7. Similarly the imperative of formal address is identical in form 
with the present indicative, but the order of the words is the same as 
in the hortatory: Lernen Sie—Learn! Sagen Sie—Say! Tell! 

a. There is one irregular form, that of the verb sein—TO BE: 
Seien Sie—Be! 

Note. The German expresses the pronoun subject in the imperative 
of formal address. When we come to the THOU and YE forms we 
shall find, as in English, no subject expressed. 

XXXV. The reflexive pronoun (mich, uns, sich) stands AS 
NEAR THE BEGINNING of the clause as possible: Wir befinden 
uns heute sehr gut—We are feeling very well today. 


Present Tense, Cont. 


21 


XXXVI. The negative nicht stands AS NEAR THE END 
of the clause as possible, often indeed, at the very end, unless it negates 
some special word other than the verb in the clause. Then it precedes 
the special word which it negates. 

Er bejaht die Frage nicht; er verneint sie. 

Entfernen Sie sich nicht. 

But: Ich befinde mich heute nicht gut — I am not well to day. 

NEUNTE UBUNG—NINTH EXERCISE 

Schreiben Sie auf Deutsch: I am learning the lesson. I am not 
learning the lesson. Learn the Lesson. Let us learn the lesson. Let us 
kneel. Kneel! Fill the glasses! Let us fill the glasses. Do you deny it? 
I am writing the exercises. The sun blinds me. The merchant befriends 
me. The exercise ends here. The pupils (m) answer the questions. 
I am photographing the house. The lady is kissing the child. Treat the 
children well. Kiss them! (sie —they, them). The miller does not set 
the mouse free. We are buying ribbons. They are refreshing themselves. 
Let us refresh ourselves. The lady is asking me. Do you hunt? No 
emperor is ruling now in Europe. A monk is preaching today. The 
merchant affirms the question. The philosopher explains the question. 
The answer relieves me. The lady beautifies herself. Is it raining? 
No, but it is thundering and lightning. It is snowing? No, but it is 
hailing. The hunters find the children and go away. The children go 
away also. Let us not go away. I am going away now. How are you? 
I am well (gut) and (the) father is well also. Where are you? I am 
here. We are in Baltimore. Are you shortening the lesson today? 
Change the word! I treat the children well. It is two o'clock. It is 
twenty minutes of four. It is fifteen minutes after six. It is half past 
nine. 


ZEHNTE AUFGABE—TENTH LESSON 

XXXVII. A number of German verbs offer certain types of 
peculiarities in the present indicative. This peculiarity is, among the 
forms we know, confined to the THIRD PERSON SINGULAR 
of the STRONG VERBS or verbs corresponding to English sing, sang, 
sung, etc. 

1. Strong verbs having a in the infinitive modify the a to a in the 
third person of the present indicative: 

ich falle —I fall wir fallen —we fall 

Sie fallen —you fall 

er fallt —he falls sie fallen —they fall 

a. Like fallen —to fall are backen —to bake, hangen —to hang 
(intr.) and waschen —to wash. (Wash may be used reflexively as in 
English.) Hereafter such verbs will be marked with an asterisk. 

2. Strong verbs with SHORT e and three with LONG e in the 
infinitive change the e to i in the third person singular of the present 
indicative: 


22 


Present Tense, Cont. 


ich esse—I eat wir essen—we eat 

Sie essen—you eat 

er isst—he eats sie essen—they eat 

a. Like essen are fressen—to eat (used of animals eating), ver- 
gessen—to forget, brechen—to break, helfen—to help, melken—to 
milk, sprechen—to speak, stechen—to stick, sting. Hereafter such 
verbs will be marked with an asterisk. 

b. Like essen, though having LONG e in the infinitive are geben— 
to give, treten—to tread, to step, which has tritt and nehmen—to 
take, which has nimmt in the third person singular present indicative. 

Note the tt and mm in these forms. 

3. Strong verbs having LONG e in the infinitive present the fol¬ 
lowing possibilities: 

a. Some have NO CHANGE in the third person singular: 

ich gehe—I go wir gehen—we go 

Sie gehen—you go 

er geht—he goes sie gehen—they go. 

Like gehen in having no vowel change are stehen—to stand, and 
verstehen—to understand and several less common verbs. 

b. Some change LONG e to SHORT i. See XXXVII. 2. b. for 
geben, nehmen, treten. 

c. Some change the LONG e of the infinitive to ie in the third 
person singular of the present indicative: 

ich lese—I read wir lesen—we read 

Sie lesen—you read 

er liest—he reads sie lesen—they read. 

Like lesen are sehen—to see, stehlen—to steal, the impersonal 
verb geschehen—to happen and a few others, which will be marked 
hereafter with a double asterisk (**). 

Note. The student should remember that there are very few 
strong verbs in German, as in English, and fewer still which have an a 
or an e in the infinitive and therefore could possibly exhibit one of the 
above peculiarities. Therefore the task of learning these verbs is 
not great. Also, as the strong verbs are the most commonly used, it 
is impossible not to learn them rapidly. 

ZEHNTES LESESTUCK—TENTH READING-PIECE 

Der Jager isst Kohl. Der Wolf frisst das Kind. Das Kind 
bricht das Glas. Das hilft nicht. Der Kaufmann spricht Deutsch. 
Die Nadel sticht mich. Ich habe eine Nadel, eine Stechnadel, 
eine Hutnadel und eine Haarnadel. Der Mann milkt die Kuh. 
Der Knabe tritt in das Haus. Er nimmt die Bibel und liest. 
Der Jager sieht die Burg. Der Monch steht da. Der Student 
geht dahin. Geschieht es jetzt? Der Mann stiehlt das Gold. 


Present Tense, Cont. 


23 


Der Knabe wascht sich. Das Kind fallt. Der Gast backt und isst 
eine Waffel. Das Kind gibt die Hand. Der Schuler vergisst die 
Aufgabe. Der Student vergisst die Klasse. Vergessen Sie nicht 
die Bibel zu lesen. Sprechen wir Deutsch! Nehmen Sie das 
Papier. 

XXXVIII L Da and dahin. Da means THERE IN THAT PLACE 
and is usually used with verbs of rest, though it may be used with 
verbs of motion if the motion is confined to the place mentioned, as: 
The child was running about in the garden. Dahin means THERE 
TO THAT PLACE and can be used only with verbs of motion and 
then only when the motion is into a different place; as The child ran 
into the garden. 

a. Similarly one distinguishes in questions between wo—WHERE 
IN WHAT PLACE and wohin—WHERE, WHITHER, INTO 
WHAT PLACE. Wo interrogative corresponds to da declarative and 
wohin interrogative to dahin declarative. The distinction between 
da and dahin, wo and wohin must be learned carefully and never 
forgotten. 

XXXIX. In the sentence: Vergessen Sie nicht die Bibel zu 
lesen, note that in a German sentence, the INFINITIVE (with or 
without the word zu) must stand AT THE VERY END OF AN 
INDEPENDENT CLAUSE. This is true whether the infinitive is 
used after some such verb as can, may, might, forget, remember, etc. 
or whether it is a part of the future tense. Where we say I shall see him 
today, the German says I shall him today SEE. 

ZEHNTE UBUNG—TENTH EXERCISE 

Schreiben Sie auf Deutsch: Does the child break the glasses? 
Who is eating salad? Do wolves eat children? Does the merchant speak 
German? Is the hatpin sticking you? A pin is sticking me. Who is 
milking the cow? Where is the boy going (to)? Take the Bible and 
read it. Who is standing there? What is happening today? Wash the 
glasses. Is the child washing itself? What is falling? Who is baking 
waffles? Are you forgetting to speak German? Do not forget to go there. 
What does he see there? Is the child giving its (the) hand? Does he 
forget to read the lesson and to write the exercises? What is she reading? 
Where is she? The child sees the cow. The cow sees the child. 

ELFTE AUFGABE—ELEVENTH LESSON 

XL. In English the first person singular of the present indicative 
of a verb is usually like the infinitive and the third person singular ends 
in -s: to come, I come, he comes. But there are a few verbs which have 
no infinitive and the third person singular is like the first: I can, he 
can; I may, he may; I must, he must; I shall, he shall; I will, he will. 
These verbs have cognates in German which present the same peculiar¬ 
ity in the present tense. The German verbs, however, which are gener¬ 
ally referred to as the MODAL AUXILIARIES, have an infinitive 


24 


- Present Tense, Cont. 


and not only an infinitive but a complete regular conjugation including 
the future and all past tenses. For the time being we shall consider 
only their present tense. Like their English cognates, the modal auxil¬ 
iaries have no zu—to with the dependent infinitive. 


1. konnen—to be able, cog. can 

ich kann wir konnen 
Sie konnen 
er kann sie konnen 

3. mogen— to be probably, cog. 
may; also means to like to 

ich mag wir mogen 
Sie mogen 
er mag sie mogen 

5. wollen—to want to, cog, will 
to be determined to 

ich will wir wollen 
Sie wollen 
er will sie wollen 


2. miissen—to have to, cog. 
must 

ich muss wir miissen 
Sie miissen 
er muss sie miissen 

4. diirfen—to be permitted, 
(the MAY of social life) 
ich darf wir diirfen 
Sie diirfen 
er darf sie diirfen 

6. sollen—to be expected or ap¬ 
pointed to cog. shall 
ich soil wir sollen 
Sie sollen 
er soli sie sollen 


7. Presenting the same conjugational irregularities as the modals 
is wissen—to know, cog. to wit (facts, not people). 

ich weiss wir wissen 
Sie wissen 
er weiss sie wissen 

Note 1. Sollen is the only one of the six modals which does not 
have in the singular of the present indicative a vowel different from 
the vowel of the infinitive and the plural of the present. 

Note 2. Wollen and sollen are the only two of the six modals 
which do not have a modified vowel (Umlaut) in the infinitive. 

XLI. The modal auxiliaries, while corresponding in general to 
their English cognates in meaning, present some peculiarities in 
meaning as well as in form. 

1. konnen and miissen, express a POSSIBILITY (konnen) or a 
NECESSITY (miissen) dependent upon THINGS OR CIRCUM¬ 
STANCES or upon PHYSICAL LAW. 

a. konnen has a special use as KNOW in such phrases as Er kann 
Deutsch—He knows German. This use its strictly limited and implies 
some unexpressed infinitive such as: He can (read, write, speak) Ger¬ 
man. 


b. Since there is no such thing as negative necessity, the verb 
miissen is never used with the negative. For: I do NOT HAVE TO 
and I MUST NOT we shall learn other verbs. 


Modal Meanings 


25 


c. Since there is no real necessity in such statements as: You must 
be tired (hungry, etc.), the verb miissen is not used in them. We 
shall see presently how this idea is expressed. 

2. mogen and wollen express a POSSIBILITY (mogen) or a 
NECESSITY (wollen) dependent upon the taste, inclination or will 
of the SUBJECT. 

a. Since mogen expresses a possibility dependent on the will of 
the SUBJECT it is never used as the may of permissions, in which the 
permission depends obviously on the will or inclination of another. 

b. Since wollen expresses the will of the SUBJECT, wollen is 
never used for the English word will in the future tense, where mere 
futurity, and no determination is implied. Er will gehen means HE 
WANTS (or IS DETERMINED) TO GO, not: He will go. 

c. Since wollen expresses the will of the SUBJECT, it has come to 
have a secondary meaning: He claims to be rich—Er will reich sein. 

cf. XLIII. 3. b. 

3. diirfen and sollen express a POSSIBILITY (diirfen) or a 
NECESSITY (sollen) dependent upon the WILL OF ANOTHER 
THAN THE SUBJECT or upon MORAL LAW. 

a. diirfen expresses therefore the MAY of permission in social 
intercourse, since this permission depends upon the inclination of 
ANOTHER THAN THE SUBJECT: Darf ich Sie sehen—May I see 
you? 

b. diirfen expresses therefore also the MUST in MUST NOT, 
since MUST NOT is a matter of moral law. 

c. Since sollen expresses the will of ANOTHER than the subject, 
it is never used for the English SHALL of the future tense, where no 
determination is implied, only futurity. Sollen is rather the SHALL 
of commandments: Du sollst nicht stehlen—Thou shallt not steal! 

d. Since sollen expresses the will of ANOTHER than the subject, 
it has come to have besides its primary meaning, also the secondary 
meaning TO BE SAID TO BE: Sie soli schon sein—She is said to 
be beautiful. 

ELFTES LESESTUCK—ELEVENTH READING-PIECE 

Konnen Sie die Frage beantworten? Wollen Sie sie beant- 
worten? Konnen Sie Deutsch? Kann der Mann Englisch? Sie 
miissen die Ubung schreiben. Sie diirfen nicht vergessen, die 
Ubung zu schreiben. Sie diirfen sich jetzt entfernen. Er soli 
sich jetzt sehr (very) gut befinden. Das Kind will das Nest 
linden. Der Philosoph mag studieren. Es mag regnen. Ich darf 
nicht gehen. Mogen Sie lesen? Sie soli das Kind gut behandeln. 
Sie will das Kind kiissen aber die Mutter mag es nicht. Der 
Monch soil heute predigen. Der Knabe darf die Kuh nicht 
melken. Wissen Sie das? Nein, ich weiss es nicht. Die Mutter 


26 


Coordinating Conjunctions 


darf es nicht wissen. Ich mag gehen. Mogen Sie Deutsch? 
Wer will nicht schon sein? Wer soil jetzt lesen? Wir konnen 
Deutsch und Englisch. Der Mann will jiinger sein als er ist. 
Der Mann will blind sein, aber er sieht ganz (quite) gut. Deutsch 
soli schwer sein, aber wir finden es nicht sehr schwer. Wissen 
Sie, was Sie sagen? Der Kaufmann will englisch sein, aber er 
ist deutsch. Ich darf heute nicht in das Theater gehen, denn 
ich war gestern da. Der Freund darf gehen, allein er will nicht. 
Er ist nicht blind allein er kann nicht gut sehen. Nicht der 
Student sondern der Philosoph weiss es. Sie soil gehen allein 
sie will nicht. Er will nicht lesen sondern schreiben. Es ist 
jetzt nicht der Juni sondern der Oktober. 

XLII. As in English the conjunctions AND, OR, BUT and FOR 
are coordinating conjunctions, that is, they connect clauses of equal 
value, so in German their equivalents are likewise coordinating: und— 
and, oder—or, denn—for, aber, allein, sondern—but. 

a. allein—BUT is used to restrict either a positive or a negative 
statement. It may often be translated by the English ONLY: He is 
well but (allein) he does not look so; or: He is not well but (allein) 
you would never guess it. Therefore: Er ist nicht blind allein er kann 
nicht gut sehen. 

b. sondern—BUT may be used only after a negative and only 
then when not mere restriction but COMPLETE SUBSTITUTION 
is involved: It is not she but her mother. Therefore: Nicht der Student 
sondern der Philosoph weiss es. 

c. Aber—BUT is used everywhere else and is therefore of much 
more frequent use than allein and sondern. It may never be used 
where sondern is required, though it can be used without grammatical 
error for allein. 

ELFTE UBUNG—ELEVENTH EXERCISE 

Schreiben Sie auf Deutsch: Do you wish to affirm or to deny the 
question? Who wishes to answer the question? Do you wish to go away? 
You may. May I approach? The man must not know it. It is not the 
philosopher but the photographer. I do not want to go for I am not 
well today. I cannot write for my finger is stiff. She wants to go but 
her (the) father is not well. Is the child determined to find the nest? 
Does the hunter claim to be younger than I? He is not younger but 
older. Who wants to bake the waffles? Who likes to eat them? Does 
the pupil (m) claim to know it? Do you know German and English or 
do you know English only? You must not forget to read the Bible. 
Have you paper? You must not forget to take a book. May I write 
today in (auf) English? No, you must write the exercises in German. 
Don’t you know that? What shall I do? You are supposed to write 
your the lesson in German. She is said to be beautiful. Do you know 
your lesson? 


Present Tense, Cont. 


27 


ZWOLFTE AUFGABE—TWELFTH LESSON 

XLIII. Three irregular verbs: haben—to have, sein—to be, 
*werden—to become. 

1. ich habe—I have wir haben—we have 

Sie haben—you have 

er hat—he HAS sie haben—they have 

Note that the form hat is irregular is exactly the same way as the 
form HAS, i.e. the consonant of the stem, Eng. v, Ger. b, falls out, 
while in both languages the ending is regular. 

2. ich bin—I am wir sind—we are 

Sie sind—you are 

er ist—he is sie sind—they are 

3. ich werde—I become, get wir werden—we become, get 

Sie werden—you become, get 

er wird—he becomes, gets sie werden—they become, get 

Note that verbs, the stem of which ends in d or t and which 
have vowel change in the third person singular of the present 
indicative, do not add the ending -t, the form being unmistak¬ 
able without further sign than that of the vowel change and the 
stem itself affording the expected t-sound. There are not more 
than five such verbs. 

a. werden means GET in the sense of BECOME, that is 
when followed by an adjective in English, NOT acquire, which 
is followed in English by a noun. 

b. werden is often used in German where in English we use 
to be: He wants to be rich (i.e. to get or become rich)—Er will 
reich werden, cf. XLI. 2. e. 

XLIV. The present tense is frequently used in German, as in 
English, for the future. This is especially frequent when some adverb 
of time is present to render the idea of futurity: Ich gehe morgen 
nach Neuyork—I am going to New York tomorrow. 

XLV. The present tense must be used, as in French and Spanish, 
when the action begun in the past is CONTINUING IN THE PRES¬ 
ENT. In English we use the perfect tense: Ich bin schon lange hier— 
I have been here already a long time. 

Note. This construction is usually accompanied by the word schon. 

XLVI. The future tense of all verbs is formed in German as in 
English by the use of an auxiliary verb with the present infinitive of 
the verb in question. In English, however, we use SHALL for the 
auxiliary of the first person and WILL for the auxiliary of the second 
and third, in German one uses simply the present tense of the verb 
werden as auxiliary with the infinitive of the verb in question, thus: 


28 


Future Tense 


ich werde—schreiben wir werden—schreiben 

I shall write we shall write 

Sie werden—schreiben—you will write 
er wird—schreiben sie werden—schreiben 

he will write they will write 

Note. For the position of the infinitive see XXXIX. 

Note. Review XL. 5, 6, XLI. 2. b, XLI. 3. c. 

XLVII. The future, usually with the word wohl expressed but 
not translated, is used to translate the MUST of such expressions as: 
You must be hungry, (tired, etc.) Sie werden wohl hungrig (mude, 
etc.) sein. Cf. XLI. 1. b. 

ZWOLFTES LESESTUGK—TWELFTH READING-PIECE 

Die Dame hat zwei Kinder. Ich habe keine Kinder. Haben 
Sie Kinder? Sind Sie warm genug? Nein, ich bin nicht warm 
genug. Ich kann nicht warm genug werden. Sie werden sich 
wohl nicht gut befinden. Sie werden sich wohl erkalten. Ja 
das ist es: ich erkalte mich. Gehen Sie morgen nach Neuyork? 
Nein, ich gehe schon heute. Sind Sie schon lange in Baltimore ? 
Ja, ich bin schon lange hier. Ich muss jetzt nach Hause (gehen). 
Sind Sie in Neuyork zu Hause? Ja, ich bin jetzt schon lange 
dort zu Hause. Werden Sie sich dort gut befinden? Ja, ich 
werde mich zu Hause gut befinden. Der Mann wird wohl blind 
sein. Der Vater wird wohl jetzt alt sein. Das Knie wird wohl 
steif sein. Nein, es ist jetzt nicht steif, aber es wird morgen 
steif sein. Die Aufgabe ist zu lang. Ich lerne sie schon lange 
und ich kann sie noch nicht. Wir werden alter. Werden Sie 
hungrig? Essen wir! Ich darf es heute nicht, aber ich werde es 
morgen miissen. Ich kann es jetzt nicht aber ich werde es 
morgen konnen. 

Note. I shall have TO—Ich werde es miissen. 

When the dependent infinitive is omitted after a modal auxiliary 
the word es must stand for it. 

WORTSCHATZ 

lange—a long time. One of the rare adverbial forms. Usually the 

adjective is used as an adverb, for example gut—well. 

genug—enough 

nach—to (with places, zu being used with people) 

Learn the idioms: nach Hause—home (motion) 
zu Hause—at home (rest) 

noch—still, yet (temporal), noch nicht—not yet. Note order! 

schon—already. Used where we should consider it redundant in 

English. 

zu—too. 


Accusative Case 


29 


ZWOLFTE UBUNG—TWELFTH EXERCISE 

Schreiben Sie auf Deutsch: I can do it today, but I shall not be 
able TO tomorrow. He has permission to go today, but he will not have 
permission tomorrow. I must not go today but I shall have TO to¬ 
morrow. Are you getting hungry? I am not feeling well; I must be 
hungry. I have been in New York a long time but I am going to Balti¬ 
more tomorrow. Where is your home (i.e. Where are you at home?) 
Are you catching cold? I must be catching cold. I shall be all right 
(well) at home. He does not know the lesson yet, but he has been 
studying it a long time. My (the) father and my (the) mother are 
getting old; are they not? What does the child know? It knows English 
and German. The burden must be too heavy. I shall write the exercise. 
He will find the house. Who is answering the questions? Who wants to 
answer the question? You may answer the question. The child will be 
permitted to answer the question. How long have you been here? 
A long time. The man will become blind; will he not? She will have no 
mail today. Do you want a pin or a hairpin? 


DREIZEHNTE AUFGABE 

XLVIII. It may have struck the student that, though we have used 
neuter, feminine and plural nouns in the accusative as the direct 
object of transitive verbs, we have so far used no masculine nouns 
except in the nominative. The reason is obvious. Neuter, feminine and 
plural nouns, pronouns and all kinds of modifiers have the same form 
in the accusative as in the nominative. Even feminine and plural 
pronouns which differ in English in the nominative and accusative 
do not differ in German: she, her and they, them are respectively, 
as we know, sie—sie and sie—sie. MASCULINE NOUNS, too, are 
regularly alike in the nominative and accusative, but MASCULINE 
PRONOUNS AND OTHER MODIFIERS have different forms for 
the accusative from those of the nominative. Observe the following 
forms: 

N. er—he der ein wer—who 


A. ihn—him den einen wen—whom 

Compare the forms of the three genders and the plural: 

! Tische 
~ sie 

Nester 

Frauen Sie 

Note in the masculine pronoun the inversion of English HI to 
German IH. 

XLIX. The accusative is used for the object of all transitive 
verbs: Ich sehe den Mann—I see the man. Ich sehe ihn—I see him. 
Wen sehen Sie—Whom do you see? 


Note. Not all verbs which are transitive in English are transitive 
in German. For example: Answer me. ME is direct object in English, 
but is in the dative in German. Antworten is not a transitive verb, 
but beantworten is transitive: Beantworten Sie die Frage. 


30 


Accusative Case, Cont. 


L. The accusative is used in certain TIME EXPRESSIONS. 

1. To express DEFINITE TIME. 

Masc. words: letzten Sommer—last summer; nachsten Monat— 
next month. 

Neut. words: letztes Jahr—last year; nachstes Jahr—next year. 

Fern, words: letzte Woche—last week; nachste Woche—next 
week. 

Note that an adjective standing before a noun and NOT PRE¬ 
CEDED by the characteristic ending of the gender and case of the 
noun has itself the CHARACTERISTIC ENDING OF THE GEN¬ 
DER AND CASE of the noun. 

Other expressions of definite time: heute Morgen—this morning, 
heute Abend—this evening; heute Nachmittag—this afternoon, 
heute Nacht—to-night, gestern Morgen—yesterday morning; 
gestern Abend—yesterday evening, gestern Nachmittag—yester¬ 
day afternoon, morgen Morgen—tomorrow morning, morgen 
Abend—tomorrow evening, morgen Nachmittag—tomorrow after¬ 
noon, iibermorgen—day after tomorrow, vorgestern—day before 
yesterday. 

Note this use of heute, gestern and morgen in the above expres¬ 
sions. 

2. To express DURATION OR EXTENT OF TIME: 

Mas. words: den ganzen Winter—the whole (all) winter, den 
ganzen Monat—the whole (all) month, den ganzen Tag—the whole 
(all) day, den ganzen Morgen—the whole (all) morning, den ganzen 
Abend—the whole (all) evening, den ganzen Nachmittag—the 
whole (all) afternoon. 

Neut. words: ein ganzes Jahr—a whole year. 

Fern, words: die ganze Woche—the whole (all) week, die ganze 
Nacht—the whole (all) night, die ganze Zeit—the whole (all the) 
time. 

Plural words: zwei Monate—two months, drei Tage—three days, 
vier Jahre—four years, funf Wochen—five weeks, sechs Nachte— 
six nights. 

Note the irregular plurals: der Monat—die Monate, der Tag—die 
Tage, das Jahr—die Jahre, die Nacht—die Nachte. 

Like Tag are: der Arm—die Arme, der Schuh—die Schuhe. 

Like Jahr are: das Haar—die Haare, das Paar—die Paare, das 
Knie—die Kniee. 

Like Nacht are: die Hand—die Hande, die Maus—die Mause, 
die Kraft—die Krafte. 

LI. The accusative is used ALWAYS after the prepositions bis— 
until, durch—through, fur—for, gegen—against, ohne—without, 
um—around, wider—against. 


Word-Order 


31 


LII. The accusative is used after certain other prepositions BUT 
ONLY in answer to the question wohin ? never in answer to the ques¬ 
tion wo? These are an—to (with the dative at, by), auf—upon, 
hinter—behind, in—into, neben—near, unter—under, liber—over, 
vor—before, in front of, zwischen—between. 

MEMORIZE this list carefully! 

DREIZEHNTES LESESTUCK 

Der Ball fallt auf den Tisch. Wohin fallt der Ball? Das Kind 
geht in die Schule. Der Knabe geht hinter das Haus. Die Maus 
geht unter den Tisch. Die Damen gehen in den Garten. Das 
Kind geht durch das Haus. Gehen Sie ohne mich. Die Dame hat 
ein Band um den Arm. Es ist ein Armband. Was ist das Wort 
“Armband” auf Englisch? Die Rosen sind gegen die Mauer. 
Gehen wir an das Fenster. Wollen Sie um den Park gehen? 
Gehen Sie nicht zwischen die Dame und mich! Wer will die 
ganze Zeit studieren? Wir diirfen nicht den ganzen Tag essen. 
Ich war ein ganzes Jahr dort. Wir werden zwei Monate dort sein. 
Gehen Sie vor das Haus und Sie werden ihn sehen. Der Fuchs 
springt liber die Strasse. Wohin springt er? Der Monch predigt 
jeden Abend. Wir haben zwei Arme und zwei Kniee. Der Knabe 
ist sechzehn Jahre alt. Wir waren ein ganzes Jahr in Paris. Wir 
wollen zwei Monate in Italien sein. Es regnet die ganze Woche. 
Es donnert und blitzt den ganzen Tag und die ganze Nacht. 

DREIZEHNTE UBUNG 

Schreiben Sie auf Deutsch: I shall be there until three o'clock. 
Let us walk home through the park. Where are you going? I am going 
to the window. The children are jumping over the table. The cow 
jumps over the moon. Take the paper and write the letter this morn¬ 
ing and I shall take (bringen) it to (auf) the post-office this afternoon. 
What have you around your (the) arm? A bracelet. That child eats all 
the time. I have been writing (and still am) all morning. He will shorten 
the lesson for tomorrow; will he not? I do not know. Do not go with¬ 
out her. What have you against (gegen) her? Where are the roses? 
Against the wall. Where are the children? Around the fire. The guest 
is going tomorrow over the mountain; is he not? I must wash my 
(the) hands. The food is warm. Let us eat. How long have you been 
here. A whole month. All morning. 

VIERZEHNTE AUFGABE 

LIII. In all INDEPENDENT clauses having the form of STATE¬ 
MENTS (For Questions, cf. IV. 1. 2; for exhortations and commands, 
cf. XXXIV. 6. 7.) the INFLECTED VERB must stand as the SEC¬ 
OND ELEMENT. 

Caution. Do not confuse SECOND ELEMENT with SECOND 
WORD. ONE ELEMENT is the answer to ONE QUESTION; Who? 


32 


Word-Order, Cont. 


Whom? When? Where? Why? How?. The subject, for example, may 
be a noun with all its modifiers including a dependent clause: 

Subject (one element) 2 

The man, whom I saw down town yesterday, was a distant relative. 

Temporal clause (one element) 2 

As I was going down town yesterday saw I them. 

1. The UNINFLECTED VERB, i.e. the infinitive or participle, 
stands LAST. cf. XXXIX. 

LIV. The coordinating conjunctions (cf. XLII) do not count as an 
element in the clause. For the position of the reflexive cf. XXXV, for 
nicht cf. XXXVI. 

VIERZEHNTES LESESTUCK I 

Ohne mich kann sie nicht gehen. Ohne mich darf sie nicht 
gehen. Den ganzen Tag regnet es. Gestern hat es den ganzen 
Tag geregnet (participle: rained). Morgen werde ich in die Sta.dt 
gehen. Letzte Woche war meine Freundin in Baltimore. Jetzt 
ist es Zeit zu gehen. Heute Abend werden wir ins (in das) 
Theater gehen. Der Weg geht durch den Garten. Fur mich will 
er es nicht lernen. Er darf morgen nach Hause gehen. Sie soil es 
nicht haben. Jetzt muss ich nach Hause (gehen). Nicht lange 
wird er dort sein. Um zehn Uhr wird sie hier sein. In Europa 
gibt es jetzt keinen Kaiser. In Amerika gibt es noch Indianer 
und einige sind sogar sehr reich. Wir wollen gehen aber wir 
durfen nicht. 

WORTSCHATZ 

es gibt—there is, there are (followed by the ACCUSATIVE). 

This idiom is used 1. when the question of actual existence or non¬ 
existence is involved: Gibt es einen Gott—Is there a God? 

2. When the place referred to or the idea involved is large and 
more or less indefinite: Was gibt es dort zu sehen? 

3. In many special expressions, such as: Was gibt es?—What is the 
matter? Was gibt es Neues?—What is the news? Was gibt es zum 
Abendessen ?—What is there for supper? (What are we going to have 
for supper?) 

einige—some. Singular: etwas Tee—some tea, plural: einige 
Lammer—some lambs. 

mein—my. Inflected like ein. 

die Freundin—friend (feminine). German—in corresponds to 
English—ess. 

der Indianer—Indian. 

ins for in das, similarly aufs for auf das, etc., cf English dont 
for do not. 

sogar—indeed, even. 

geregnet—rained (participle). German participles regularly begin 
with ge. 


Dependent Clauses 33 

VIERZEHNTE UBUNG I 

Schreiben Sie auf Deutsch: Until two o'clock I shall be at home. 
Then I shall have to go. Without my mother I cannot find it. Tomor¬ 
row we must write the letter. Day after tomorrow we shall go to the 
theatre. Yesterday she was all day at home. All day I shall have to 
study. She wants to go but she cannot. He studies well for he loves his 
(sein, inflected like ein) mother. She does not forget the Bible for she 
reads it every night. 

LV. In DEPENDENT CLAUSES the INFLECTED VERB 
moves to the END of the clause: When I him see, Before I him saw, etc. 

1. The position of the inflected verb thus changes the relative 
position of the UNINFLECTED VERB, which now stands NEXT 
TO LAST.: When I him see shall, Before I him seen had. 

2. All dependent clauses must be set off by commas. 

LVI. Dependent clauses are introduced either by a relative pro¬ 
noun or by a subordinating conjunction or by an interrogative word 
introducing an indirect question. 

1. The relative pronoun, WHO, WHICH, THAT, is in the nomi¬ 
native and accusative cases identical with the definite article: 

mas. neut. fern. & plu. 

N. der das die—who, which, that. 

A. den das die—whom, which, that. 

2. The subordinating conjunctions are all conjunctions except 
those already learned in XLII. The commonest subordinating con¬ 
junctions are: 

als—when, as. Used only to refer to ONE ACT in PAST TIME. 
See wenn. 

bevor, ehe—before 
bis—until 
da—since, as 
damit—in order that 
dass—that, so that 

indem—while. In translation often best omitted in favor of translat¬ 
ing the verb as a present participle: Indem er das sagt—Saying 
that. 

nachdem—after 

ob—whether, if (in indirect questions, not in conditions), 
als ob—as if 
obgleich—although 

seitdem—since (temporal vs. da causal) 
wahrend—while, during (two continued acts) 
weil—because. Contrast with denn—for, a coordinating conjunc¬ 
tion. 

wenn—if (in conditions), when (with present and future time and 
with past time in the sense of whenever, i.e. repeated acts). 


34 


Grimm's Law 


VIERZEHNTES LESESTUCK II 

Als ich in Neuyork war, war meine Mutter in Paris. Wenn 
ich nach Hause gehe, werde ich meine Mutter sehen. Wenn 
Sie in das Haus gehen, werden Sie sich nicht erkalten. Er wird 
da sein, bevor Sie es wissen. Da es regnet, werden wir zu Hause 
bleiben. Wir werden nicht gehen, weil es regnet. Lernen Sie 
die Aufgabe, bis Sie sie konnen. Es ist gut, dass er heute nach 
Hause kommt. Indem sie das Haar kammt, lasst sie den Kamm 
fallen. Sie kusst den Vater, indem sie den Ring nimmt.Nachdem 
er isst, schlaft er. Ich sehe sie nie, obgleich ich sie sehr gut 
kenne. Sie sind Freunde, seitdem sie in Frankreich waren. 
Sie schlaft, wahrend ich das Buch lese. Weil ich den Brief 
schreibe, miissen die Kinder still sein. Der Knabe, der spricht, 
ist mein Sohn. Der Kaufmann, den ich kenne, ist jetzt in 
Europa. 

WORTSCHATZ 

*lassen—to let. 

kennen—to know, be acquainted with, people, places, objects 
(NOT FACTS). 

*schlafen—to sleep. 

VIERZEHNTE UBUNG II 

Schreiben Sie auf Deutsch: The hat which she is wearing today 
is new. Where are the hunters who are so (so) hungry? Do not go, 
before I come home. The pupil who learns the lesson well, will know 
it well. Although I know him very well, I never (nie) see him. While 
I am reading the book, she is sleeping. Taking the ring, she kisses her 
(the) father. If I go home, I shall see her. Read the book, until I come. 
Since it is raining, we cannot go. He was at home, when I saw him. 
When I comb my hair, I let the comb fall. After I see him, I shall know 
it. I know him, although he does not know me. 


FUNFZEHNTE AUFGABE 


LVII. By Grimm's Law (Grimms Gesetz) (cf. Introduction) 
we learn that certain consonants shifted in High German in a perfectly 
regular way. As they did not shift in English there is a regular cor¬ 
respondence between the unshifted English consonant and the shifted 
German consonant. 


die Erde—earth 
die Feder—feather, 
pen 


1. English TH corresponds to German d. 
der Bruder—brother das Bad—bath 

der Dorn—thorn das Ding—thing 

der Heide—heathen 
der Mund—mouth 
der Norden—north 
der Suden—south 

beide—both, da—there, dann—then, dies—this, drei—three, 
dick—thick, diinn—thin, danken—to thank, denken—to think, 
donnern—to thunder, baden—to bathe. 


Grimm's Law, Cont. 


35 


2. English D corresponds to German t. 

die Haut—hide, skin 
die Not—need, distress 
die Schulter—shoulder 
die Seite—side, page 
die Tat—deed 
die Tiir—door 
die Welt—world 

breit—broad, wide, hart—hard, rot—red, teller—dear, tot—dead, 
unter—under, *halten—to hold, reiten—to ride, trinken—to 
drink, tun—to do. 

3. English T corresponds to German s, ss, z, (pronounced ts!) 

der Bissen—bite das Herz—heart die Hitze—heat, 

der Fuss—foot das Netz—net die Nuss—nut 

der Gruss—greeting das Salz—salt die Strasse—street 

der Zweig—twig das Wasser—water 

besser—better, gross—great, heiss—hot, kurz—curt, short, suss— 
sweet, zahm—tame, zu—to, too, aus—out, beissen—to bite, *essen— 
to eat, griissen—to greet, speak to, hassen—to hate, heizen—to 
heat, *lassen—to let, schiessen—to shoot, sitzen—to sit, setzen—to 
set, *vergessen—to forget, *schmelzen—to smelt, melt. 

4. English P corresponds to German f, ff, pf. 

der Affe—ape das Pfund—pound die Halfte—half 

der Apfel—apple das Schaf—sheep die Hilfe—help 

der Haufen—heap das Schiff—ship die Pflanze—plant 

der Neffe—nephew die Pflaume—plum, 

der Pfeffer—pepper die Seife—soap 

der Pfennig—penny 

auf—up, reif—ripe, scharf—sharp, stumpf—stumpy, i.e. dull, 
greifen—to grip, seize, *helfen—to help, hoffen—to hope, pflanzen 
—to plant, pflucken—to pluck, pick, *schlafen—to sleep. 


der Gott—God, god 
der Ritt—ride 
der Schatten—shade 
der Traum—dream 


das Bett—bed 
das Blut—blood 
das Brot—bread 


FUNFZEHNTES LESESTUCK 

Der Bruder badet sich. Der Vater denkt an die Mutter. Die 
Mutter schreibt an den Sohn. Der Ritt ist lang. Wir werden 
den ganzen Tag und bis in die Nacht reiten miissen. Schreiben 
Sie nur auf eine Seite! Tun Sie das nicht! Der Affe ist tot. Der 
Neffe hat einen Pfennig. Ich hoffe, Sie werden die Strasse schon 
finden. Der Kaufmann hat einen grossen Haufen Gold. Mogen 
Sie viel Pfeffer und Salz? Das Kind hat einen schonen roten 
Apfel und es nimmt einen grossen Bissen. Die Dame griisst den 
alten Mann. Die Nuss ist hart. Der Dorn ist scharf. Gegen vier 
Uhr ist der Schatten langer als gegen zwei Uhr. Das Brot ist 
teuer. Der Vater setzt das Kind auf die Schulter und es pfiuckt 
Pflaumen. Die Mutter kauft ein Pfund Butter, (cf. XIV). Das 


36 


German K 


Schaf frisst das Gras. Wollen Sie heute aufs Land gehen? Ich 
danke. Die neue Strasse ist breit und schattig. Der Knabe hilft 
die Pflaumen pflucken. Er pflanzt auch den Pfeffer fur die 
Mutter. Da haben Sie Wasser und Seife und konnen sich wa- 
schen. Das Schiff hat eine grosse Last. Der Mann schiesst den 
Tiger und bringt die Haut nach Hause. Er schlaft und traumt 
einen langen Traum. Diese Tat ist schwer zu verstehen. Mein 
Herz ist schwer. Die Erde bewegt sich um die Sonne und der 
Mond um die Erde. Die Welt wird jetzt jeden Tag schoner. Die 
Maus beisst das Kind. Griissen Sie den Vater. Der Fuchs beisst 
den Jager. 

WORTSGHATZ 

da—here, there. 

denken an—to think of (not: to have an opinion). 

schreiben an—to write to. 

gegen—towards (in time expressions). 

aufs Land—to the country. 

ich danke—I thank (you) means NO, I thank you. 

schon—all right (in such expressions as: I can do it all right). 

FUNFZEHNTE UBUNG 

Schreiben Sie auf Deutsch: Think of me when you see them. 
Write to your (the) father today! Do NOT say A word! Set the child 
on your shoulder. Plant the half only! Shall we ride all day and into 
the night? I hope that you will not catch cold. The pen writes well. 
Will you (have) an apple? No. I thank you. Has the merchant a heap 
of gold? Take a bite! Is bread expensive (dear)? Let us shoot the 
tiger and take (bring) his hide home. Does the earth move around the 
sun or the sun around the earth? Where is my bed? Blood is red. Is 
the road (street) broad and shady? Let us go to the country today! 
The distress is great in Europe. The lady has (a) beautiful skin and a 
small mouth. She took a big bite. Is the nut hard? Do not let the paper 
fall! Speak to (griissen) her, when you see her. 

SECHZEHNTE AUFGABE 

LVIII. Besides the consonantal correspondences explained by 
Grimm's Law, there are some other observations regarding sounds and 
spelling, which it will be useful to note: 

1. Many words, whether of Germanic or of Latin origin, which 
are spelt in English with a C are spelt in German with a K: 

der Kamerad—comrade das Kalb—calf die Kalte—cold 
der Koch—cook die Karte—card 

der Koffer—coffer, trunk die Katze—cat 

der Korper—corpus, body die Krone—crown 

der Kuchen—cake die Kuh—cow 


German k, ch, f, b 


37 


kalt—cold, klar—clear, klihl—cool, kommen, to come, kleiden— 
to clothe, to dress, kochen—to cook, kosten—to cost. 

2. English CH has frequently replaced an Anglo-Saxon K, cor¬ 
responding to German k. It is interesting to note that similarly French 
CH developed out of a Latin K. 

der Kase—cheese das Kinn—chin die Bank—bench 

der Kasten—chest, box die Kammer—chamber 

die Kirche—church (cf. kirk) 
die Kirsche—cherry 

kauen—to chew, strecken—to stretch, stark—strong. 

3. English GH usually corresponds to German ch: 

das Licht—light die Flucht—flight 

das Recht—right die Macht—might 

die Nacht—night 

acht—eight, hoch—high, leicht—light, easy, licht—light, bright, 
recht—right, lachen—to laugh, schlachten—to slaughter. 

4. English K sometimes corresponds to a German ch: 

der Kuchen—cake das Buch—book die Eiche—oak 

die Flasche—flask, bottle 
from Fr. bouteille) 
die Milch—milk 
die Woche—week 

*brechen—to break, machen—to make, suchen—to seek, be- 
suchen—seek in one's house, i.e., visit, versuchen—to seek to do, i.e., 
try, attempt, wachen—to be awake, to awake (intr). 

5. English sh, sn, sw correspond to German sch, schn, schw: 
respectively. (Sp and st are pronounced in German as schp and scht 
respectively.) 

der Fisch—fish das Schwert—sword die Scham—shame 

der Schild—shield 
der Schwan—swan 

frisch—fresh, fischen—to fish, scheinen—to shine, schwimmen 
—to swim, *waschen—to wash. 

6. English V and F when NOT INITIAL, correspond to Ger¬ 
man b: 

der Ofen—oven, stove das Fieber—fever 

das Grab—grave 
das Silber—silver 
das Weib—wife 


38 


Consonantal Correspondences, Cont. 


eben—even, sieben—seven, iibel—evil, iiber—over, geben—to 
give, haben—to have, leben—to live, lieben—to love, glauben—to 
beLIEVE, erlauben—to give LEAVE, i.e. permit. 

7. English WH (as well as English W) corresponds to German w: 

die Weile—while, time 

wer—who, wen—whom, was—what, wo—where, wann—when, 
weiss—white. 

8. English y, sometimes i, corresponds to: 

a. German g: 

der Hagel—hail das Auge—eye die Fliege—fly 

der Nagel—nail das Segel—sail die Liige—lie, untruth 

der Regen—rain die Magd—maid 

der Tag—day 
der Weg—way, road 

gelb—yellow, gestern—yesterday, sonnig—sunny, schattig— 
shady, fliegen—to fly, liegen—to lie, liigen—to tell a lie, legen—to 
lay, sagen—to say. 

b. German j: 

das Jahr—year 
jung—young, jen—yon, that 

9. The following words show a combination of two of the con¬ 
sonantal correspondences: 

der Dieb—thief die Taube—dove, pigeon, 

der Pfad—path die Tochter—daughter 

der Tag—day 

der Teufel—devil, fellow 

der Tod—death 

das—that, doch—though, dreissig—thirty, durch—through, sal- 
zig—salty, schattig—shady, taub—deaf, treiben—to drive, was- 
serig—watery. 


SECHZEHNTES LESESTUCK 

Die Kuh und das Kalb gehen in den Garten und fressen den 
Kohl. Der Koch backt heute einen Kuchen. Er backt Brot jeden 
Tag. Die Katze frisst die Maus und die Taube. Die Taube fliegt. 
Der Fisch und der Schwan schwimmen. Die Tochter liebt die 
Mutter und den Vater. Liebt sie den Bruder auch? Ja, sehr. 
Legen Sie die Karten auf den Tisch. Der Kaiser hat jetzt keine 
Krone. Nehmen Sie diesen Pfad und Sie werden auf den rechten 
Weg kommen. Der Dieb stiehlt den Kasten und legt ihn in den 
Koffer. Diese Magd stiehlt und liigt. Haben Sie eine lichte 
Kammer? Ja, denn die Fenster sind breit und hoch. Der Regen 
wascht die Eiche und erfrischt die Erde. Der Mann schlachtet 
das Kalb. Der Ritter hat einen Schild und ein Schwert. Ich 
wache um sieben Uhr. Um wie viel Uhr wachen Sie? Was kostet 
dieser Kase das Pfund? Meine Kammer ist warm denn der 


Nouns of Weight and Measure 


39 


Ofen ist gross und heizt sie sehr gut. Der Hagel ist weiss. 
Ich bin schon eine ganze Weile hier. Besuchen Sie sie oft? 
Selbst der Heide glaubt an Gott. Wenn Sie an Gott glauben, 
gehen Sie jeden Sonntag in die Kirche. Meine Mutter und 
mein Vater leben noch. Der Kamerad ist taub und jetzt wird 
er blind. Er hat nur ein Auge. Die Kirschen sind rot und gut 
zu essen. Haben Sie einen Nagel? Nein, aber ich muss einen 
finden. Suchen wir einen! Die Eiche ist dreissig Fuss hoch. 
Der Ofen ist zu heiss fur den Kuchen, aber nicht fur das Brot. 
Scheint die Sonne jeden Tag? Mogen Sie schwimmen? 

WORTSGHATZ 

ganz—whole, quite 

oft—often 

sehr—very, also VERY MUCH. Do not use viel with sehr! Com¬ 
pare French BEAUCOUP and Spanish MUCHO with which TRES 
and MUY may not be used. 

selbst—even, self in an INTENSIVE sense. 

wie—like, as. 

LIX. To express comparison of equality, English AS (good) AS, 
the German uses so (gut) wie. Negative nicht so (gut) wie. 

LX. In place of the indefinite article in the distributive sense, as 
in English, the German uses the definite: Zwei Pfennig das Pfund— 
Two cents A POUND. 

LXI. Quantitative nouns of measure, weight and value, except 
feminine nouns in -e, are used in the singular: Das kostet fiinf 
Pfennig.—That costs five cents. Die Eiche ist dreissig Fuss hoch— 
The oak is thirty feet high. A following unmodified noun is in apposition: 
zwei Paar Schuhe—two pairs of shoes. Cf. XIV. 

“Two foot high” is a mistake often heard in English. 

SECHZEHNTE UBUNG 

Schreiben Sie auf Deutsch: I shall take three pounds of butter. 
Is it fresh? Quite fresh. My hands are warm but my feet are cold. 
Is your (the) body warm enough? Set the cake in the oven and it will 
bake. How long have you been here? Quite a while. How is my room? 
Is it light and warm? Yes, for there are three windows and the stove 
is large. Do you like cheese? What time do you awake? At half past 
seven. Do you go to church every week? Is his (the) comrade deaf 
and blind? Who steals will also lie; will he not? I must hunt a nail and 
break this ice. The child has a fever, but it is sinking into a deep slum¬ 
ber. Are the cherries sour or are they good to eat? Let us eat this cheese. 
Whom does the daughter love? When will he kill (slaughter) the calf? 
Does she dress (herself) well? Do not laugh too loud. 

SIEBZEHNTE AUFGABE 

LXII. In German, as in English, many words are formed by the 
simple juxtaposition of two words. This process is called “composition” 
and is a helpful means of increasing one's vocabulary. 


40 


Composition and Derivation 


1. Compound words regularly take the GENDER AND THE 
PLURAL OF THE LAST COMPONENT. Always distinguish care¬ 
fully therefore between COMPOUND WORDS and POLYSYL¬ 
LABLES! Fingerhut—thimble and Haustiir—front door must be 
regarded as compound words of which der Hut (die Hiite) and die 
Tiir (die Tiiren) determine the gender and the plural of the whole. 


der Fingerhut—thimble 
der Grossvater—grandfather 
der Handschuh—glove 
der Briefkasten—mail box 
der Sonntag—Sunday 
der Montag—Monday 
der Dienstag—Tuesday 
der Mittwoch—Wednesday 
der Donnerstag—Thursday 
der Freitag—Friday 
der Samstag—Saturday 


das Armband—bracelet die Hungersnot— 

das Vaterland—fatherland famine 

das Sonnenlicht—sunlight die Haustiir— 

front door 
die Grossmutter— 
grandmother 
die Fiillfeder— 

fountain pen 
die Haarnadel— 
hair pin 

die Kaiserkrone— 
imperial crown 


Note that the names of the days of the week are much like our own. 
All are compouns of Tag—day, except Mittwoch—Wednesday, 
which is literally “midweek.” Note that Mittwoch is attracted into 
the masculine gender because the other six days are masculine. 


LXIII. In German, as in English, many words are derived from a 
common stem. Indeed German is much more homogeneous than Eng¬ 
lish, so that one never finds in German such heterogeneous groups of 
words as WATER (Germanic), AQUEOUS (Latin), HYDROPHOBIC 
(Greek). The German keeps to its own Germanic root to form the 
series Wasser, wasserig, wasserscheu. This enables the student—or 
the uneducated German—to break up the longest word into its com¬ 
ponent parts and understand it as a whole. Learn now in the beginning 
to associate all such new words with the old familiar stem and you will 
soon have a large vocabulary. From words which we have already 
learned we can understand the following derivatives and roots, which 
are given here not to be memorized, but as a reference list: 


der Biss—bite (act) 
der Burger—citizen 
der Gartner—gardener 
der Gedanke—thought 
der Glaube—belief 
der Junge—boy 
der Jiingling—young 
man 

der Laut—sound 
der Mensch—human 
being (Mann) 
der Reiter—trooper 
der Schafer—shepherd 
der Traumer—dreamer 


das Alter—old age die Ankunft—arrival 

das Gebirge—mountain die Bitterkeit—bitterness 
range die Erfrischung—refreshment 

das Leben—life die Erkaltung—cold 

die Erklarung—explanation 
die Freiheit—freedom 
die Freundlichkeit—friend¬ 
liness 

die Freundschaft—friendship 

die Gabe—natural gift 

die Harte—hardness, harshness 

die Jagd—hunt 

die Jugend—youth (abstract) 

die Kleinigkeit—trifle 


Derivation, Cont. 


41 


the pronoun man—one 
(from Mann) cf. French 
ON from HOMME 


die Kunst—art (from konnen) 

die Liebe—love 

die Milde—gentleness 

die Schonheit—beauty 

die Stille—quiet 

die Teurung—high cost of 


living 

die Umarmung—embrace 
die Wasche—under linen 
die Zukunft—future from 


kommen 


aussern—to express, geniigen—to suffice, interessieren—to in¬ 
terest, kronen—to crown, mildern—to alleviate, nennen (Name)— 
to name, call, sich schamen—to be ashamed, stillen—to quiet, 
tonen—to sound, toten—to kill, traumen—to dream, iibernachten 
—to spend the night, umarmen—to embrace, verdanken—to owe 
(thanks for), verhungern—to starve, verkaufen—to sell, verkor- 
pern—to embody, warmen—to warm. 

blutig—bloody, briiderlich—brotherly, fraternal, durstig— 
thirsty, feurig—fiery, gottlich—divine, hasslich—hateful, ugly, 
hauslich—domestic, herzlich—hearty, cordial, korperlich— 
physical, kraf tig—strong, lieb—dear, mannlich—masculine, mensch- 
lich—human, miindlich—oral, nachtlich—nightly, notig—neces¬ 
sary, oben—up above, upstairs, ritterlich—knightly, chivalrous, 
schriftlich—in writing, taglich—daily, tatig—active, unten— 
down below, down stairs, weiblich—feminine, weltlich—worldly, 
windig—windy, wortlich—literally. 

Note in the above lists how many simple German words we translate 
by a Latin derivative, the meaning of which is only apparent to those 
who have studied Latin, whereas the meaning of the German word is 
immediately apparent to a relatively unlettered German. 


ACHTZEHNTE AUFGABE 


LXIV. One set of derivatives claim especial attention. From 
masculine nouns denoting men and some of the large animals, the 
feminine is formed by adding the suffix—in and modifying the stem 
vowel, if possible: 

der Freund—friend (mas.) die Freundin—friend (fern.) cf. 

Wortschatz XIV. 

der Schuler—pupil (mas.) die Schiilerin—pupil (fern.) 

der Kaiser—emperor die Kaiserin—empress 

der Gartner—gardener (mas.) die Gartnerin—gardener (fern.) 

LXV. Feminine nouns derived from masculines by the addition 
of the suffix -in form their plural by adding -nen: die Freundin— 
(woman) friend, die Freundinnen—(women) friends. This is merely 
to keep the i of the syllable -in short. 


42 


Rules for Gender 


LXVI. Rules for gender. 

1. NATURAL gender. 

MASCULINE are names of males and of most large animals: der 
Mann, der Wolf. 

FEMININE are names of females: die Mutter, die Tante, etc. 

Exception: das Weib, which was presumably originally a term of 
endearment, such as “treasure.” 

NEUTER are the names of 

a. the whole species: das Schaf—sheep, there being, as in English, 
special words for ram and ewe. 

b. the young of species: das Lamm, das Kind. 

2. Gender as determined by ENDINGS or MEANING. 

a. Masculine are: 

(1) Names of the seasons, months, days and points of the compass: 

der Sommer, der Juli, der Mittwoch, der Norden. 

(2) Strong verb stems without ending: der Ritt, der Biss. 

b. Feminine are: 

(1) Nouns ending in -e. 

Exceptions: 

(a) Nouns masculine by natural gender: der Knabe. 

(b) Defective nominatives: der Glaube, der Gedanke, der 
Name, etc., all forms of which except the nominative show an -n. 

(c) Nouns having the prefix Ge-: das Gebirge. 

(d) der Kase. 

(2) Nouns having the suffixes -t, -heit, -keit, -schaft, -ung: 
die Zukunft, die Macht, die Schonheit, die Freundlichkeit, die 
Freundschaft, die Umarmung. 

c. Neuter are: 

(1) ALL nouns ending in -chen or -lein, REGARDLESS OF 
NATURAL GENDER: das Madchen—girl (die Magd), das 
Fraulein—Miss, young lady (die Frau). 

The reason for this peculiarity lies in the original diminutive force 
of these two endings, cf. LXVI. 1. Neuter b. and in English the words 
catkin, pipkin, mannikin, lambkin, welkin, etc., coverlet, hamlet. 

(2) Infinitives or other parts of speech used as nouns: das Essen. 

(3) Nouns with the prefix Ge- having a collective sense: das 
Gebirge—mountain range (from der Berg—mountain). 

(4) Names of cities and countries, cf. XVII, XVIII. 


Cognates with Changed Meaning 


43 


LESESTUCK 

Die grosse Teuerung erklart die Hungersnot in Europa. 
Viele Kinder verhungern dort. Wir mussen uns fur die Kinder 
interessieren. Wir konnen den Hunger stillen und die Not 
mildern. Eine Kleinigkeit geniigt nicht. Es ist menschlich 
tatig zu sein. Diese Giite ist leicht zu verstehen, die Harte 
aber kann ich nicht verstehen. Wollen wir hier ubernachten? 
Die Schonheit und die Liebe sind Gaben Gottes (God’s). Sie 
aussert sich ohne Bitterkeit. Der Jager geht in das Gebirge. 
Er geht auf die Jagd. Erklaren Sie sich schriftlich. Ich werde 
einen neuen Fingerhut, eine Fullfeder, ein Armband und ein 
Paar Handschuhe kaufen. Wo kaufen Sie die Wasche? Wascht 
die Kochin auch? Das Madchen umarmt den Vater und kiisst 
ihn auf den Mund. Die Jugend liebt das Leben. Das Alter 
denkt schon an den Tod. Wir sind unten aber die Mutter ist 
oben. Der Junge geht in die Schule, der Jungling geht auf die 
Universitat. Jener ist Schuler, dieser ist Student. Der Mensch 
ist ein Traumer. Der Burger glaubt an die Freiheit. Die Zukunft 
wird alles bringen. Lieber Yater! Liebes Kind! Liebe Mutter! 
Man kann ihn nie verstehen. 

UBUNGEN 

1. Collect into groups all the words you know from common stems. 

2. Review all nouns with reference to the Rules for Gender. 

3. Write two short paragraphs of connected narration using the 
vocabulary and grammar studied to this point. 

NEUNZEHNTE AUFGABE 

LXVII. Words change their meaning in many ways. Sometimes 
the meaning contracts and covers a narrower conception, sometimes 
it expands to cover a wider one, sometimes the meaning changes 
through association. Slang words and figures of speech come to be the 
regular designations for common objects. Old words drop out of use 
and new ones, often borrowed from some foreign language, take their 
place. In English many Anglo-Saxon words, whose cognates still 
flourish in German, have been supplanted by borrowings from other 
languages. Below are a list of common German words with their 
English cognates. Try to establish the connection between the cognate 
and the PRESENT MEANING, but in no case should you translate 
the German word by its cognate. The following list is for reference. 


44 


Cognates with Changed Meaning, Cont. 


<D 0)^ 

J go 

Af I 

aJLs'.i 

o © eg : 

O T 3 1 
^ 

e£— 

s r* 

§ s S 


.SsT 

CG d 
CD ,3 
T3 O ? 


S-i 

•3 g 
•9 5 
(?-. 


CD 

Ph 

w *8 

1 s c 

'H <D 


.2 >> 


03 

x> 


■§J R 8 


« o A 
,*V7j di 


■ CD w ' 

4^44 -M 
O 

SttEfeO^ 


/2 § 
pH CO 4 ) 

h-]h-) 


# bp^5 | 
P< r* Q- 


T3 "O ^3 TJ ^3 


03 p. . 

5 — 

^ i o o 

*02 O 

-c S '! _ 

u> 43) CG 
C CG CG 

p 2 5 <d 

4 ; J 2 2i ^ 

2 « td)3i|3 

«;v c P U 

Cl.Ph.S^OJ 

© jo # © JO 
73 73 73 73 


a 53 
^ ^ * 
o 

d 

. . £ 

-S.-y-g 

■S? = 

..-aiir 

^ ^ o3 J~n 

d «*^\g fa 

*«&3SJ 

o g y +jcS 
43^^73 ^ 

ypj r« 2 
d I o 4->jg 
t/3 I c/2 C0 hJ 


J)V t 


d 


d «D 
ry 73 
S3 -+5 53 

O o *d 


© 


IJS 

.f| 

^ s 

CD 

w O 
©^ 

44 ^ 
O 43 

® CJ O CJ o 
73 73 73 73 73 


<D 

S 


(D 

N) 


s 

3 


a 

o 


*_ o 

d E 

CD h 

bC^ 

0) I 

| $-3 

<T) 43> 

J” - 


CD d 

I S g 55 


CG 73 

:s I 

n. 


I 43 ft. 

TT' CG 
CD <D 


c^rd 


.5 s <j 

<D Jh d 

CQ P3Q 

CO C» CG 
d d d 
73 73 *0 


-’S3, 

^ 52 w*2 
o^ hE 

qEC2 

CO CO CO CO 
d d d d 

*o *D *0 73 


if-LllJ 

'O I Ap3 S S V 2 

7 5s > ? & ■§ 

jLlS'M 3?l 

«h-h p 2 I 'T'As o 

J-J.S'j O-g u 

JO % s 

3 G 0 * 5 _-?-H.od 
«®g «.2 o 3.S 

jSShhhhn 

cogococococococo 
^ d ^ ^ 


CD 


<L> 1 g ® § g« S 

£|I.§ l-si 

Ifilgfi 

i3 c3 cj -p 3 ^ 
eg ^c5/rt 


^ cd d 

g 


s d44 


c3 


D 

bo 

d 

o 

ft 


T 11 5t> s §^« 

I C3 ^rd I H I <D 03 

^3 ^ ^ 44 d -o C - 

d o 33 ^ ft § w d 

sf-§sl-§sfe||||pfll 

ss c .S *2 j- SSsasssSS a 3£.S 

-* “* - -— *\ ^ - m:© S C fi 0^3 n 

pppppppppp 

DDDDDDDDOD 
’O’O’O’O’O’O’O’O’O’O 


3’§ 

03 rd . 


D 

bJO 


v g 


I? S 0 


>-3 K 


d d *o :p ® 5 :c? 
MQfefeffiffiH-l 

p p p p p p p 

CD <D <D Q CD <D D 
*0 *D 'O *T3 T3 *0 


CG 

rx 

5 o ^ ^ 

s S SS 

^2^43 
•d^3di w 
o 5 *d .52 
5«(«hh 

u u u 
<o <o <o o 
TJ *D T3 ’O 


"_H"PH 

I § 

4^5 

1^1 

1|2 
o d d 

D D D 
D D D 

*o *0 TJ 


J 44 W) ^ 
An’O 71° p d d 

<D .E rd' ^ 0 7 
A I 7 

1, >5^ 


<d CT ^€l"E d 4^ 


«-rt I g CQ 

ft^ D ^ 

5 ©a+i 

M33^-g £53*3 

- ^ 0) d P CG 

kill "J. 

!TS**11 

i-s'fllf 


S'S-i § E 

SJ I 11 
sS-rI e 

•*3 I- 


*& 
Ph CD 

g ► 


~7j d o3 d3 . -X3 

§>3 2^g O g 

| I .T 

«:d ^ O A 

I ^ d 3 b 

SA25 Se g 

§ 8-* g-g^s 

min 

A3S5g 

o d -71 to 
o< — 


P'h'm CG 
✓ o w 


O^S -TO N 
CG CG .d P »H 

l-a g b 

I •«•§ j| T 

Dd ^ - I i dJL 
O S rtJL I »a 

3 «h 0 Jh Ah' _E 

d d 2 3 £3, 

• <4-1 Tj d5 4.3 _ _ 

O I ^ 

p ^aT ^ 

- dr^ U 5Jk^ 
o d^ © CCo 
73 .s ^-C 

,a d’S § i 


bo 

d 

«c E 


o - 


9 O g 


© , 
rd A 

43) 43) 

I M 
.ca 


fga 

^ s ^ 

w ,d 43> d 

O^ 1 43 ° g 'OJD 

« g C 

d P rd ^ ^ 

ca *2 :o O bo 43 U 
pp; o p3 

S> HH ^ CG c» <» 


45 


Cognates with Changed Meaning, Cont. 

bilden (build)—to form, erquicken (quick)—to refresh, *fahren 
(fare)—to drive, *fangen (fang)—to catch, heben (heave)—to lift, 
kennen (ken)—to know, to be acquainted with, *laufen (leap)—to 
run, riechen (reek)—to smell, reden (read)—to discourse, retten 
(rid)—to save, schauen (show)—to look, *schlagen (slay)—to strike, 
spenden (spend)—to give, *sterben (starve)—to die, stopfen (stop)— 
to darn, taufen (dip)—to baptize, christen, *tragen (drag)—to 
carry, to wear, *treten (tread)—to step, turnen (turn)—to do gym¬ 
nastics, *wachsen (wax)—to grow, weinen (whine)—to cry, weep, 
*werfen (warp)—to throw, wissen (to wit)—to know, wohnen 
(wont)—to dwell. 

1. Words so marked may be translated also by the cognate. 

2. Die Frucht means fruit in its most general sense and in a figur¬ 
ative sense, as the "fruits of the fields” and "fruits for repentance.” 
For fruit in the limited sense of apples, cherries, etc., one uses das 

Obst. 

3. Mut in compound words resumes the original meaning of mood: 
der Grossmut—magnanimity, der Kleinmut—pusillanimity, der 
Hochmut—arrogance, etc. 

Caution die Art means not "art” but KIND, VARIETY, SPECIES. 
English ART is German die Kunst from konnen; der Rock means 
not "rock” but a man’s COAT or a woman’s SKIRT. 

Note that among the adjectives above there are some words given 
without cognates, because they look like an English word which has 
an entirely different meaning. 


ZWANZIGSTE AUFGABE 

Es ist jetzt der Herbst. Das Laub ist gelb, braun und rot. 
Die Baume sind schon. Der Wald ist still und kein Laut ist zu 
horen. Kein Tier lasst sich sehen. Das Tal ist noch grim und die 
Berge sind blau. Wir haben zu Hause noch viele Rosen und 
Nelken. Die Nelken riechen gut. Die Wolken sind weiss und 
weich. Wir haben zu Hause auch viel Mobel: Tische, Stiihle, 
und Uhren. Zwei und vier sind Zahlen. Es ist Zeit zu gehen. 
Ist der Wagen da? Werfen Sie die Sachen in den Koffer. Ist er 
schwer? Konnen Sie ihn aufheben? Sind Sie stark genug? Neh- 
men Sie ihn auf den Riicken. Der Knecht ist stark. Er nimmt 
den schweren Koffer auf den Riicken und tragt ihn nach unten 
und setzt ihn oben auf den Wagen. Ich stopfe mein Kleid. 
Die Mutter kommt in das Zimmer und setzt sich auf das Bett. 
Sie tragt einen neuen Hut und helle Handschuhe aber sie hat 
Kopfweh, also tragt sie auch eine Flasche und einen Loffel denn 
sie will etwas einnehmen. Ich habe Zahnweh und es ist sehr 
schlimm aber ich habe grossen Mut und weine nicht obgleich 
es weh tut. Wir haben weder Fleisch noch Obst. Ich muss den 


46 


INFINTIVE OF PURPOSE 


Hund nehmen und in die Stadt gehen um einen Schinken zu 
kaufen. Wollen Sie das Messer oder die Schere? Wollen Sie ein 
Kleid machen? Ich finde dieses Tuch hasslich. Die frische Luft 
erquickt uns. Die Glocke tont und die Uhr schlagt. Der Furst 
hat einen Feind. Der Feind trinkt Gift und stirbt. Ich werde 
meine Pflicht tun. Was fur Tiere kennen Sie jetzt? Konnen Sie 
diese Aufgabe? Kennen Sie das Dorf? Konnen Sie die Dacher 
sehen? Wie viele Beine hat ein Hund? Wissen Sie, wie viele 
Beine ein Hund hat? Der Hund fangt einen Vogel. Er totet ihn 
und frisst ihn. Der Mann rettet das Kind. Mein Vater ist Predi- 
ger. Er tauft viele Kinder jedes Jahr. Die Schiilerinnen turnen 
drei mal die Woche. Wohnen Sie in Baltimore? Das Kind wachst 
und wird ein Mann. Der Hund ist toll. Das Madchen ist eitel 
und faul. Das Mobel ist blank. Das Schwert ist blank. Die 
Knopfe sind blank. Wie weit ist es dahin? Wollen wir gehen 
oder fahren? Es ist zu weit um zu gehen. Fahren wir! Der 
Kampf um das Tor war lang. Haben Sie Lust, jetzt in den Wald 
zu gehen? 


WORTSCHATZ 

einnehmen —to take (IN, of medicine). 

nach unten —downstairs. Nach —to is required with verbs of 
motion. 

mal —time: einmal —once, zweimal —twice, etc. 

was fur —what (kind of) a. Sometimes the two words are separated: 

Was ist das fur einen Hund? —What kind of a dog is that? 

weh (woe)—hurt, ache; weh tun —to hurt; Zahnweh —toothache. 

weder—noch —neither—nor. 

LXVIII. The purpose phrase IN ORDER TO is expressed in 
German by the introductory um followed at the end of the phrase by 
zu with the infinitive: Ich gehe in die Stadt, um einen Schinken 
zu kaufen. 

a. um is also used after adjectives modified by zu — too and 
genug —enough: 

Es ist zu weit um zu gehen —It is too far to walk. 

Es ist nicht weit genug um zu fahren —It is not far enough 
to drive. 

LXIX. After the verbs sein —to be and lassen —to let the German 
uses an ACTIVE infinitive, where the English uses a passive: Kein 
Laut war zu horen —No sound WAS TO BE HEARD. Kein Tier 
lasst sich sehen —Not an animal is to (LIT. LETS ITSELF) BE 
SEEN. 

1. Lassen with this same construction has also the meaning of 
TO HAVE followed in English by a passive participle: Ich lasse ein 
Kleid machen—I am having a dress MADE. 


Pronominal Adjectives 


47 


UBUNG 


Schreiben Sie auf Deutsch: One eats meat and bread every day. 
One drinks water and also coffee or tea or milk. This dress is too 
bright. It is ugly. It is also too short. Have you a watch? What time 
is it? One knife is sharp, the other is dull. The child is not dull. It is 
only sick. The air is cool and it is a pleasure to be here. The shares are 
small. Who has a button? The steam is filling the room. Are the trees 
still green or are they already yellow and red and brown? Roses and 
carnations smell good, do they not? Take a sponge and wash the dog. 
Is your (the) leg stiff? The roofs are shiny; are they not? The villages 
are beautiful. One can see the mountain ranges and the valleys. The 
animals are eating the foliage, the grass and the flowers. The dog runs 
through the gate into the garden. The gardener sees him and strikes 
him. The bottle is full of wine. The trunk is full of clothes. Will the 
enemy drink poison and die? Lay the spoon on the table. What kind 
of meat is that? It is ham. Will you (have) a piece? The prince loves 
his fatherland; does he not? Who is going to the country today? 1 do 
not hear a sound; do you? What kind of a noise is that? It is the bell. 
It is my duty to save the child. He springs into the water in order to 
save it. The fish are not to be caught (LXIX) today. The mother has 
(LXIX. 1) the child baptized Hans. The boy throws the ball over the 
tree. The man strikes the dog and it bites him. The bite hurts. The dog 
is dying and the man will die, for the dog was mad. The merchant 
drives every day into town. Do you know him? No, but I know where 
he lives. Do you know your (the) lesson? What kind of fruit do you 
want? I want cherries and plums and one apple. Not a cloud is to be 
seen. Not a pen is to be found. I have no flowers to give. The lady is 
wearing a new hat and carrying long gloves. She is going down (say: 
into the) town. Do you like to smell cloves? The battle of (bei) Leipzig 
was against Napoleon. The struggle against Napoleon was long and 
difficult. It is a great art to speak (discourse) well. I shall study in 
order to know much. The boy jumps into the water in order to save 
the child. The servant goes into the garden to shoot the bird. It is too 
far to walk. It is enough to kill you. 


EINUNDZWANZIGSTE AUFGABE 


LXX. Essentially like the pronoun er, es, sie, sie and the definite 
article der, das, die, die in having a different form for each gender in 
the nominative singular and a plural nominative and accusative like 
the feminine nominative and accusative, are the following words 
called PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES, i.e. words which may be used 
either as pronouns or as adjectives modifying a noun: dies—this, 
jen—that (though der, das, die is more frequently used for THAT), 
welch—which, what, jed—every, solch—such, manch—many a. 


N. dieser 
A. diesen 


mas. 


neut. fern, and plu. 

dieses diese 

dieses diese 


48 


Pronominal Adjectives, Cont. 


LXXI. Like the indefinite article ein, ein, eine in not distinguishing 
in the nominative the masculine from the neuter, while otherwise 
following the pronoun and the definite article, are ALL THE POS¬ 
SESSIVE ADJECTIVES: mein—my, unser—our, Ihr—your, sein— 
his, sein—its, ihr—her, ihr—their, and the negative of ein, which 
is kein—NO, NOT A: 

mas. neut. fern, and plu. 

N. mein mein meine 

A. meinen mein meine 

Caution: unser is not like dieser because unser is the stem to which 
the endings are added: unsere and unseren, whereas in dieser, the 
stem is dies. 

Note that just as sie meant SHE and THEY (also her and them) 
and Sie meant YOU (sing, and plu.), so ihr means HER and THEIR 
and Ihr means YOUR. 

Note: ihr—her, ihr—their, Ihr—your! all forms English and 
German ending in r. 

Note also the already remarked correspondence between masculine 
and neuter forms: sein—his or its, and between feminine and plural 
forms: ihr—her or their. 

1. When this group of words which we have seen as possessive 
adjectives are used as PRONOUNS,they have the full endings of the 
pronoun, cf. VI. 2, VIII. 2. b, XI, 1. b. 

mas. neut. fern, and plu. 

N. meiner meines meine 

A. meinen meines meine 

LESESTUCK 

Mein Garten ist schoner als Ihrer. Dieser Strauss ist grosser 
als jener. Ihr Kind ist alter als unseres. Welche Burg ist alter, 
die Wartburg oder die Marienburg? Unsere Strasse ist stiller 
als Ihre. Unser Park ist grosser als der Park in Pittsburg. Mein 
Mantel ist nicht so dick und warm wie Ihrer. In welches Theater 
wollen Sie gehen? Ich kann eine solche (Note order: eine solche- 
such a) Frage nicht beantworten. Manches Kind geht nur 
ungern in die Schule. Viele bleiben lieber zu Hause und spielen 
den ganzen Tag. Unsere sind keine Ausnahmen. Ihre Haut ist 
schon und weich. Meine ist roh und rot. Jeder glaubt an seinen 
Gott. Jeder Gedanke tragt Frucht. Jede Rose hat einen Dorn. 
Mein Neffe liebt mich weniger als sein Vater. Mein Neffe liebt 
mich weniger als seinen Vater. Essen Sie diese Pflaume. Sie ist 
weicher und reifer als Ihre. Welches Messer ist scharfer, dieses 
oder jenes? Lesen Sie gern? Ja, ich lese gern aber mein Bruder 
turnt lieber. Ein Knabe isst am liebsten; nicht wahr? Dieses 
Licht ist heller als gewohnlich; nicht wahr? Die Feder ist mach- 
tiger als das Schwert. 


To Express Liking and Preferring 


49 


WORTSCHATZ 

bleiben—to stay, remain 
spielen—to play 
gewohnlich (wont)—usually 

machtig—mighty (from Macht) die Ausnahme—exception 

From the word Ausnahme note that the German word-formation 
is often analogous to the Latin: ex-out and capio, capere, cepi, captus— 
to take, German aus—out and nehmen—to take, exception— 
Ausnahme. Look out for such helps. 

LXXII. To express the idea of LIKING and PREFERRING, 
in the comparative and in the superlative, the German employs the 
adverb gern, lieber, am liebsten. 

1. To like a person or a thing, one employs gern with the verb 
haben: Ich habe Sie gern—I like you. Ich habe Ihren Hut gern— 
I like your hat. 

2. To LIKE TO DO, i. e. to LIKE plus an INFINITIVE one 
employs the ENGLISH INFINITIVE, expressed or implied, as the 
INFLECTED VERB WITH GERN: 

Ich esse gern Pflaumen—I like (to eat) plums. 

Er trinkt gern Milk—He likes (to drink) milk. 

Note that the German must employ a verb other than haben 
whenever one is merely implied in English. 

Note the different position of gern in 1 and in 2. 

3. To prefer one thing or person to another, one uses the com¬ 
parative of gern which is lieber: 

Er trinkt gern Milch, aber er trinkt lieber Kaffee. 

4. To prefer a thing or person to more than one other, one uses the 
superlative of gern, which is am liebsten: 

Er trinkt gern Milch, er trinkt lieber Kaffee aber er trinkt 
am liebsten Wasser. 


UBUNG 

Schreiben Sie auf Deutsch: Your father is older than mine; is he 
not? These gloves are lighter than those. Into which letter-box shall 
I throw these letters? Do you prefer tea or coffee? Embrace my father, 
not hers. Kiss my mother, not yours. Our child is taller (gross in the 
comparative) than theirs. Their child is older than ours. Which house 
is his? What hat and what dress shall I wear? Her head is larger than 
mine. She knows too much. Which tree is nearer? Which leg is stiff er? 
What animals do you know? Name them. Into which room is she going? 
Our clock is striking ten o'clock. It is time to go to church. Shall we 
drive? My carriage is here. I prefer to walk. I like dogs and cats. I 
like cherries and plums. He likes girls. She likes hats and gloves. 
They like beer and wine. We prefer water and milk. What do you 


50 


Imperfect Tense 


prefer (to drink)? My brother likes to do gymnastics. He is no exception. 
Is the light brighter than usual? Is the pen mightier than the sword? 
Does the boy prefer (above all) to eat? It is too good to be true. 

ZWEIUNDZWANZIGSTE AUFGABE 

LXXIII. The imperfect indicative. 

1. Most verbs in English form the imperfect tense by adding -ed 
to the stem, which in English coincides with the first person singular of 
the present indicative: to laugh, I laughed. Likewise most verbs in 
German form the imperfect indicative by adding -(e)te to the infinitive 
stem, i.e. the infinitive minus the ending -(e)n. 

Note. This -(e)te is not an ending, but a TENSE SIGN common 
to all persons and numbers of the imperfect tense. Verbs having this 
tense sign without change of the stem vowel are called WEAK VERBS. 

2. A number of extremely common and useful verbs in English 
form their imperfect tense by changing the vowel of the infinitive stem: 
to sing, I sang. Likewise an about equal number of German verbs, 
usually cognates to their English equivalent, form their imperfect 
indicative in the same way: singen, ich sang; finden, ich fand; 
sehen, ich sah, stehen, ich stand; essen, ich ass, etc. These are 
called STRONG VERBS and the CHANGED VOWEL is their 
TENSE SIGN. 

3. A very few verbs are MIXED, i.e. they have both vowel change 
like the strong verbs and the -te like the weak verbs, in the imprefect 
indicative. These, too, correspond very closely in English and in 
German: konnen, konnte—can, could; bringen, brachte—bring, 
brought. 

4. All of the above kinds of verbs, weak, strong and mixed, are 
inflected alike within the tense: 

ich lachte (sang, konnte) wir lachten (sangen, konnten) 
Sie lachten (sangen, konnten) 
er lachte (sang, konnte) sie lachten (sangen, konnten) 

Note that in the first and third persons singular there is NO END¬ 
ING, -(e)te being, like the change of vowel in the strong verbs, the 
tense sign. The other persons have the same endings as they have in 
the present tense (XXIII). For the use of -te or -ete cf. XXXIV. 2. 

Remark. We can now understand the peculiar singular of the present 
tenses of the modal auxiliaries in English and in German. One says I 
can, he can (not he cans) and ich kann, er kann because these forms 
were originally imperfect forms which became shifted into the present 
tense! 

5. The imperfect tense in German is the regular tense of NARRA¬ 
TION. All stories are told in the imperfect tense. It also may be trans¬ 
lated by WAS plus the present participle: Ich sang—I was singing or 
I used to sing, i. e. continued or customary action. Customary action 


Imperfect Tense, Cont. 


51 


is also expressed in English by WOULD with the infinitive: Sie stand 
jeden Tag am Fenster und schaute hinaus—She would stand 
every day at the window and look out. In CONVERSATION the 
imperfect is not used other than for continued and customary or 
repeated actions. It does not mean did with an infinitive. 

LXXIV. In giving the PRINCIPAL PARTS of a verb, the Ger¬ 
man gives the same parts as the English, i. e. the infinitive, the first 
person singular of the imperfect and the perfect participle: to talk, 
talked, talked. We have already seen in Lesson XIV that the German 
participle regularly begins with the suffix ge-. 

1. The perfect participle of weak and mixed verbs ends in -(e)t. 
The principal parts of the typical weak verb are therefore: sagen, 
sagte, gesagt. 

a. The mixed verbs we have had thus far are: 
konnen, konnte, gekonnt. 
miissen, musste, gemusst. 
diirfen, durfte, gedurft. 
mogen, mochte, gemocht. 
wissen, wusste, gewusst. 
bringen, brachte, gebracht. 
denken, dachte, gedacht. 
nennen, nannte, genannt. 
kennen, kannte, gekannt. 

There are only four or five more in the language. 

Ubungen 

A. Weak verbs, present and imperfect tenses. 

Schreiben Sie auf Deutsch: What is she saying? What was she 
saying? What are you saying? What were you saying? Is the child 
learning German? Was the child learning English? Who is asking? 
Who was asking? Is the man kneeling? Was the man kneeling? Are 
they filling the glasses? Were they filling the glasses? I am setting the 
bird free. He was setting the bird free. The enemy denies it. Every 
time (Jedes Mai) that I asked him, he would deny it. Is she explaining 
the lesson? Was she explaining the lesson, when I knocked? Who is 
ruling in France? Who was ruling in Germany? She was answering the 
question: was she not? The light was dazzling me. The lady used to 
treat the children very well. Were they approaching? He was catching 
cold. Was she moving? They were going away. Are you going away? 
Were you buying gloves or a hat? The hunters were hunting all day 
yesterday. 

B. Mixed verbs, present and imperfect: tenses: 

Schreiben Sie auf Deutsch: I know them. I knew (used to know) 
them. He calls her his sweetheart (der Schatz). He used to call her his 
sweetheart. We think so (es) now. They used to think so. I was just 
(eben) thinking of (Lesson XV. Wortschatz) you. Were you thinking 
of me? I am bringing the child home. Were you bringing the children 


52 


Principal Parts 


home? I may go (or not). The boy was probably (mogen) ten years old. 
I may (have permission) to play all day today. He was not allowed to 
ride yesterday. We could not (were not allowed) to go down town 
(in die Stadt) yesterday. We must shorten the dress. We had to write 
the letters. He had to see his mother. I must learn this lesson. Who can 
see it (the bird)? I can. Who was not able to go yesterday? Whenever 
she was sick, she could not study. 

DREIUNDZWANZIGSTE AUFGABE 

LXXV. As in English, the strong and irregular verbs must be 
learned, but the English verbs will not only help us to know which 
verbs are strong in German, for they are usually cognates, but will 
also help in the learning of the principal parts, which sometimes show 
the same vowel sequence in the two languages: trinken, trank, 
getrunken—to drink, drank, drunk. The next best aid in learning 
the strong verbs is to learn them in groups having the same vowel 
sequence (Ablaut). Hereafter new strong verbs will be merely re¬ 
ferred to the proper vowel sequence group (Ablautsreihe). 

1. The perfect participle of strong verbs ends in -(e)n. English 
participles in -n: fallen, slain, driven, worn, etc. and in some adjective 
forms which were obviously once participles: drunken, molten. 

GROUP I. VOWEL SEQUENCE 1-2-1 

1. a- ie- a 

*fallen, fiel, gefallen—to fall, fell, fallen. 

*halten, hielt, gehalten—to hold. Third person singular present: 
er halt. 

*lassen, liess, gelassen—to let. 

*schlafen, schlief, geschlafen—to sleep. 

a- i- a (only 2) 

*fangen, fing, gefangen—to catch, cognate fang. 

*hangen, hing, gehangen—to hang. 

2. a—u—a 

*backen, buk, gebacken—to bake. 

*fahren, fuhr, gefahren—to drive, cognate, fare. 

*graben, grub, gegraben—to dig, cognate to (en)grave. 
*schlagen, schlug, geschlagen—to strike, cog. to slay. 

*tragen, trug, getragen—to carry, wear, cognate to drag. 
*wachsen, wuchs, gewachsen—to grow, cog. to wax. 

*waschen, wusch, gewaschen—to wash. 

Note that all strong verbs which have a as the vowel of the infinitive, 
have a also in the participle. 


Principal Parts, Cont. 53 

Also that they all modify the vowel in the third person singular of 
the present indicative. 

3. e—a—e 

*essen, ass, gegessen—to eat. Note the extra g in gegessen. 
*fressen, frass, gefressen—to devour. 

*geben, gab, gegeben—to give. 

**geschehen, geschah, geschehen—to happen. 

**lesen, las, gelesen—to read. 

**sehen, sah, gesehen—to see. 

*treten, trat, getreten—to step, cog. to tread, cf. XXXVII. 2. b. 
*vergessen, vergass, vergessen—to forget (1). 

4. Odd 1—2—I verbs 
kommen, kam, gekommen—to come. 

*laufen, lief, gelaufen—to run, cog. to leap. 

(1) Verbs which are not accented on the first syllable have no ge- 

UBUNG 

Strong verbs, Group I, present and imperfect tenses. 

Schreiben Sie auf Deutsch: I am falling. She was falling. I am 
holding the dog. He is holding it. He was holding it. I let him loose 
(los). She lets me loose. Whenever we caught a bird, we would let it 
loose. When the children caught a bird, they would let it loose. I sleep 
well. My mother sleeps well. We slept (were accustomed to sleep) 
well. He never slept well. We catch the sheep (singular). The dog catches 
the sheep. The boy used to catch the sheep. My dress is hanging there. 
It was hanging there. The dresses are hanging there. They were hanging 
there. I am baking a cake. The cook is baking one also. She was baking 
one yesterday. We are going to drive to (in die) town today. Is he 
going to drive to town this morning? Who was driving to town, as we 
were coming home? The gardener is digging. He was also digging 
yesterday. Is the clock striking? It was striking seven o’clock. Are 
you going to wear a hat? (The) mother is wearing one. His father 
always wore a soft hat. The children were growing every day. The 
grass is growing. The cat is washing herself. The maid was washing 
the under-linen. We eat too much bread and meat. The bird is eating the 
cherries. The boy is eating the cake. Was he eating the fresh cake or 
the old? This man gives a great deal (much). I shall give what I 
can. We gave too much. What is happening? Nothing was happening. 
I like to read. My brother likes to read. My father liked to read. Can 
you see the carriage? He sees me already. The prince saw his enemy. 
Step in (ein). The boy steps in. The man stepped in. Do not forget 
the hammer. He never forgets anything (nichts). She forgot nothing 
(nichts). Who is coming? I like to run; do you (like to run)? The 
boy runs all day. My brother used to run a great deal (much). 


54 


Principal Parts, Cont. 


VIERUNDZWANZIGSTE AUFGABE 
GROUP II. VOWEL SEQUENCE 1-2-2 
1. ei—ie—ie 

bleiben, blieb, geblieben—to stay, remain. 

scheinen, schien, geschienen—to shine, to seem. 

schreiben, schrieb, geschrieben—to write, cog. scribe, script. 

treiben, trieb, getrieben—to drive, urge, sometimes to do, to 
“be up to,” to study. 

2. ei—i—i 

beissen, biss, gebissen—to bite, 
greifen, griff, gegriffen—to seize, cog. grip, 
reiten, ritt, geritten—to ride. 

3. ie—o—o 

fliegen, flog, geflogen—to fly, die Fliege—the fly. 

fliehen, floh, geflohen—to flee, der Floh—the flea. cf. LXVI. 
2. a. (2). 

riechen, roch, gerochen—to smell, cog. reek, 
schiessen, schoss, geschossen—to shoot, 
verbieten, verbot, verboten—to forbid, cf. LVII. 2. 

4. e—o—o 

heben, hob, gehoben—to lift, cog. heave. 

*melken, molk, gemolken—to milk. 

*schmelzen, schmolz, geschmolzen—to melt, cf. to smelt, 
weben, wob, gewoben—to weave. 

5. ii—o—o 

liigen, log, gelogen—to (tell a) lie. 

UBUNG 

Schreiben Sie auf Deutsch: Let us remain here. I shall stay at 
home all day today. Were they staying at home? The sun is shining 
brightly (bright). Was it shining yesterday while you were riding? 
Your father seems to be well today. Yes, he seemed to be well yesterday 
too. Let us write that letter. I was writing all day yesterday. Were 
you writing a letter? The man is driving calves to (auf) the country. 
What was he doing (up to) yesterday all day? What are you studying, 
German or English? The dog bites. His bite is poisonous. The hunter 
seizes the twig and holds it fast. He seized the bird and carried it home. 
A trooper rides. A knight rode. A fly flies and a flea flees. The dove 
was flying over the forest and fell into the sea. The enemy fled. This 


Principal Parts, Cont. 


55 


cheese smells strong. The mouse smelt the cheese and sprang on the 
table to eat it. Don’t shoot! A hunter shot him and killed him. I forbid 
it. That is forbidden. The mother lifts the child up. She lifted it upon 
her shoulder and carried it home. Does the (man) servant milk or the 
maid? Can you milk a cow? The girl milked the cow and carried the 
milk home. He was weaving the cloth. He weaves well, I believe. The 
man is lying. He always lied. Ice melts rapidly. 

FUNFUNDZWANZIGSTE AUFGABE 
GROUP III. VOWEL SEQUENCE 1-2-3 

1. e—a—o 

*brechen, brach, gebrochen—to break. 

*helfen, helf, geholfen—to help. 

*nehmen, nahm, genommen—to take, cf. XXXVII. 2. b. 
*sprechen, sprach, gesprochen—to speak. 

*stechen, stach, gestochen—to stick, prick. 

**stehlen, stahl, gestohlen—to steal. 

*sterben, starb, gestorben—to die, cog. starve. 

*werfen, warf, geworfen—to throw, cog. warp. 

2. i—a—o 

schwimmen, schwamm, geschwommen—to swim. 

3. i—a—u 

binden, band, gebunden—to bind, to tie. 
finden, fand, gefunden—to find, 
singen, sang, gesungen— to sing, 
springen, sprang, gesprungen—to spring, jump, 
trinken, trank, getrunken—to drink. 

4. i(ie)—a—e 
liegen, lag, gelegen—to lie. 
sitzen, sass, gesessen—to sit. 

GROUP IV. CONSONANTAL IRREGULARITIES 

*essen, ass, gegessen—to eat. 
gehen, ging, gegangen—to go, went, gone, 
sitzen, sass, gesessen—to sit. 
stehen, stand, gestanden—to stand, 
tun, tat, getan—to do. 


56 


Principal Parts, Cont. 


GROUP V. THE IRREGULAR VERBS, HABEN, SEIN, 
*WERDEN 


haben, hatte, gehabt—to have. 

sein, war, gewesen—to be, was, been (Not used of health with the 
adverb gut). 

*werden, wurde, geworden—to become, to get (followed by 
ADJECTIVE). 

Note. *Werden had formerly a perfectly regular imperfect ward 
(III. 1), which is found in the classics but is not now used in ordinary 
speech and writing. 

LXXVI. The imperfect tense is used to express continued or 
repeated action: He was singing, He used to sing. He would sing 
(for hours)—Er sang (stundenlang). It is also the regular tense of 
narration. Cf. LXXIII. 5. 

LXXVII. Just as the present was used for the English perfect 
when referring to an act that had begun in the past and was continuing 
in the present (cf. XLV), so the imperfect is used for the English 
pluperfect when referring to an action that began in the “more-than- 
past” time and was continuing in the past: I HAD BEEN WAITING 
two hours (and still was) when she came—Ich wartete schon zwei 
Stunden, als sie kam. 

Note. This construction is usually accompanied by the word 
schon. 


UBUNG 


Schreiben Sie auf Deutsch: The boy throws the ball and breaks 
the window. The children were throwing the ball. The man was break¬ 
ing the ice. That helps. Nothing helped. Take a book and read. The 
girl takes a book and reads. She took a book and read aloud (vor). 
Do you speak German? Is she speaking? He was talking too loud. 
A pin is sticking me. A pin was sticking her. The dog is stealing the 
meat. The cat stole the milk. Thou shalt (Du sollst) not steal. The 
lady drank poison and died. No, she is dying, but she is not yet (noch 
nicht) dead. I prefer to die at home. Can you swim? The children 
were swimming; were they not? The girl is making (i.e. tying) a bouquet 
The mother tied their books together (zusammen). Does he find the 
summer in Baltimore too warm? I found a ring and a bracelet and laid 
them on the table. We were singing too loud. The children were jumping 
over the chairs and the table. The boy jumps up and brings a chair for 
his mother. The hunters were talking and drinking and singing. Where 
is my hat? It is lying there. It was lying there. Where is (the) mother? 
She is sitting at home and growing (i.e. becoming, getting) more quiet 
every day. Where were you sitting? A man (i.e. a human being) eats, 
an animal devours. We were eating but we were not hungry. Let's 
go! He is going now. We were going to the country, (cf. We were 
(i.e. intended to) going to the country). She stands too much. Where 
were you standing? Had you been standing there long? Where were 


Imperfect Subjunctive 


57 


they waiting? Had they been waiting long? They had been waiting 
twenty minutes or more. Do you like to do it? Does she like to do it? 
Did you use to like to do it? She has a daughter and three sons. He had 
six children. One is never to old to learn. I am sick. I am well. He was 
not sick. He was getting better. She is getting prettier every day. Will 
he get stronger? Had the book been lying there long when you found it? 


SECHSUNDZWANZIGSTE AUFGABE 

LXXVIII. The imperfect subjunctive. 

1. Weak verbs have an imperfect subjunctive identical with their 
imperfect indicative: 

Ind: ich (er) lachte, wir (Sie, sie) lachten 

Subj: ich (er) lachte, wir (Sie, sie) lachten. 

2. Strong verbs form the imperfect subjunctive by adding -e to the 
first and third persons singular and modifying, (if possible), the vowel 
throughout: 

Ind. ich (er) ging, wir (Sie, sie) gingen. 

Subj. ich (er) ginge, wir (Sie, sie) gingen. 

Ind. ich (er) war, wir (sie, sie) waren. 

Subj. ich (er) ware, wir (Sie, sie) waren. 

3. Mixed verbs. 

a. The following modify the vowel: konnen, mussen, diirfen, 
mogen, wissen, bringen, denken: 

Indie, konnte, musste, durfte, mochte, wusste, brachte, 
dachte. 

Subj: konnte, miisste, durfte, mochte, wusste, brachte, 
dachte. 

b. Nennen, kennen and a few others have in the imperfect 
subjunctive not the a of the imperfect indicative but the e of the 
present stem: 

Indie, nannte, kannte, etc. 

Subj. nennte, kennte, etc. 

4. Irregular verbs: haben, sein, werden. 

Indie, hatte, war, wurde. 

Subj. hatte, ware, wurde. 

LXXIX. The imperfect subjunctive forms have almost disappeared 
from the English language and with them almost all feeling for such as 
remain. There is, however, one place where all educated people use 
the imperfect subjunctive: If I WERE you. 

Note that this IMPERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE TENSE refers 
to the PRESENT TIME. 


58 


Imperfect Subjunctive, Cont. 


1. The IMPERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE then, unlike the imperfect 
indicative which refers to a fact in past time, refers to a NON-FACT 
IN THE PRESENT OR FUTURE TIME. 

Whenever, then, you find an English imperfect tense referring to 
present or future time, you must translate it into German by the 
imperfect subjunctive. For in the indicative the tense corresponds to 
the time (with the reservation made in XLIV), but in the subjunctive 
the tenses do not always correspond to the time. 

LXXX. Fact conditions and non-fact conditions in present and 
in future time. 

1. In present time. 

a. Fact: Ich muss gehen, wenn ich kann—I must go, if I can. 

b. Non-fact (unreal): Ich konnte gehen, wenn ich wollte—I 
could go, if I wanted to. 

2. In future time. 

a. Fact. Ich werde sie sehen, wenn sie morgen zu Hause ist 
(XLIV)—I shall see her, if she is at home tomorrow. 

b. Non-fact (ideal). Ich konnte sie sehen, wenn sie morgen 
zu Hause ware—I could (SHOULD be able) see her, if she were 
(were going to be or SHOULD be) at home. 

Or: Ich wiirde sie morgen sehen konnen wenn sie zu Hause 
sein sollte—I SHOULD be able to see her tomorrow, if she SHOULD 
be at home. 

Note 1. ich (er) wiirde, wir (Sie, sie) wiirden means SHOULD 
or WOULD corresponding to the shall and will of the future. These 
forms may be used, therefore, as should and would in English, in the 
result-clause of ALL NON-FACT CONDITIONS. 

Note 2. ich (er) sollte, wir (Sie, sie) sollten means SHOULD 
(never would) and may be used therefore as the contingent should in 
English, in the if-clause of NON-FACT CONDITIONS referring 
to the FUTURE. It is also the SHOULD of INDIRECT COM¬ 
MANDS: Er sagte, dass ich gehen sollte—He said, that I should go. 

LXXXI. Direct and Indirect quotations of another person's 
thought or statement and of one's own thought or statement at some 
past time (since one's opinion may have changed), the direct statement 
being in the present or future tense. 

1. The direct quotation (statement or question) being in the 
present tense: 

a. Direct. Die Mutter sagte: “Er darf nicht gehen.” The 
mother said: “He must not go." 

b. Indirect. Die Mutter sagte, er diirfte nicht gehen (dass 
er nicht gehen diirfte)—The mother said (that) he must not go. 

Note. The indirect quotation is not a dependent clause unless a 
subordinating conjunction is expressed. 


Imperfect Subjunctive, Cont. 


59 


2. The direct quotation being in the future tense. 

a. Direct. Ich fragte: “Wird er kommen?”—I asked: “Will 
he come?” 

b. Indirect. Ich fragte, ob er kame (LXXIX. 1)—I asked if 
he were coming. 

Or Ich fragte, ob er kommen wurde—I asked if he would come. 

Note. Ich (er) wurde, wir (Sie, sie) wiirden replaces in the 
subjunctive the ich werde, er wird, wir (Sie, sie) werden of the 
future indicative, in accordance with our rule that the inflected verb 
is shifted from the present indicative to the imperfect subjunctive. 
This rule applies to all auxiliary verbs in the present tense as well as 
to the simple present. 

LESESTUCK 

Wenn sie Kohl isst, ist sie krank. Wenn Sie hier bleiben, 
konnen Sie meinen Bruder sehen. Wenn er das Buch bringt, 
werde ich es lesen. Wenn sie singt, entfernen sich alle. Wenn 
wir lachen, kann man uns iiberall horen. Wenn wir blieben, 
konnten wir ihn sehen. Wenn ich es asse, wiirde ich krank 
werden. Wenn ich ihn sehen sollte, wiirde ich ihn griissen. 
Wenn sie es wiisste, wiirde sie es sagen. Wenn ich das dachte, 
wiirde ich an sie schreiben. Wenn sie dort sasse, diirfte man 
nichts sagen. Sie sagte, dass sie nicht schlafen konnte. Er fragte, 
ob er das Buch lesen diirfte. Er fragte, was sie tate. Die Eltern 
wollten wissen, wohin wir gingen. Mein Vater wollte wissen, 
ob ich an die Mutter schriebe. 

WORTSCHATZ 

alle—all, everybody, alles—everything, iiberall—everywhere. 

UBUNGEN 

1. Put into direct quotations the indirect quotations above. 

2. Rewrite the conditional sentences beginning each with the main 
clause. 

3. Schreiben Sie auf Deutsch: If he sleeps there, he will catch 
cold. If he slept there he would catch cold. If it rains, we shall not be 
able to go. If it should snow, we should have to stay at home tomorrow. 
If the sun were shining, the flowers would grow better. He said he could 
neither ride nor shoot. They asked if we spoke German. He answered 
that we were studying it and finding it very interesting although it 
was hard. 

4. Put the direct commands in Lesson Nine into indirect. 

SIEBENUNDZWANZIGSTE AUFGABE 

LXXXII. All transitive and most intransitive verbs form their 
perfect and pluperfect tenses, as in English, by adding the perfect 
participle of the verb to the (a) present tense of the verb haben—to 


60 


Haben and Sein as Auxiliaries 


have to form the perfect tense or to the (b) imperfect tense of haben— 
to have to form the pluperfect tense. For the position of the participle 
see LIII. 1 and LV. 1. 

1. Perfect indicative of sehen—to see and stehen—to stand. 

ich habe—gesehen wir haben—gesehen 

(gestanden) (gestanden) 

Sie haben—gesehen (gestanden) 
er hat—gesehen sie haben—gesehen 

(gestanden) (gestanden) 

2. Pluperfect indicative of sehen—to see and stehen—to stand. 

ich hatte—gesehen wir hatten—gesehen 

(gestanden) (gestanden) 

Sie hatten—gesehen (gestanden) 
er hatte—gesehen sie hatten—gesehen 

(gestanden) (gestanden) 

3. Pluperfect subjunctive of sehen and stehen. 

ich hatte—gesehen wir hatten—gesehen 

(gestanden) (gestanden) 

Sie hatten—gesehen (gestanden) 
er hatte—gesehen sie hatte—gesehen 

(gestanden) (gestanden) 

LXXXIII. SOME INTRANSITIVE verbs use, as in French, 
Spanish and Italian, for the auxiliary of the perfect tenses the proper 
form of the verb to be—sein. 

a. Only intransitive verbs expressing CHANGE OF PLACE* 
gehen, kommen,* laufen,* fallen,* fahren,* treten, fliegen, etc. 

b. or CHANGE OF CONDITION.* sterben,* werden,* wach- 
sen, geschehen, etc. 

c. and sein and bleiben have sein for their auxiliary in the 
perfect tenses. 

1. Perfect indicative of * werden—to become. 

ich bin—geworden wir sind—geworden 

Sie sind—geworden 

er ist—geworden sie sind—geworden 

2. Pluperfect indicative of *werden. 

ich war—geworden wir waren—geworden 

Sie waren—geworden 

er war—geworden sie waren—geworden 

3. Pluperfect subjunctive of *werden. 

ich ware—geworden wir waren—geworden 

Sie waren—geworden 

er ware—geworden sie waren—geworden 

Note. In all the above and similar forms the verb sein must be 
translated into English by the corresponding form of the verb to HAVE 
not to be. 


Use of the Perfect Tense 


61 


LXXXIV. The use of the perfect tense in German corresponds in 
general to its use in English. 

1. One case in which the German does not employ the perfect 
tense, where the English does was noted in section XLV. 

2. Otherwise the German employs the perfect tense more fre¬ 
quently than the English. It is the usual tense for referring to a single 
past event in ordinary CONVERSATION (the imperfect being the 
tense of narration cf. LXXVI). Hence it regularly replaces the DID 
(plus and infinitive) in English: 

Wie haben Sie geschlafen?—How did you sleep? 

Ich habe ihn nicht gesehen—I did not see him. 

Wir sind nicht gegangen—We did not go. 

LXXXV. The use of the pluperfect in German corresponds to its 
use in English except in the case noted in section LXXVII. 

LESESTOCK 

Der Jager hat den Tiger geschossen. Der Kaufmann hat das 
Haus gekauft. Das Kind hat den Ball geworfen. Wir haben 
dort lange gestanden. cf. Wir stehen hier schon lange. cf. Wir 
standen dort schon lange, als es zu regenen begann. Wer hat 
das Glas gebrochen? Wir haben den ganzen Tag Deutsch 
gesprochen. Ich hatte ihren Vater nie gekannt. Sie hatten den 
ganzen Tag nichts gegessen. Wer hatte das Kind gesehen? 
Ihr Haar ist grauer geworden, seitdem sie hier wohnt. Was ist 
geschehen? Was tut sie jetzt, da ihre Eltern gestorben sind? 
Wo waren die Kinder gewesen, als Sie sahen? Die Gaste sind die 
ganze Woche geblieben. Meine Freundinnen waren schon ins 
(in das) Theater gegangen, als ich kam. 

UBUNGEN 

1. Turn the above statements into questions. 

2. Answer the questions. 

3. Schreiben Sie auf Deutsch: The room has become too warm. 
The foliage had already turned (become) yellow and red when we went 
to the country. The clock had struck twelve before he came home. 
The boy has gotten (become) lazy. We had seen the clouds and had 
come home before it rained. Have you lost your knife? Did the child 
fall while it was running or while it was standing still? Did the servant 
see the lady or did he tell a lie? Did you drive to town? I had forgotten 
to bring the book. 

ACHTUNDZWANZIGSTE AUFGABE 

LXXXVI. The pluperfect subjunctive in English has no distinctive 
form, but since the non-fact condition referring to present time (If I 
were you) is subjunctive, the non-fact condition referring to past time 
must also be subjunctive: If I had been you. 


62 


The Pluperfect Subjunctive 


Note that this PLUPERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE refers to PAST 
TIME. 

1. The PLUPERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE then, unlike the pluper¬ 
fect indicative which refers to a fact in the more-than-past time, refers 
to a NON-FACT IN PAST TIME. 

Whenever, then, you find in English a pluperfect subjunctive re¬ 
ferring to mere past time, you must translate it into German by the 
pluperfect subjunctive, cf. LXXIX. 1. 

LXXXVII. Fact and non-fact conditions in past time. 

1. Fact conditions: Wenn sie da war, habe ich sie nicht gesehen 
—If she was there (maybe she was but) I did not see her. 

2. Non-fact conditions: a. Wenn ich ihn gesehen hatte, hatte 
ich ihn gegriisst—If I had seen him (but I did NOT), I should have 
spoken to him (but I did NOT), b. Wenn das Kind gestorben 
ware, ware die Mutter krank geworden—If the child had died 
(but it did NOT) the mother would have gotten sick (but she did NOT). 

Note. Ich hatte ihn gegriisst—I should have spoken to him and 
Die Mutter ware krank geworden—The mother would have gotten 
sick may also be written (cf. LXXX. 2. b. Note 1.): Ich wiirde ihn 
gegriisst haben—I SHOULD HAVE SPOKEN to him. Die Mutter 
wiirde krank geworden sein—The mother WOULD HAVE BE¬ 
COME ill. 

LXXXVIII. Direct and indirect quotation of another's thought 
or statement and of one's own thought or statement at some past time, 
the direct statement being in any past tense or in the pluperfect tense. 

1. Direct. Der Vater sagte: “Ich war nicht da.”—“I was not 
there." “Ich bin nicht da gewesen”—“I have not been there." 
“Ich war nicht da gewesen”—“I had not been there." 

2. Indirect. Der Vater sagte, er ware nicht da gewesen 
(dass) er nicht da gewesen ware—(that) he had not been there. 

LESESTUCK 

Wenn wir es gewusst hatten, hatten wir uns entfernt. Wenn 
die Uhr geschlagen hatte, waren wir nicht so lange geblieben. 
Wenn sie sich warmer gekleidet hatten, hatten sie sich nicht 
erkaltet. Wenn es nicht geregnet hatte, waren sie nicht zu 
Hause geblieben. Wenn er gefallen ware, hatte er ein Bein 
gebrochen. Wenn er nicht vergessen hatte, das Buch zu bringen, 
hatte ich es schon gelesen. Ich ware zu Hause geblieben, wenn 
ich Sie gesehen hatte. Fragten Sie, ob ich es vergessen hatte? 
Der Schuler sagte, er hatte die Aufgabe vergessen. Ich glaubte, 
ich hatte vergessen, den Brief auf die Post zu bringen. Der 
Kaufmann glaubte, dass der Jager das Gold gestohlen hatte. 
Der Mann fragte, warum der Knecht nicht gekommen ware. 
Der Knecht antwortete, er ware krank gewesen und deswegen 
zu Hause geblieben. 


Genitive Case 


63 


WORTSCHATZ 

deswegen—on this (that) account. 

glauben—to believe. 

warum—why? 

UBUNGEN 

1. Reverse the order of the clauses in all the sentences beginning 
with Wenn. 

2. Substitute in all the result-clauses the wiirde—construction 
(cf. LXXXVII. 2. Note). 

3. In the indirect statements put in dass where it is omitted and 
remove it where it is expressed. 


NEUNUNDZWANZIGSTE AUFGABE 

LXXXIX. Feminine and plural nouns show no sign of possession, 
depending solely upon the article or other modifier to show it. 

Just as the possessive adjective for the feminine and plural ihr—her 
and their ended in r, so the definite article in the genitive case of the 
feminine and plural ends in r: der. 

der Frau—of the woman, the woman’s. 

der Frauen—of the women, the women’s. 

XC. Masculine and neuter nouns, as in English, add -(e)s to show 
possession (but no apostrophe!). The article also ends in -s: des. 

des Kaufmanns—the merchant’s, of the merchant; des Mannes— 
the man’s. 

des Theaters—of the theatre, the theatre’s; des Kindes—the 
child’s. 


XCI. Paradigm of nouns and article in the nominative, accusative 
and genitive (possessive) cases: 

mas. neut. fern. plu. 

N. der Onkel das Buch die Dame die Onkel (Bucher, 

Damen) 

A. den Onkel das Buch die Dame die Onkel (Bucher, 

Damen) 

G. des Onkels des Buches der Dame der Onkel (Bucher, 

Damen) 

XCII. The endings given in LXXXIX and XC apply alike to 
the group of words in LXX and to that in LXXI. 


XCIII. The relative (and demonstrative) pronoun has expanded 
forms in all the genitives: 


mas. 

N. der 
A. den 
G. dessen 


neut. 

das 

das 

dessen 


fern. plu. 

die die—who 

die die—whom 

deren deren—whose 


Note that the s of the masculine and neuter genitive is doubled 
before the ending -en merely to preserve the sound des. 


64 Genitive Case, Cont. 

XCIV. The interrogative pronoun N. wer, A. wen has the genitive 
wessen ?—whose? 

XCV. The genitive case is used in German to express indefinite or 
general time. The commonest example is Twines Tages—one day, 
sometime. 

Other expressions are des Abends, morgens, abends and even, 
by analogy with the masculine forms, nachts, des Nachts—at night. 

XCVI. The genitive case is also used after the following preposi¬ 
tions and some other less common ones: (an)statt — instead of, 
trotz—in spite of, wahrend—during and wegen—on account of. 

Note that the prepositions which govern the genitive in German are 
usually translated into English by a compound preposition ending 
in OF. 

LESESTUCK 

Mein Vater ist der Mann meiner Mutter und der Sohn meiner 
Grosseltern. Der Bruder meines Vaters ist mein Onkel und die 
Schwester meiner Mutter ist meine Tante. Der Sohn meines 
Onkels ist mein Vetter und die Tochter meiner Tante ist meine 
Cousine. Die Kinder meiner Eltern sind die Enkel und die 
Enkelinnen meiner Grosseltern. Der Sohn meines Vaters ist 
der Neffe meiner Tante und meines Onkels. Die Tochter meiner 
Mutter ist die Nichte meines Onkels und meiner Tante. Das 
Dach unseres Hauses ist grim. Der Titel dieses Buches ist 
interssant. Die Eltern dieses Madchens sind gestorben. Das 
Laub der Baume wird gelb und rot. Wessen Hut ist das? Wessen 
Buch haben Sie gelesen? Wessen Kinder sind die? Die Eltern, 
dessen Sohn gestorben ist, sind traurig. Die Mutter, deren 
Kinder das Fenster gebrochen haben, wollte es nicht glauben. 
Welche Mutter wollte es nicht glauben? Wessen Mann ist 
mein Vater? Wessen Sohn ist er? Das Buch, dessen Seiten gelb 
sind, ist sehr alt. Der Baum, dessen Laub dick ist, macht einen 
guten Schatten. 

WORTSGHATZ 

der Enkel—grandson die Enkelin—granddaughter 

der Mann—man, husband die Frau—woman, wife, Mrs. 

der Vetter—(male) cousin cf. das Fraulein—Miss. 

die Schwester—sister 

UBUNGEN 

1. Using the genitive of the interrogative pronoun, form questions 
on the first six sentences above. 

2. Beantworten Sie die Fragen! 


footnote. The translation ONE DAY sometimes causes the student to feel that 
the expression is one of the definite time. Ein is here, however, not the numeral one, 
but tne INDEFINITE article A and therefore the expression is one of INDEFINITE 
time. 



Inseparable Prefixes 


65 


3. Schreiben Sie auf Deutsch: Her brother's wife has a small 
mouth and a beautiful skin. His friend's garden is full (of) flowers. 
Our friend's (fern.) house is new. Whose gloves are these? My mother, 
whose room is warm and sunny, prefers to read and write there. The 
knight, whose dream it was to rescue a beautiful lady, kissed his sword 
and rode forth (fort). The heathen, whose god is a stone or a tree, 
believes in (an) his god. The monk, whose pen is broken, must go 
into the cloister to seek another. The bird, whose nest had fallen, flew 
away. The children, whose grandfather died last week, remained at 
home today. One day we went to the country to see a friend. Some¬ 
time we must go down (in die) town to get a new hat. What do you do 
(generally) in the evening? The moon shines through my window at 
night. Instead of laughing (zu lachen) she cried. Instead of a hat she 
bought shoes and gloves. Instead of shoes, he bought a hat. In spite 
of the rain they came to see us. On account of the weather we could 
not go out. During the war everything was expensive (dear). During 
the night we heard a sound. In the morning (generally) I write letters. 

DREISSIGSTE AUFGABE 

XCVII. In English we have verbs like the verbs to BEhold, to 
FORget, to REturn, in which the prefixes be-, for-, re- are inseparable 
from the verb and change its meaning very markedly. So in German 
there are the following inseparable prefixes which change the meaning 
of the root verb, often almost beyond recognition: be-, ent-, (or 
emp-), er-, ge-, ver-, zer-. 

1. These prefixes never receive the accent and therefore 

2. A verb having one of these prefixes has no ge- in the participle, 
since the accent in German may never fall further back than the 
second syllable. 

The principal parts are accordingly: 
bekommen, bekam, bekommen—to get (transitive). 

*enthalten, enthielt, enthalten—to contain, 
empfinden, empfand, empfunden—to feel. 

*erfahren, erfuhr, erfahren— to experience, to find out, to hear of. 

*gefallen, gefiel, gefalien—to be pleasing (to—dative). 

*vertreten, vertrat, vertreten—to represent. 

*zerbrechen, zerbrach, zerbrochen—to smash. 

Other examples already seen are: verstehen, verbieten,* vergessen, 
**geschehen. 

XCVIII. In English we have also verbs such as the verbs to 
STAND UP, to GO OUT, to COME IN, in which the words UP, OUT 
and IN are separated from the verb and, though they change the 
meaning of the simple verb, they change it in a perfectly literal way. 
In German, too, there are such separable prefixes. In both languages 
they are too numerous to enumerate. 


66 


Separable Prefixes 


1. These prefixes always receive the accent. 

2. They always stand AS NEAR THE END OF THE SENTENCE 
AS POSSIBLE, only infinitives and participles in independent clauses 
(cf. LVII and LIV. 1.) and the inflected verb, as well as infinitives and 
participles, in dependent clauses (cf. LV and LV. 1.) standing after 
them. 

Since, then, infinitives and participles always, when present, follow 
the prefix, the principal parts are always given as follows: 

aufstehen, stand—auf, aufgestanden—to get up. 

hereinkommen, kam—herein, hereingekommen—to come 
in. 

hinausgehen, ging—hinaus, hinausgegangen—to go out. 
*einschlafen, schlief—ein, eingeschlafen—to go to sleep. 
*anfangen, fing—an, angefangen—to begin. 

**vorlesen, las—vor, vorgelesen—to read aloud. 

aufheben, hob—auf, aufgehoben—to pick up. 

Note that these prefixes are joined to the infinitive and the participle, 
being in this respect like the inseparable prefixes, but that the joining 
is a much looser one in the case of the separable prefixes is shown by 
the fact that when zu is expressed with the infinitive, it stands be¬ 
tween the prefix and the infinitive, thus: aufzustehen, einzuschlafen. 
Associate with this the position of the ge- in the participle: aufgestan¬ 
den. These prefixes, then, though sometimes joined to the verb are 
truly separable. 

XCIX. A verb having a prefix not infrequently has a different 
auxiliary from that of the simple verb. This takes place when the 
prefix changes: 

1. an intransitive verb into a transitive verb (kommen, bekom- 
men; *fahren, *erfahren; *treten, *vertreten), 

2. an intransitive verb which expressed a change of place or con¬ 
dition into one which no longer does so (*falien, *gef alien), 

3. an intransitive verb which did not express a change of place or 
condition into one which does (*schlafen, *einschlaf en; stehen, 
aufstehen). 

See sections LXXXII and LXXXIII. 

LESESTUCK 

Dieser Koffer enthalt meine Kleider. Was hat diese Flasche 
enthalten? Heute morgen habe ich zwei Briefe bekommen. 
Wer vertritt jetzt Frankreich in Washington? Wer vertritt 
Deutschland? Wer vertrat Deutschland, als der Krieg ausbrach? 
Diese Damen haben unser Vaterland in Copenhagen vertreten. 
Wir empfanden tief den Tod unserer Freundin. Die Mutter hat 
es tiefer empfunden, als der Vater, als sie lernte, dass ihr Sohn 


Dative Case 


67 


gelogen hatte. Wo haben Sie das erfahren? Diese Madchen 
haben sehr gefallen. Wer hat das Glas zerbrochen? Stehen Sie 
auf! Ich bin um sieben Uhr morgens aufgestanden, nachdem 
ich erst um elf Uhr abends eingeschlafen bin. Wir wollten 
eben hinausgehen, als er hereinkam. Der Knabe hob das Buch 
auf und fing an, vorzulesen. 

WORTSCHATZ 

der Krieg—war erst—not—until 

UBUNGEN 

1. Turn the statements into as many questions as possible. 

2. Schreiben Sie auf Deutsch: What time did you go to sleep? 
How long did you sleep? I had gotten up at six o’clock and had gone 
out without eating (zu essen) and had stood a long time, so I was 
sleepy and hungry. We had not heard of the death of her daughter, 
when we saw her. I used to read aloud every day. Take the book and 
read aloud in German. Come in! Begin! Did you get a letter this morn¬ 
ing? During the summer we get up earlier than during the winter. 
On account of the heat, the child could not go to sleep. During the 
night she got up and drank a glass of water. 

EINUNDDREISSIGSTE AUFGABE 

C. Nouns do not as a rule show a distinctive ending in the dative 
singular. 

Masculine and neuter monosyllables MAY add an -e for the sake of 
euphony: das Haus, nach Hause, zu Hause, though in South 
Germany one says nach Haus and zu Haus. 

CL The masculine and neuter pronoun is in the dative ihm—to 
HIM and to it. (English him was the dative in Anglo-Saxon, the accus¬ 
ative HINE, cf. German ihn, having been lost.) The article is accord¬ 
ingly dem. 

CII. The feminine pronoun is in the dative ihr—to HER. Just as 
in English the possessive adjective HER is the same as the pronoun 
HER, so the German possessive adjective ihr, uninflected, is the same 
as the dative ihr. The article is accordingly der, being the same for 
the genitive and the dative cases. 

CIII. ALL NOUNS in the dative plural end in -(e)n. If the nomi¬ 
native plural ends in -n, all cases of the plural are alike, otherwise 
-(e)n must be added in the dative. 

CIV. ALL FORMS capable of standing in the dative plural: 
pronouns, articles, adjectives must end in -(e)n in the dative plural. 

1. The personal pronoun has the expanded dative plural: ihnen. 

2. The relative (and demonstrative) pronoun has the expanded 
form: denen. 


68 


Dative Case, Cont. 


CV. Paradigm of nouns and article in all cases: 


mas. 

N. der Tisch 
A. den Tisch 
G. des Tisches 
D. dem Tisch(e) 


neut. 

das Fenster 
das Fenster 
des Fensters 
dem Fenster 


fern. plu. 

die Frau die Tische 

(Fenster, Frauen) 
die Frau die Tische 

(Fenster, Frauen) 
der Frau der Tische 

(Fenster, Frauen) 
der Frau den Tischen 

(Fenstern, Frauen) 


CVI. The above endings of the dative case apply alike to the group 
of words in section LXX and to that in section LXXI. 


CVII. The relative (and demonstrative) pronoun has expanded 
forms in all the genitive cases and in the dative plural. Compare it 
with the personal pronoun of the third person, the genitive of which 
is omitted for the present: 

mas. neut. fern. plu. 

N. er—der es—das sie—die sie—die 

A. ihn—den es—das sie—die sie—die 

G. -dessen -dessen -der -deren 

D. ihm—dem ihm—dem ihr—der ihnen—denen 

CVIII. The interrogative pronoun is: N. wer, A. wen, G. wessen, 
D. wem, cf. dem, ihm. 

CIX. The personal pronoun of the first person singular and plural 
is: N. ich, A. mich, D. mir, N. wir, A. uns, D. uns. 

CX. The list of prepositions learned in section LII, which govern 
the accusative in answer to the question Wohin (cf. XXXVIII), 
govern the dative in answer to the question Wo? These are: an—at, 
auf—on, hinter—behind, in—in, neben—near, unter—under, 
liber—over, vor—before, in front of, zwischen—between. 

CXI. The dative is used always after the prepositions: aus—out 
of, ausser—except, bei—by, at the house of (French chez), i. e. with 
mit—with, nach—to, toward, after, according to, seit—since, von— 
of, by (with the passive), zu—to, at, in the phrase zu Hause. 

Lists of prepositions should be memorized. 


LESESTUCK 

A. Die Dame sitzt am (an dem) Fenster und liest in einem 
Buch. Neben ihr steht ein Tisch. Auf dem Tisch liegen viele 
Bucher und hinter dem Tisch steht ein Stuhl. liber dem Tisch 
hangt ein Licht. Zwischen dem Tisch und dem Fenster steht 
der Stuhl der Dame. Vor dem Fenster wachst ein Baum und 
unter dem Fenster sind viele Blumen. Auf zwei Stiihlen schlafen 
zwei Katzen. Ein Dieb stand hinter einem Kaufmann aber 
neben ihm stand eine Frau, die ihn sah, als er die Uhr des 
Kaufmanns stehlen wollte. 


Dative Case, Cont. 


69 


B. Alle ausser mir und meiner Mutter waren zur (zu der) 
Kirche gegangen. Meine Nichte und ich wollen den ganzen 
Sommuer bei meinem Bruder, ihrem Vater, bleiben. Das 
Madchen nahm unsere Kleider aus dem Koffer. Wollen Sie 
mit mir in die Stadt gehen? Sie wohnt sehr weit von ihrer 
Familie. Seit dem Tag haben sir ihn nicht gesehen. Von wem 
haben Sie einen Brief erhalten? Kommen Sie morgen zu mir. 
Ich wollte eben nach ihrer Mutter fragen. Ich werde nach elf 
Uhr gehen konnen. 

UBUNGEN 

1. Machen Sie aus den Satzen (sentences) unter A. so viele 
Fragen wie moglich, indem Sie mit dem Fragewort Wo? anfan- 
gen. Beantworten Sie die sogemachten Fragen. 

2. Schreiben Sie auf Deutsch: The children go to (the) school 
every day except (the) Sunday. On (an) (the) Sunday they go to (the) 
church. With whom are you spending (zubringen) the month—with 
your brother or with your sister? What did you drink out of that 
glass? With whom are you going to the theatre tomorrow evening? 
I know no one in Paris except her and her husband. She came home 
after me. According to her sister she was ill yesterday. Of whom did 
you say that? The child runs to his parents. Since June (XXII) I have 
been reading (XLV) this book. 

ZWEIUNDDREISSIGSTE AUFGABE 

CXII. The dative case is used with such verbs as take in addition 
to a direct object an indirect object naming the person TO WHOM 
the direct object is given or said or FROM WHOM the direct object 
is taken. Such verbs are, for example, *geben—to give, reichen—to 
reach, hand, sagen—to say, *nehmen—to take. 

Note however that fragen—to ask and lehren—to teach take two 
accusatives: Er fragte es mich—He asked it of me. Ich lehre Sie 
Deutsch—I teach you German. 

CXIII. The dative is further used in German with a group of verbs 
which in English are transitive. This list approximates the familiar 
Latin list favor: help, please, trust etc., but is not identical with it. 
Such verbs are: 

antworten—to answer (PERSONS. To answer questions is beant¬ 
worten). 

'begegnen—to meet (be- is here a corruption of bei-, hence the 
dative). 

danken—to thank. 

dienen—to serve. 

drohen—to threaten. 

erlauben—to allow, to give LEAVE. 

fehlen—to lack. Die Zeit fehlt mir or impersonally Es fehlt mir 
an Zeit.—I lack time. Was fehlt Ihnen—What is the matter with 
you? 


70 


Dative Case, Cont. 


Tolgen—to follow. 

*gefallen—to please. 

gehorchen—to obey, cog. harken, listen to, obey, 
glauben—to BELIEVE (persons). Ich glaube ihm—I believe 
him but Ich glaube es—I believe it and Ich glaube an Gott—I 
believe in God. 

*helfen—to help. 

*raten—to advise (Third person er rat). 

schmeicheln—to flatter. 

trauen—to trust. 

trotzen—to defy. 

and others, mostly compound verbs, the prefix of which governs 
the dative. 

Verbs marked 1 are conjugated with sein in the perfect tenses. 

CXIV. Many adjectives which in English are followed by TO 
govern—and follow—the dative: 

Er ist mir dankbar—He is grateful to me. 

Gott ist seinen Kindern gnadig—God is gracious to his children. 

Das Kind ist seinem Vater ahnlich—The child is like his father. 

Das ist mir ganz gleich (einerlei)—That is all the same to me. 

Diese Freundin is mir sehr lieb (poetic teuer)—This friend is 
dear to me. 

CXV. Some very common impersonal and other expressions require 
the dative: 

Wie geht es Ihnen?—How are you? 

Es tut mir leid—I am sorry. Das tut mir leid—I am sorry about 
that. 

Es tut mir weh—It hurts me. 

LESESTUCK 

Sagen Sie mir, was ich Sie gefragt habe. Nehmen Sie mir 
meinen Hut nicht: ich muss gleich fort. Ich werde Ihnen einen 
guten Rat (piece of advice) geben. Wollen Sie mir mein Buch 
reichen? Wer lehrt Sie Englisch? Ich habe Ihnen nicht geant- 
wortet denn ich kann die Frage nicht beantworten. Wir sind 
ihrem Bruder auf der Strasse begegnet. Danken Sie mir nicht: 
ich habe ja nichts getan. Mephistopheles sagte, dass Faust 
seinem Gott auf besondere Weise (in a curious wise, i. e. way) 
diente. Erlauben Sie mir, Ihnen zu helfen. Was fehlt Ihnen? 
Alles fehlt mir. Ich bin Ihrem Vater lange gefolgt ohne ihn zu 
erkennen (recognize). Glauben Sie ihr oder ihm? Raten Sie mir, 
was ich tun sollte. Man darf ihr nicht schmeicheln: es gefallt 
ihr nicht und sie traut keinem, der ihr schmeichelt. Wollen 
Sie Ihren Eltern trotzen ? 


Inflection of Adjectives 


71 


UBUNGEN 

1. Ubersetzen (translate) Sie das Lesestiick ins Englisch und 
dann wieder ins Deutsch ohne den Text anzusehen. 

2. Schreiben Sie auf Deutsch: I am very grateful to you. My 
brother's children are very dear to me. Is it all the same to you or do 
you prefer to stay at home today? Whom is the child like—his father 
or his mother? He is really like both parents. How are you? My head 
hurts me. I am sorry. I hope you will soon (bald) be better. How do 
you like Goucher College? (i.e. How does G. C. please you?) What is 
the matter? My arm hurts me. 

DREIUNDDREISSIGSTE AUFGABE 

CXVI. The adjective, when it stands before a noun or a noun 
understood, must, be inflected (cf. II. 3). Now that we have learned 
the characteristic endings of the different genders and of the plural in 
the various cases we shall see that there is but little more to learn 
about the inflection of adjectives. Moreover we have for some time 
been using inflected forms of adjectives where the inflection of the 
adjective was the same as the inflection of the word preceding it. 
In one case we have even used an inflected adjective where the ending 
was not the same as the inflection preceding it. We have written 
der andere Fuss, das andere Buch, die andere Halfte. 

1. When the adjective is preceded by one of the words in the 
groups LXX and LXXI and the FORM PRECEDING THE 
ADJECTIVE HAS A CHARACTERISTIC ENDING, the adjective 
ends in a nondescript -e or -en, clearness being already satisfied by 
the characteristic ending preceding it. The paradigm is as follows: 



mas. 

neut. 

fern. 

plu. 

N. 

(-er) —e 

(-es) —e 

(-e) —e 

(-e) —en 

A. 

(-en) —en 

(-es) —e 

(-e) —e 

(-e) —en 

G. 

(-es) —en 

(-es) —en 

(-er)—en 

(-er) —en 

D. 

(-em)—en 

(-em)—en 

(-er)—en 

(-en)—en 


Note that the ending -e appears throughout the nominative singular 
and in the two accusatives which are always like the nominative. 
Elsewhere the weak ending in -en. 

Observe where the weak ending is the same as the characteristic 
or strong ending. 

2. When the adjective is not preceded by a characteristic ending, 
the adjective itself must show the characteristic or strong ending, 
except in the masculine and neuter where the noun shows the case, 
as follows: 

mas. neut. fern. plu. 

N. gut—er gut—es gut—e gut—e 

A. gut—en gut—es gut—e gut—e 

G. gut—en Weines gut—en Wassers gut—er gut—er 

D. gut—em gut—em gut—er gut—en 


72 


Inflection of Adjectives, Cont. 


3. Successive adjectives are declined alike, i.e. a succession of 
adjectives are all either weak or all are strong in inflection: Ein guter, 
alter Mann; zwei junge, schone Damen. 

4. An adjective in the comparative or superlative degree must be 
inflected exactly like the simple adjective: ein alterer Mann, ein 
jiingeres Kind, die schonsten Blumen. 

CXVII. Adjectives are sometimes capitalized and used as nouns. 
They retain their adjectival inflection. There are even some cases 
where the only word for a given English noun in a German adjective 
so treated: 

deutsch—German, der Deutsche, ein Deutscher, die Deut- 
schen; 

verwandt—related, der Verwandte, ein Verwandter, die Ver- 
wandten; 

bekannt—acquainted, der Bekannte, ein Bekannter, die 
Bekannten; 

reisend—traveling, der Reisende, ein Reisender, die Reisenden. 

LESESTUCK 

Hungrige Wolfe folgten den Kindern aber ein starker Jager 
rettete die Kinder vor (from) den hungrigen Wolfen. Die dank- 
baren El tern dankten dem guten Jager weil er das Leben ihrer 
lieben Kinder gerettet hatte. Der kleine Knabe erzahlte seinem 
blinden Vater und seiner kranken Mutter von dem grossen, 
braunen Wolf, den der Jager geschossen hatte. Das kleine 
Madchen umarmte die lieben Eltern und kiisste sie. Den nach- 
sten Tag kamen alle Freunde, Verwandte und Bekannte um die 
geretteten Kinder zu sehen. Die Eltern reichten alien die Hand 
und setzten frisches, weisses Brot und einen grossen Schinken 
nebst (together with) einer hohen Flasche alten Weines auf den 
Tisch. Die Kinder tranken lieber gute, siisse Milch und sie 
assen auch die schonen reifen Kirschen, die ihnen der Onkel 
mitgebracht hatte. 

CXVIII. When in such expressions as “a bottle of wine” (cf. XIV), 
the second noun is modified by an adjective, the phrase must be put 
into the genitive, as in English: eine Flasche alten Weines. 

UBUNGEN 

1. Ubersetzen Sie das Lesestiick ins Englisch und wieder 
ins Deutsch, ohne den Text anzusehen. 

2. Ubersetzen Sie ins Deutsch: Two Germans were talking 
together. One said: “lama great traveller but none of my relatives like 
to travel (reisen), so that I seldom meet an old friend or even an 
acquaintance when I am travelling.” The other said: “I like to travel 
but I seldom do (travel), for I am the youngest child of my parents, 
who have dost their three elder sons and who like therefore to have me 
at home.” The first (erst) said: "I am not the eldest. I have an elder 
brother and three younger (ones), so that I can do what I please (i.e. 
what pleases me).” 

1. to lose—verlieren, verlor, verloren. 


Passive Voice 


73 


VIERUNDZWANZIGSTE AUFGABE 

CXIX. There is one verb which is active in German but must be 
translated passively into English. It is also unique in its vowel sequence: 
heissen, hiess, geheissen—to be called, to be named: 

Ich heisse Jane.—My name is Jane. 

Wie heissen Sie?—What is your name? (lit. HOW are you called?) 

CXX. Review LXIX. 

CXX I. Though German does not use the passive, as is sometimes 
said, less than English, for, as we shall see, it uses the passive in places 
where the English does not, it has, like the French (on) a very common 
way of avoiding the passive, WHEN THE AGENT IS NOT EX¬ 
PRESSED. Just as the French uses ON, a pronominal derivative of 
the noun HOMME, with the active to avoid a passive construction, 
so the German uses man, a pronominal derivative from the noun 
Mann: 

Das tut man nicht—That is not done. One does not do that. 

So etwas sieht man nur selten—One sees such a thing but seldom. 
Such a thing is seldom seen. 

CXXII. The real passive voice is formed in German, as in English, 
by the use of the perfect participle of the verb in the conjugation of 
the auxiliary verb. The difference between the two languages is that 
in English the auxiliary verb which one conjugates is the verb TO BE, 
in German the auxiliary verb which one conjugates is the verb werden 
—to become. 

Principal parts, active and passive of the verb sehen—to see: 

Infinitive Imperfect Perfect participle 

Active sehen sah gesehen 

Passive gesehen werden wurde—gesehen gesehen worden 

Synopsis of gesehen werden in the first person singular: 

Pres. Ich bin (von ihm) gesehen—I am being seen (by him). 

Imp. Ich wurde (von ihm) gesehen—I was (being) seen (by him). 

Future Ich werde—gesehen werden—I shall be seen—cf. XLVI. 

Perf. Ich bin—gesehen worden—I have been seen cf. LXXXIII. 2. 

Pluperf. Ich war—gesehen worden—I had been seen. 

Imp. Subj. Ich wiirde—gesehen—I should be seen. 

Pluperf. Suj. Ich ware—gesehen worden—I should have been 
seen. 

Note. To avoid the cacaphony of two ge-’s, one suppresses the 
ge- of geworden, making it worden. 

CXX 111. Since a passive construction is formed by making the 
direct object of the active into the subject of the passive, it would 
appear that no verb which is not transitive, i.e. which has no direct 


Footnote. We have seen that the PRESENT TENSE OF werden plus an 
INFINITIVE gave the FUTURE TENSE. Now we shall see that ANY PART 
OF werden plus a PERFECT PARTICIPLE gives the CORRESPONDING PAS¬ 
SIVE FORM of the verb whose participle is used. 



74 


Passive Voice, Cont. 


object, could be put into the passive. The English, however, shows a 
tendency to make even an indirect object the subject of a passive 
verb: I am told for It was told to me. Such a construction is impossible 
in German. But the German does use intransitive verbs, and correctly, 
in the passive, by making the passive verb IMPERSONAL and re¬ 
taining the dative as dative in the passive construction. 

1. Verbs taking two objects, one accusative, the other dative. 

Active: Er gab mir das Buch—He gave me the book. 

Passive: Das Buch wurde mir von ihm gegeben—The book was 
given to me by him. (Never: I was given the book!) 

Note the DATIVE REMAINS DATIVE in the passive. 

2. Accordingly verbs taking a sole object in the dative conserve 
the dative and have es (cf. CXXIV) as the subject: 

Active: Er folgte (begegnete) mir—He followed (met) me. 

Passive: Es wurde mir von ihm gefolgt (begegnet)—I was 
followed (met) by him; or more smoothly: 

Mir wurde von ihm gefolgt (begegnet). 

Note that unless this es stands FIRST, it is omitted altogether. 

3. Even such intransitive verbs as tanzen—to dance may be used 
in the passive in German, but the English translation requires a noun: 

Es wird getanzt—There is (or will be) DANCING* 

LESESTUCK 

Elisabeth sagte: “Er soli Johannes heissen.” Da sie aber 
keinen Verwandten hatte, der so hiess, wurde der Vater gefragt, 
wie der Knabe heissen sollte, und Zacharias schrieb: “Er heisst 
Johannes.” Und sogleich wurde sein Mund und seine Zunge 
aufgetan (loosened) und er redete. Selig sind die Friedfertigen 
(Blessed are the peaceful), denn sie werden Gottes Kinder 
heissen. Was man nicht tun kann, muss man lassen. Die drei 
grossten Namen in der deutschen Literatur des achtzehnten 
Jahrhunderts sind Lessing, Goethe und Schiller. Lessing 
wurde im Jahre siebzehn hundert neunundzwanzig, Goethe 
im Jahre siebzehn hundert neunundvierzig und Schiller im 
Jahre siebzehn hundert neunundfiinfzig geboren. Deutsch 
wird von den Deutschen gesprochen. Wird getanzt? Es wurde 
dem Kind nicht erlaubt, heute zu Hause zu bleiben. Dem Dieb 
wurde von dem Hund gefolgt. Ihm wird geholfen werden. 
Ihr ist sehr geschmeichelt worden. 

Ein Weib wenn sie gebiert, so hat sie Traurigkeit, denn ihre 
Stunde ist gekommen; wenn sie aber das Kind geboren hat, 
denkt sie nicht mehr an die Angst, um der Freude willen, dass 
der Mensch geboren ist. (a.u. Ev. Johannis). 


Thou and Ye 


75 


WORTSCHATZ 


der Friede(n)—peace, das Jahrhundert die Angst—anguish 

—century die Freude—joy 
friedfertig—peaceful, ready for peace. die Literatur— 


selig—blessed, 
so—thus 

sogleich—at once, immediately, 
auftun—to loose, open. 


literature 


die Stunde—hour 
die Traurigkeit— 


sorrow 



1. Beantworten Sie folgende Fragen: Was fragte man Elisa¬ 
beth? Was antwortete sie (indirekt). Was antwortete Zacharias? 
(indirekt). Was geschah, als Zacharias seine Antwort gesch- 
rieben hatte? Warum sind die Friedfertigen selig? Wer sind 
die drei grossten Namen in der deutschen Literatur des acht- 
zehnten Jahrhunderts? Wann wurde Lessing geboren? Goethe? 
Schiller? Von wem wird Deutsch gesprochen? Wem wurde 
nicht erlaubt, zu Hause zu bleiben? Wem wurde von dem Hund 
gefolgt? Wem wird geholfen werden? Wem ist geschmeichelt 
worden ? 

2. UBERSETZEN Sie ins Deutsch: Do you know what her name 
is? By whom was this book, which you are reading, written? We do 
not know when Shakespeare was born. I believe that Shakespeare's 
plays were written by him and not by Bacon; don't you? Will there 
be dancing? Were you helped? Yes, I was helped by my grandfather. 


FUNFUNDDREISSIGSTE AUFGABE 


CXXIV. Corresponding to the English pronouns thou and ye 
are the German pronouns du (cf. LVII) and ihr. The German pronouns 
are, however, still in common use, being always used in informal 
address, i.e. among members of a family, intimate friends, by Protes¬ 
tants in prayer, and to animals. In earlier days they were even more 
commonly used, so that classic literature abounds with these forms of 
address under circumstances where they would no longer be used. 

1. The verb agreeing with du as subject ends, like the English 
verb agreeing with thou in (e)st, du gehst,—thou goest, du redest— 
thou speakest except that to stems ending in -s, one adds only -t: du 

lasst, du liest. 

2. The verb agreeing with du as subject always has the same 
peculiarity of stem in the present indicative as the third person singular 
(cf. XXXVII. 1. 2. 3.) Examples: du fallst, du sprichst, du liest, 
du hast. 

a. Exceptions are: du bist—thou art and du wirst—thou.be- 
comest. 


76 


Thou and Ye, Cont. 


3. The imperative of a verb agreeing with du as (understood) 
subject ends in -e or has no ending: Komm or Komme—Come! 
Sei—Be! 

4. The imperative of verbs having du as (understood) subject 
shows the same vowel change of e to i or ie as the indicative but NOT 
the change of a to a. Sprich—Speak! Sieh—See! but Falle nicht! 

a. Exceptions: Werde—become! Wisse—know! 

5. The accusative of du is dich, dative dir, possessive adjective 
dein, declined like ein, kein, mein, etc. 

6. The accusative of ihr is euch, dative euch, possessive adjective 
euer, declined like mein, unser, etc. 

7. The verb agreeing with ihr as subject, or in the imperative with 
ihr as the understood subject always ends in (e)t and is always regular: 

Ihr geht—Ye go, Geht—Go! 

a. A single exception is: Ihr seid—Ye are. Seid—Be (ye)! 

8. Note that in these, true imperatives, the subject is, as in English, 
unexpressed, (cf. XXXIV. 7. Note). 

LESESTUCK 

Und ob ich schon wanderte im finstern Thai, fiirchte ich kein 
Ungliick; denn Du bist bei mir; dein Stecken und Stab trosten 
mich. Du bereitest vor mir einen Tisch gegen meine Feinde. 
Du salbest mein Haupt mit 01, und schenkest mir voll ein. 
(Der 23. Psalm, 4.5.) 

Herr, hore meine Stimme, wenn ich rufe; sei mir gnadig,und 
erhore mich! Verbirg dein Antlitz nicht vor mir, und verstosse 
nicht im Zorn deinen Knecht; denn du bist meine Hiillfe. Lass 
mich nicht, und thue nicht von mir die Hand ab, Gott, mein 
Heil. 

Herr, weise mir deinen Weg, und leite mich auf richtiger 
Bahn, um meiner Feinde willen. 

Gib mich nicht in den Willen meiner Feinde, denn es stehen 
falsche Zeugen wider mich, und thun mir Unrecht ohne Scheu. 
(Der 27. Psalm 7. 9. 11. 12.) 

Kinder, habt ihr nichts zu essen ? Werfet das Netz zur Rechten 
des Schiffes, so werdet ihr linden. **Bringet her von den Fischen, 
die ihr jetzt gefangen habt und kommt und haltet das Mahl. 

Und wo ich hingehe, das wisset ihr und den Weg wisset ihr 
auch. 

Wenn ihr mich kennetet, so kennetet ihr auch meinen Vater, 
und von nun an kennt ihr ihn und habt ihn gesehen. 

Das ist mein Gebot, dass ihr euch unter einander liebet, 
gleichwie ich euch liebe. (Aus dem Evangelium Johannis.) 


Unser taglich Brot gib uns heute. 

Und vergib uns unsere Schulden, wie wir unsern Schuldigern vergeben. Und fiihre uns nicht in 
Versuchung, sondern erlose uns von dem Ubel. Denn dein ist das Reich, und die Kraft und die 
Herrlichkeit in Ewigkeit. (Ein Teil des Vaterunsers aus dem Evangelium Matthai.) 


Vocabulary 


S3 

H 

< 

U 
c n 
H 

O 

£ 


Ph 

o 

>•> 0 £ 
’’3 -4-3 

p £ 

Ph Q) 


_ 9 

P 1 J 3 

in O 


»rH 

S 


43 G j-i 
9 —< be 0 
0 *rH in 

1^72 


0 


G 
9 

MS 

S *00 Ph G 0 

G 9 g o r 
pq wEcGczj 


G 

0 ) 

9 


0 

o 

► r-H 

O 

> 


G 

O 

• rH 

43 

9 


0 

43 


•OX) 

a 

I g 

I 0 S 
2 £S 
ja S £ 

o *n p 


00000000 

•^H »hH «^H »*H »¥H »fH »hH 

99999999 


0 

Ph 


43 

<D 3 

O 0 

SJ 

§ 

4-3 

G 

3 

o 


a 

gfrt O 

sills 

I V7* P 

as 3 

Am 

- 43 

| o 

!g G 


Ph 

a 

0) 

a 

o 

9 

00 

9 

• pH 

A3 


aS 


0 

9 

9 

4-3 

Ph 

O 


0 

o 


m 
in 9 

* r “S 

a c 

9 * •rH 


N 


'vvMl 


*9 _rj :p O 
.3 0 *0X u 


^G PlG^ 
fi 0 CS 0 3, 

< O S3 ffi Ss 

COC©COCOCCCOOO(»0503 

9999999999 

9999999999 


fl 


0 
• rH 

- k 

Ph O 

0 if 

4-3 G 

53 0 

IT 


"9 

O 

Ph 

•\ 

A2_ 
0 93 


o ’Ofl-S 

G *3 M 

I ^ ' 


co 


9 

0 

A3 

o 


in 

in 

0 _ 

9G 

43 4-3 

03 

Ph 

5 


0 

A3 

aS 

in 

_ 0 

GG 

a 

63 o 
$G 
A3 43 


Ph 

O 


h 2*5 
«jo 2 Ss 

DhC0</2<Z2|> 

Ph 5-1 Ph (h Ph Ph Ph 
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 
^3 ^3 ^3 ^3 


<u I 

ox r 
9 £ 
0 o 
S3 S3 


9 aS 

i a 

£ © 

o y 

G CO 

Gg 

•OX O 


43 

O 

0 

pH 

o 

o 


o 9 

S-o 

G 9G 
Gsh Ph 


1 

Ph 

G 

1 

0 

0 

43 

d 

/ So 

•hH 

0 

0 

CO 

CO 

G 

pT 

O 

• rH 

9 

+3 

rH 

0 

CO 

r-> 

«H-H 

Ph 

O 

Ph 

o 

43 

0 

> 



* 




G 

G 

0*" 

' ^ 

0 

> 


93 "G bX 

«fl o O 

_ Ph 

° :9 - 
4^3 h O 

H-H 


0 ^ 
Ah GO 

G 


0 


aS 

0 


hG 

o 

CO _ 

a ^ 

•S I 

^ 2 
93 b 

aS 

0 :3 

<D 

^ a 

9 g 

•s < 1 > 

0 Ph 
Ph 

OS O 

Ph T 3 
0 

Ph | 

Ph Cj 

I ° 
i 50 
G :0 

.G 0 
0 

0 


G 

0 

*o 

0 

•ox 

Ph 

0 

► 

* 

0 

X3 


9 

Ph 
Ph 

K*1 

(X» ^ 

4-3 


a 

o 

Ph 


0 


9 


G 

9 

& 

0* 


•ox 

•^H 


oS 


G 

G 


HB •* 

9 Ph 

' 03 

_j 0 

G a3 

3 I 

A i 

4-> G 
,Q 0 


Ph 
0 
•9 
V 9 

CO 05 

-A ^ 
9 O 

O 4-3 


9 


Ph 

:© 

hG 


f i ■ 

9 «G 
9 O 

^ 4-3 
02 
9 
0 


O 

4-3 


4-3 

G 
^0 
• rH 

m 

m 

9 

£ 


G ^ K 

S A3 
■ m 


0 

Ah 

43 


G ■§ 

0 .9 

•ox o 

Ph Ph 
0 

Ph 9 
0 

^ G 

0 

9 50 

G *0 

o £ 

G AT 

f *a 


Ph 
0 
> 
0 

£ 

o 

Ah 

•S 

G 
o 

• rH 

G 
G 

• rH 

G 
G 
G 

43 

9 
G 
9 

9 
G 
H 

o I g> 

v c 2 

Ph 9 

I 0 0 

g G3 P 

a a 

3 « 


o 

43 


Ph 

m 

9 

I—H 

o 

0 

G 

43 

0 

43 

o 

£ 


77 




78 


Present Subjunctive 


DERIVATION AND COMPOSITION 

Bahn: der Bahnbrecher—pathfinder, pioneer, der Bahnhof— 
railroad station, die Eisenbahn—railroad (lit. ironroad, cf. chemin 
de fer), die Strassenbahn—street car; mit der Bahn fahren—to 
go by car or train. 

Haupt: der Hauptmann—captain, die Hauptstadt—capital, 
die Hauptsache—the main issue or affair, das Hauptwort—noun. 
Haupt is used in poetical and all figurative uses, cf. French chef. 

Mahl: die Mahlzeit—mealtime, Gesegnete Mahlzeit—Blessed 
meal (to you)—the usual greeting on assembling for table or leaving 
table. 

Stimme verstimmt—(of pianos) out of tune, (of people)—out 
of sorts. 

Ungliick:—das Gluck—luck, fortune, happiness, gliicklich— 
fortunate, happy, gliicklicherweise—fortunately, ungliicklich— 
unfortunate, unhappy, unglucklicherweise—unfortunately. 

Unrecht: das Recht:,—right, justice, recht—right, Ich habe 
recht—I am right, Ich habe Unrecht—I am wrong, cf. J’ai raison, 
J’ai tort, die Rechte—the right hand. cf. CXVIII., richtig—correct, 

Versuchung: suchen—to seek, versuchen—to try, attempt, 
der Versuch—trial, attempt, die Versuchung—temptation. 

UBUNGEN 

1. Was bedeutet (What means): bereit? der Erloser? ewig? 
der Fiihrer? die zehn Gebote? die Salbe? schuldig? der Weg- 
weiser? willenlos? zornig? 

2. Lernen Sie auswendig (Learn by heart) die Citate (citation, 
quotations), aus den Psalmen und aus dem Vaterunser. 

3. Schreiben Sie auf Deutsch: Lord, in thee (auf dich) do I 
trust. Help me! Be to me a strong rock (der Fels) and a fortress, for 
thou art my rock and my fortress, for thou art my strength. Thou hast 
redeemed me, Lord, thou true God. Lord, be gracious to me; Lord, be 
my helper.** And the Lord called Samuel and he arose and went to 
Eli and spoke: See, here I am. You called me. Then Eli knew that the 
Lord was calling the child; and he said to him: Go (hingehen) and 
lie down (to) sleep; and if you are called again, say: Speak, Lord for 
thy servant heareth.** And Jesus took bread and broke it and said: 
Take, eat.* Stay here and watch (wachen) with me.* Arise! 

SECHUNDDREISSIGSTE AUFGABE 

CXXV. The present subjunctive resembles very closely the 
present indicative, being derived, like the present indicative, from the 
present infinitive. 

1. Unlike the present indicative, the present subjunctive never 
shows any of the stem irregularities seen in sections XXXVII and 
XLI, nor even those seen in section XLIII. 

2. The third person singular of the present subjunctive ends in -e, 
like the first person. 


The Present Subjunctive 


79 


3. The du and ihr forms always have—est and -et. 

4. The verb sein—to be has no ending in the first and third person 
singular. 


PARADIGMS: THE PRESENT SUBJUNCTIVE 
CXXVI. 


ich lerne wir lernen 

du lernest ihr lernet 

(Sie lernen) 

er lerne sie lernen 

ich esse wir essen 

du essest ihr esset 

(Sie essen) 

er esse sie essen 


ich habe wir haben 

du habest ihr habet 

(Sie haben) 

er habe sie haben 

ich sei wir seien 

du seiest ihr seiet 

(Sie seien) 

er sei sie seien 


ich konne wir konnen 

du konnest ihr konnet 

(Sie konnen) 

er konne sie konnen 


ich werde wir werden 
du werdest ihr werdet 
(Sie werden) 

er werde sie werden 


Lernen shows a perfectly regular verb with the subjunctive endings, 
as described in CXXVI. 2. 3. 

Essen represents the verbs which show a vowel change in the second 
and third person singular of the present indicative, but not in the 
subjunctive. 

Konnen represents the modal auxiliaries, which have an irregular 
singular in the present indicative, but in the subjunctive follow the 
vowel of the infinitive. 

Haben, sein and werden are given in full because of their great 
importance both as independent verbs and as auxiliaries, though only 
sein shows the slightest irregularity in the subjunctive. 


CXXVII. The future subjunctive, and the perfect subjunctive 
are formed exactly like the future and the perfect indicative, except 
that THE AUXILIARY is in the subjunctive. 


CXXVIII. The present, future and perfect subjunctive may 
never be used in unreal conditions. See sections LXXIX. and LXXXVI. 


CXXIX. The present, future and perfect subjunctive may always 
be used in indirect quotations when the present, future or perfect 
indicative respectively has been employed in the direct form. Because 
of the identity of indicative and subjunctive forms, it is often desirable 
to shift tenses as well as mood, as learned in sections LXXXI and 
LXXXIII. When, however, the governing verb is also in the present 
tense, imperative, future or perfect, one regularly employs the present, 
future or perfect of the subjuncitve in the indirect quotation: Er sagt, 
dass er nicht der Mann sei, der es getan habe. 

CXXX. The present subjunctive must be used as in English, to 
express future wishes: Lang lebe der President!—Long LIVE the 
President! (Not lives) Gott gebe—God grant! Gott bewahre—God 
forbid! (Not grants, not forbids). 


80 


The Subjunctive, Cont. 


CXXXI. The present subjunctive must be used in exhortations, 
where in English we say Let him (her, it, them): 

Wer Ohren hat, der hore—He who has ears to hear, let him hear. 

Es werde Licht—Let there be light! So sei es—So be it! 

Friede sei mit euch! Peace be with you. 

Euer Herz erschrecke nicht und fiirchte sich nicht—Let not 

your heart be troubled neither let it be afraid. 

LESESTUCK 

Unser Vater in dem Himmel. Dein Name werde geheiliget. 
Dein Reich komme. Dein Wille geschehe auf Erden, wie im 
Himmel. (a.d. Ev. Matthai) Und Gott sprach: Es werde eine 
Veste zwischen den Wassern; und die sei ein Unterschied 
zwischen den Wassern.* Und Gott nannte die Veste Himmel.* 
Und Gott sprach: Es sammle sich das Wasser unter dem Himmel 
an besondere Orter, dass man das Trockene sehe 1 .* Und Gott 
nannte das Trockene Erde und die Sammlung der Wasser 
nannte er Meer. Und Gott sah, dass es gut war. Und Gott 
sprach: Es lasse die Erde aufgehen Gras und Kraut* und 
fruchtbare Baume.* Und Gott sprach: Es werden Lichter an 
der Veste des Himmels, die da scheiden Tag und Nacht, und 
geben Zeichen, Zeiten, Tage und Jahre. Und seien Lichter an 
der Veste des Himmels, dass sie scheinen 2 auf Erden. Und Gott 
machte zwei grosse Lichter; ein gross 3 Licht, das den Tag 
regiere, 1 und ein klein 3 Licht, das die Nacht regiere, 1 dazu auch 
Sterne. Und Gott setzte sie an die Veste des Himmels, dass sie 
schienen 12 auf die Erde, und den Tag und die Nacht regierten 1 
und schieden 1 Licht und Finsterniss. 

1. The subjunctive is used to express purpose, when the infinitive 
with um—zu cannot be used. 

2. Note that our modern rules for word-order were not so rigid 
when Luther translated the Bible into German in the sixteenth 
century. 

3. Similarly the rules for inflection were in the sixteenth century 
not so inflexible as now. Recall: Unser taglich Brot. 

WORTSCHATZ 

der Himmel— heaven das Zeichen— token, sign die Finsterniss— darkness 

der Ort—place die Sammlung—collection 

plu: die orter die Veste— firmament 

der Unterschied— difference 
besonder— special 
trocken— dry 
geheiligt— hallowed 
sich sammeln— to collect one’s self 
scheiden, II. 1—to part 


Exercises 


81 


UBUNGEN 

1. Lernen Sie auswendig den Anfang (beginning) des Vaterun- 
sers. 

2. Schreiben Sie auf Deutsch: A child is here, who says his 
father is sorry; he has not forgotten and will come immediately. Say 
that she is sorry; she has not forgotten and will come immediately. 
When they come they will say they are sorry, that they have not 
received the letter and so will not be able to stay. We have said that 
we are sorry, that we can, however, not stay. 


APPENDIX I. GERMAN NOUNS 


A. MASCULINE NOUNS 


1. Supplementary rules for gender, (cf. LXVI): 

a. Names of stones: der Diamant—diamond, der Rubin—ruby, 
der Sapphir—sapphire. Note that a pearl is not a stone: die Perle, 
cf. LXVI. 2. b. (1). 

b. Weather phenomena: der Regen, der Schnee, der Donner, 
der Blitz, der Hagel, but not das Wetter—weather. 


c. Three German rivers: der Rhein, der Main, der Neckar. 

d. Nouns ending in -ling, which has a diminutive, sometimes an 
endearing force: der Baumling—sapling. Compare English duckling, 
gosling, darling, dumpling, stripling. 

e. Nouns ending in -ich and -ig: der Teppich—carpet, der 
Kafig —cage. 

2. Declension. 


a. Reg. poly. b. Reg. mono. 


Singular 


N. 

Onkel 

Stuhl 

A. 

Onkel 

Stuhl 

G. 

Onkels 

Stuhles 

D. 

Onkel 

Stuhl 


Plural 


N. 

Onkel 

Stiihle 

A. 

Onkel 

Stiihle 

G. 

Onkel 

Stiihle 

D. 

Onkeln 

Stiihlen 


c. Irreg. I. d. Irreg. II 


Singular 


Name 

Neffe 

Namen 

Neffen 

Namens 

Neffen- 

Namen 

Neffen 

Plural 


Namen 

Neffen 

Namen 

Neffen 

Namen 

Neffen 

Namen 

Neffen 


Note 1. Masculine nouns, except group Irreg. II, show 
the genitive singular. Like Neffe are: 


-(e)s in 


t ^ titles of men and names of large animals ending in -e: 
der Knabe,—the boy, der Lowe—the lion. 

(2) The following, which do not end in -e: der Bar—bear, der 
Elephant—elephant, der Fiirst—prince (of a principality), der 
Graf—count, der Held—hero, der Herr—lord, master, der Mensch 
—human being, der Mohr—Moor, der Narr—fool, der Ochs—ox 
der Tor—a fool. 


Masculine Nouns 


83 


(3) Many foreign words accented on the last syllable: der Demo- 
krat—Democrat, der Komet—comet, der Konsonant—consonant, 
der Philosoph—philosopher, der Prinz—prince (son of a king), 
der Photograph—photographer, der Soldat—soldier, der Student 
—student, etc. 

Note 2. Group Irregular I. is irregular only in that there is no n in 
the nominative case singular. All other forms are regular. Like Name 
are: der Buchstabe—letter of the alphabet, der Friede—peace, 
der Funke—spark, der Gedanke—thought, der Glaube—belief, 
der Wille—will. 

Note 3. Masculine polysyllables regularly have the plural like 
the singular. Compare English sheep, sheep; canon, canon. 

Note 4. Masculine monosyllables regularly form their plural by 
adding -e and modifying the vowel if possible, i.e. a, o, u, au. 

Note 5. All dative plurals end in - (e)n, which may or may not be an 
addition to the nominative plural, cf. Onkeln and Namen. 

3. Irregular Masculine plurals. 

a. A small, but important group of masculine polysyllables, modify 
the vowel to form the plural: der Vater, die Vater. 

Like der Vater, die Vater are: der Apfel—apple, der Boden— 
floor, der Bruder—brother, der Faden—thread, der Garten— 
garden, der Graben—ditch, der Hafen—harbor (haven), der Ham¬ 
mer—hammer, der Handel—quarrel, der Laden—shop, der Mangel 
—defect, der Mantel—cloak, der Nagel—nail, der Ofen—stove, 
der Sattel—saddle, der Schaden—harm, der Schnabel—bill (of a 
bird) der Schwager—brother-in-law, der Vogel—bird. 

b. A few common masculine polysyllables form their plural by 
adding -e: der Abend, die Abende. Like der Abend, die Abende are: 

(1) All nouns in -ich, -ig, and -ling: der Teppich, die Teppiche, 
der Kafig, die Kafige, der Baumling, die Baumlinge. 

(2) Some foreign words: der Charakter, die Charaktere, der 
Offizier, die Offiziere, etc. 

(3) And the following: der Monat, der Verlust—loss, der 
Versuch—attempt, etc. 

c. Some masculine monosyllables do not umlaut: der Arm, die 
Arme. Like der Arm, die Arme are: der Halm—blade of grass, 
der Huf—hoof, der Hund—dog, der Laut—sound, der Mond— 
moon, der Pfad—path, der Punkt—point, der Ruf—call, der Schuh 
—shoe, der Stoff—material, der Tag—day, der Thron—throne, etc. 

d. Some masculine monosyllables add -er and umlaut: der Mann, 
die Manner. 

Like der Mann, die Manner are: der Geist—ghost, spirit, der 
Gott—God, der Leib—body, der Ort—place, der Rand—edge, 
der Strauch—shrub, der Wald—forest (wold), der Wurm—worm. 
And the two polysyllables: der Reichtum—riches and der Irrtum 
—error. 


84 Neuter Nouns 

e. Some masculine nouns form their plural by adding -(e)n: der 
Dorn, die Dornen. 

Like der Dorn, die Dornen are: der Mann—vassal, der See— 
lake, der Staat—state, der Strahl—ray, beam, der Strauss— 
ostrich, der Zins—interest (on money), der Nerf—nerve, der Psalm—- 
psalm, and the polyllables: der Baier—Bavairan, der Bauer—peasant, 
der Lorbeer—laurel, der Nachbar—neighbor, der Stachel—sting, 
der Vetter—cousin, der Doktor, die Doktoren—doctor, and other 
foreign nouns in -or. 

B. NEUTER NOUNS 

1. Supplementary rules for gender, (cf. LXVI, XVII, XVIII.) 

a. Names of metals, Exceptions: der Stahl—steel and die Platina 
—platinum. 

b. Letters of the alphabet. 

c. Nouns ending in -turn. Exceptions: der Reich turn, der 
Irrtum (cf. App. I. 3. d.) 

2. Declension. 


Reg. poly. b. 

Reg. mono. 

c. Irreg. I. 


Singular 


Singular 

N. 

Zimmer 

Buch 

Herz— 

A. 

Zimmer 

Buch 

Herz— 

G. 

Zimmers 

Buches 

Herzens 

D. 

Zimmer 

Buch 

Herzen 


Plural 


Plural 

N. 

Zimmer 

Bucher 

Herzen 

A. 

Zimmer 

Bucher 

Herzen 

G. 

Zimmer 

Bucher 

Herzen 

D. 

Zimmern 

Biichern 

Herzen 


Note 1. Neuter nouns, like regular masculines, always show -(e)s 
in the genitive singular. 

Note 2. Herz is irregular only in having no -en in the nominative 
and accusative (neuter forms being always alike in the nominative and 
accusative). Herz is the only neuter noun having a defective nominative 
and accusative. 

Note 3. Neuter polysyllables, like masculine polysyllables and 
like English sheep, sheep, have the plural like the singular. 

Note 4. Neuter monosyllables, like masculine monosyllables, 
regularly modify the vowel if possible (a, o, u, au) but they add in 
addition -er. 

Note 5. All dative plurals end in -(e)n, which may or may not 
be an addition to the nominative plural, cf. Zimmern and Herzen. 

3. Irregular Neuter Plurals. 

a. A single neuter polysyllable modifies the vowel to form the 
plural: das Kloster, die Kloster. 


Feminine Nouns 


85 


b. All neuter polysyllables in -nis(s) and -sal and all neuter 
monosyllables ending in -r add -e without modifying the vowel to 
form the plural: das Jahr, die Jahre. 

Like das Jahr, die Jahre are also: das Band—band, fetter, das 
Beet—flower-bed, das Bein—leg, das Brot—loaf of bread, das 
Ding—thing, das Fest—festival, das Heft—notebook, das Knie— 
knee, das Land—land (in poetic sense and in, die Niederlande—the 
Netherlands), das Licht—candle, das Mai—time, das Netz—net, 
das Pferd—horse, das Pult—desk, das Recht—right, das Reich— 
domain, das Riff—reef, das Ross—steed, das Schaf—sheep, das 
Schiff—ship, das Schwein—pig, das Seil—rope, das Spiel—game, 
das Stuck—piece, das Werk—work, das Wort—remark, das Zelt— 
tent, das Ziel—aim, das Zweck—purpose, das Zeug—material. 

c. All neuter polysyllables ending in -turn add -er and umlaut 
the u of the -turn, exactly as if -turn were a monosyllable: das 
Konigtum, die Konigtiimer—kingdom, kingdoms. 

Like das Konigtum, die Konigtiimer are also: das Denkmal— 
monument, das Regiment—regiment, das Gemach—apartment, 
das Gemiit—feeling, das Geschlecht—sex, gender, das Gesicht— 
fact, das Gespenst—ghost, das Gewand—garment. 

d. A few neuter nouns add -(e)n to form the plural: das Bett, die 
Betten. 

Like das Bett, die Betten are: das Hemd—shirt, das Ohr—ear, 
das Auge—eye, das Ende—end, das Erbe—inheritance, and some 
foreign nouns such as das Interesse—interest, das Statut—statute, 
etc. 

G. FEMININE NOUNS 


1. Supplementary rules for gender, (cf. LXVI.) 

a. Names of German rivers. Exceptions cf. App. I. A. 1. b. 

b. Numerals and the words die Nummer, die Zahl, die Ziffer. 


c. Words ending in 

-anz, -enz, -ei, -ie, 

2. Declension, 
a. Reg. poly. 

b. Reg. mono. 

N. 

Singular 

Schwester 

Tiir 

A. 

Schwester 

Tiir 

G. 

Schwester 

Tiir 

D. 

Schwester 

Tur 

N. 

Plural 

Schwestern 

Tiiren 

A. 

Schwestern 

Tiiren 

G. 

Schwestern 

Tiiren 

D. 

Schwestern 

Tiiren 

Note 1. Feminine nouns are alike in all 


86 


Nouns With Two Genders 


Note 2. There are no irregularities in the singular of any feminine 
noun. 

Note 3. Feminine polysyllables form plural regularly by adding -n. 

Note 4. Feminine monosyllables form their plural regularly by 
adding -en. 

Note 5. All dative plurals end in -(e)n. All cases of the plural of 
regular feminine nouns are therefore alike. 

3. Irregular Feminine Plurals. 

a. The plural of die Mutter is die Mutter and of die Tochter 
is die Tochter. 

b. Feminine nouns in -nis(s) and -sal add -e to form the plural 
(cf. App. I. B. 3. b.). 

c. Some feminine monosyllables add -e and modify the vowel 
die Bank, die Banke —bench, benches. 

Like die Bank, die Banke are: die Braut— fiancee, die Brust— 
breast, die Faust— fist, die Frucht— fruit, die Gans— goose, die 
Gruft— vaulf, die Hand— hand, die Kluft— cleft, die Kraft— force, 
die Kuh— cow, die Kunst —art (from konnen), die Luft —air, 
die Lust— pleasure, die Macht— might, die Magd— maid, die 
Maus— mouse, die Nacht— night, die Nuss— nut, die Schnur—- 
string, die Stadt— city, die Wand— wall, die Wurst —sausage, 
die Zunft— guild and all words ending in the syllables —kunft 
(from kommen) and -statt (etymologically the same as Stadt, 
Eng. stead). 

D. NOUNS WITH TWO GENDERS 


der Band, die Bande—volume 
der Erbe, Irreg. II.—heir 
der Heide, Irreg. II.—heathen 
der Hut, die Hiite—hat 
der Kunde, Irreg. II—customer 
der Leiter, die Leiter—leader 
die Mark, die Marken—boundry 
also mark, a German coin 
der Marsch, die Marsche—march 
der Messer, die Messer—measurer; 
also meter 

der Moment, die Momente—instant 

der Reis, (no plural)—rice 
der Schild, die Schilde—shield 
der See, die Seen—lake 
die Steuer, die Steuer—tax 
der Stift, die Stifte—pencil 

der Tau, die Taue—dew 
der Tor, Irreg. II.—fool 
der Verdienst, die Verdienste—wages 
der Wurm, die Wurmer—worm 


das Band, die Bander—ribbon, fetter 
das Erbe, die Erben—inheritance 
die Heide, die Heiden—heath 
die Hut, die Huten—guard 
die Kunde, die Kunden—news 
die Leiter, die Leitern—ladder 
das Mark (no plu.)—marrow 

die Marsch, die Marschen—marsh 
das Messer, die Messer—knife 

das Moment, die Momente—crucial 
point 

das Reis, die Reiser—twig 
das Schild, die Schilder—sign-board 
die See, die Seen—sea 
das Steuer, die Steuer—helm 
das Stift, die Stifter—charitable foun¬ 
dation 

das Tau, die Taue—rope (cf. tow) 
das Tor, die Tore—gate 
das Verdienst, die Verdienste—merit 
das Wurm, die Wiirme—term of en¬ 
dearment for a baby 


Pronouns, Articles, Adjectives 87 

E. NOUNS WITH TWO PLURALS 

das Band, die Bander—ribbons; die Bande—fetters, 
die Bank, die Banken—banks (for money), die Banke—benches, 
das Ding, die Dinge—matters, die Dinger—things (in affection 
or contempt). 

das Gesicht, die Gesichter—faces, die Gesichte—visions, 
der Laden, die Laden—stores, die Laden—shutters, 
das Land, die Lander—country, die Lande, countries (poetic 
and in die Niederlande—Netherlands). 

das Licht, die Lichter—lights, die Lichte—candles, 
der Mann, die Manner—men, die Mannen—vassals, 
der Strauss, die Strausse—bouquets, die Straussen—ostriches, 
das Tuch, die Tiicher—cloths, die Tuche—kinds of cloth, 
das Wort, die Worter—words, die Worte—remarks. 

F. COMPOUND NOUNS, SEE LXII. 1 

APPENDIX II. GERMAN PRONOUNS, ARTICLES, 
ADJECTIVES 

In spite of the apparent multiplicity of forms for pronouns, articles 
and adjectives in German, each gender has but ONE CHARACTER¬ 
ISTIC ENDING for a given case and this ending appears on the 
pronoun, article and adjective, when the adjective is inflected “ strong.” 

Besides the characteristic ending, used when the adjective is not 
preceded by the characteristic ending, there is an uncharacteristic 
or “weak” ending, used when the adjective is preceded, as indicated 
(App. II. A. 5, B. 5, C. 5, D. 5) by a characteristic ending. Review 
CXVI. 

Observe that of the two groups of words (LXX and LXXI) which 
may precede an adjective or a series of adjectives (CXI. 3), the ein, 
kein—group differ from the der, dieser—group only in showing no 
endings in the nominative masculine singular and in the nominative 
and accusative neuter singular, as indicated (App. II.A.3,B.3). 

A. Masculine forms 


1 . 

Pronoun 

2. Def. Art 3. Indef. Art 4. Strong Adj. 

5. Weak Adj. 

N. 

er 

**der 

***kein— 

lieber Onkel 

—er liebe 

A. 

ihn 

den 

keinen 

lieben Onkel 

—en lieben 

G. 

* (seiner) 

des 

keines 

****lieben Onkels 

—es lieben 

D. 

ihm (Eng. him) 

dem 

keinem 

liebem Onkel 

—em lieben 



B. 

NEUTER FORMS 


N. 

es 

das 

***kein— 

helles Zimmer 

—es helle 

A. 

es 

das 

***kein— 

helles Zimmer 

—es helle 

G. * 

‘(seiner) 

des 

keines 

****hellen Zimmers 

—es hellen 

D. 

ihm 

dem 

keinem 

hellem Zimmer 

—em hellen 


88 



Adjectives, 

Cont. 





C. FEMININE 

FORMS 


N. 

sie 

die 

keine 

schone Rose 

—e schone 

A. 

sie 

die 

keine 

schone Rose 

—e schone 

G. 

*(ihrer) 

der 

keiner 

schoner Rose 

—er schonen 

D. 

ihr (Eng. her) 

der 

keiner 

schoner Rose 

—er schonen 




D. PLURAL FORMS 


N. 

sie 

die 

keine 

gute Kinder 

—e guten 

A. 

sie 

die 

keine 

gute Kinder 

—e guten 

G. 

♦(ihrer) 

der 

keiner 

guter Kinder 

—er guten 

D. 

ihnen 

den 

meinen 

guten Kindern 

—en guten 


* The genitive forms of the pronoun are rarely used. One says: My 
book, not: The book of me, so in German. 


1. They are, however, obviously the source of the possessive adjec¬ 
tives: sein—his, its and ihr—her, their, also Ihr—your. 

2. They were formerly much used with verbs: Was ist der Mensch, 
dass du seiner gedenkest, und des Menschen Kind, dass du 
dich seiner annimmst?—What is man, that thou art mindful of 
him or the son of man that thou visitest him? 

** Like der, das, die are dieser, jeder, jener, mancher, solcher, 
welcher. 

*** Like kein, kein, keine are ein (no plural), mein, unser, dein, 
euer, sein, sein, ihr, ihr, Ihr. 

**** Note that in the genitive singular of masculine and neuter 
adjectives, there is no -s, even though the adjective is not preceded 
by the characteristic -s. This is because the -s of the noun is sufficient 
to indicate the case and also because a succession of avoidable s's is 
unpleasant to the ear. 

E. SCHEME FOR REPRESENTING THE ENDINGS 

There are frequent repetitions of the characteristic ending for 
different cases of the same gender or for different genders in the same 
case, so that, although there are sixteen different cases, there are only 
six different forms. These may be represented schematically as follows: 


1. Strong endings: 


Mas. *C.t.b. Neut. 


Fern. *C.t.b. 

Plu. 

N. -er -es 


—e 


A. -en -es 


—e 


G. -es 


—er 


D. -em 

* Common to both. 

2. Weak endings (adjectives 

only): 

-er 

-en 

Mas. Neut. 

**C.t.a. 

Fern. 

Plu. 

N. -e -e 


-e 

-en 

A. -en -e 

G. 

-en 

-e 

-en 

D. 

** Common to all. 

-en 




Interrogative and Relative Pronouns 


89 


F. INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS AND PRONOMINAL 
ADJECTIVES 

1. Wer—who, interrogative pronoun, cf. CVIII. 

2. Was—what, interrogative pronoun, has only the nominative 
and accusative forms (alike). 

a. When governed by a preposition such as in, auf, unter, the 
interrogative is usually a compound of the syllable wo—(before a 
vowel usually wor—) and the preposition: Worin? Worauf ? Worun- 
ter? Womit? 

3. The interrogative pronominal adjective, English which and 
what, is welcher: Welcher? Which (man)? Welcher Mann? Which 
man? 

a. Was may obviously never be used in this way, even with neuter 
nouns. 

G. RELATIVE PRONOUNS AND PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES 

1. In English the relative pronoun WHO has the same forms as 
the interrogative but in German the use of wer as a relative is confined 
to the single case when WHO is equivalent to HE, WHO or WHO¬ 
EVER: Who steals my purse,—Wer meinen Geldbeutel stiehlt. 

2. Similarly was, as a relative, is confined to the following cases: 

a. Like wer, to express both the antecedent and the relative (cf. 
App. II. G. 1.) THAT, WHICH or WHATEVER: I cannot believe 
what (i.e. that which) he says—Ich kann nicht glauben, was er sagt. 

b. When the antecedent is the whole clause: Die Mutter wurde 
zornig, was ihm sehr unregecht schien—His mother grew angry, 
which (i.e. that she grew angry) seemed to him very unjust. 

c. When the antecedent is a neuter pronoun or an adjective used 
as a neuter noun: With all that she has, she remains nonetheless 
unsatisfied—Bei allem, was sie hat, bleibt sie doch unzufrieden. 
Das Gute, was man tut, lebt nach einem. 

3. In English, besides the relative who and what, we have the more 
general THAT, referring both to persons and to things. The usual 
relative in German is der, das, die (LVII. 1). For its forms see CVII. 
Note that it differs from the article only in the following expanded 
forms: G. Mas. & Neut. dessen, feminine and plural: deren, dative 
plural: denen. 

4. The relative pronoun in German, unlike English, may never be 
omitted. 

5. In English we have also the relative pronoun WHICH, German 
welch. Both are much less used than THAT and das, der, die. 
Welch has no genitive, so students are advised to confine themselves 
to the forms of der, das, die. Welch is, however, common enough in 
the classic and modern authors: Ich liebe den, welcher lebt, damit 
er erkenne—I love him who lives in order to know. (Nietzsche, 
Also sprach Zarathustra.) 


90 


Demonstrative Pronouns 


6. As the relative pronominal adjective welch must be used: 
He asked me how old I was, to WHICH QUESTION I replied— 

Er fragte mich, wie alt ich ware, auf welche Frage ich ant- 
wortete. 

7. When the relative refers to a thing and is governed by a prepo¬ 
sition, a compound of the syllable wo—(before vowels usually wor—) 
plus the preposition usually takes the place of the relative pronoun: 
In Weimar kann man noch das Haus besuchen, worin Goethe 
lebte und arbeitete—In Weimar one can visit the house in which 
Goethe lived and worked. Cf. interrogative pronouns, App. II. F. 2. a. 

8. When the relative pronoun has as its antecedent a noun or a 
pronoun in the first or second person, the nominative case of the personal 
pronoun must be repeated after the relative and the verb agrees with 
the personal pronoun: Jerusalem, die du to test die Propheten— 
Jerusalem, THOU, WHO killest the prophets. 

H. DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS AND PRONOMINAL 

ADJECTIVES 

I. In English the pronouns THIS and THAT point out, as by a 
gesture, the person or object referred to. Their cognates dies and 
der, das, die perform the same function in German. The forms of the 
demonstrative pronoun der, das, die are the same as those of the rela¬ 
tive der, das, die, cf. CVII. 

Note. A relative pronoun introduces a dependent clause, therefore, 
after der, das, die, as relative, the verb will stand last, cf. LVI. 1. 
After der, das, die, used as a demonstrative, the verb will stand second: 

Denn wer den Besten seiner Zeit genug 

Getan, der hat gelebt fur alle Zeiten. (Schiller, Wallenstein). 

2. For der, das, die as demonstrative adjectives, cf. XXVIII. 

8. When the demonstrative pronoun, referring to a thing, is 
governed by a preposition, a compound of the syllable da- (before 
vowels usually dar-) with the preposition is usually substituted for 
the demonstrative: Denke an mich—Think of me! Denke an 
dein Wort—Remember your promise! BUT Denke daran!—Think of 
it (your word)! Genug davon—Enough of that! Cf. App. II. F. 2. a 
and G. 7. 

4. English and German have each a less common demonstrative 
(pronoun and adjective) yon and jen. Jen is always used in German 
for THE FORMER with dieser for the LATTER. 

5. German has the compound demonstrative derjenige, dasje- 
nige, diejenige, plu. diejenigen, etc., which is often used as the 
antecedent of a relative: Diejenigen, die das sagen, liigen—Those 
who say that tell a falsehood. 

Note 1. Both components of derjenige are inflected according to 
rule. 

Note 2. In addition the pronoun derjenige, one finds a third 
series of possessive adjectives having the syllable -ig: der meinige, 
der deinige, der unsrige, der Ihrige, etc. for der meine, der 
deine, der unsere, der Ihre, etc., which in turn may be used for 
meiner, deiner, unserer, Ihrer, etc., cf. LXXI. a. 


Address 


91 


J. PERSONAL PRONOUNS OF THE FIRST AND SECOND 

PERSONS 


1 . 

First person 


2. Second person 

N. 

Singular 

Plural 

Singular 

Plural 

ich 

wir 

du 

ihr 

A. 

mich 

uns 

dich 

euch 

G. 

*meiner 

*unser 

*deiner 

*euer 

D. 

mir 

uns 

dir 

euch 


*meiner, etc., though rarely used themselves, are the source ob¬ 
viously of the possessive adjectives mein, unser, dein, euer. They 
are frequently used in the Bible with some verbs: Herr, wie lange 
willst meiner vergessen?—Lord, how long wilt thou forget (be 
forgetful of) me? Note also the word: das Vergissmeinnicht—forget- 
me-not. 

3. There being no true reflexive pronoun for the first and second 
persons, the personal forms, dative and accusative, are used reflexively 
and reciprocally: Ich schmeichle mir—I flatter myself. Wir lieben 
uns—We love each other. 

4. Forms of address. 

Formerly du was used in addressing all persons in the singular and 
ihr all persons in the plural. 

Later Ihr (ihr—ye capitalized) was used to address a person of 
elevated rank, then to an equal in formal address. 

Still later Sie, (sie—they capitalized) was used to address all persons, 
singular and plural, when speaking formally, du and ihr being re¬ 
served now for informal address, (cf. CXXIV). 

The third person singular is often used in the classics in direct 
address to inferiors or in ill humor: Sage Er, was Er will—Say, what 
you please. (Just, to the innkeeper, in Lessings Minna von Barn- 
helm). 

Note. Curiously enough the now common form of formal address 
Sie with a plural verb has given rise to the use of a third person singular 
of respect in which a singular title taking the place of Sie is used with a 
plural verb. For instance all shop-girls ask: Was wiinschen gnadiges 
Fraulein ?—What does (lit. do) (the) gracious young lady wish? 

K. REFLEXIVE AND RECIPROCAL PRONOUNS 

1. The only true reflexive pronoun for the singular and plural, 
dative and accusative of the third person, including Sie, used as 
second person singular and plural of formal address, is sich. (cf. 
XXXIV. 5). 

2. The true reflexive sich and the personal pronouns used as 
reflexives (App. II. J. 3) may be used in the plural as reciprocal pro¬ 
nouns: Wir lieben uns—We love each other. Sie lieben sich—They 
love each other. When clearness demands further qualification, one 
uses einander in addition to the reflexive pronoun: Kinder, liebt 
euch unter einander—Children, love one another. 


92 


Comparison 


3. The reflexive pronouns myself, etc. must not be confused with 
the intensive pronouns, myself, etc. In German the word selbst added 
to the personal pronoun serves as the intensive. Ich tat es selbst— 
I did it myself. 

Note. When selbst precedes the pronoun—or a noun—it means 
even: 

Selbst ein Kind weiss das.—Even a child knows that. 

L. THE INDEFINITE PRONOUN MAN (FRENCH ON) AND 
OTHER INDEFINITES 

1. Declension of man. 

Singular. (No plural). 

N. man 

A. einen 

G. eines z 

D. einem 

2. Other indefinite pronouns are: jemand—someone, niemand— 
nobody, alles—everything, alle—everyone, nichts—nothing, etwas— 
something, (as an adjective) etwas—some (singular), einige—some 
(plural), ander—other, beide—both, viel—much, viele—many, 
ein wenig—a little, ein paar— a few, ein bisschen—a bit, etc. 

M. COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES AND ADVERBS 

1. Comparison of adjectives, cf. VII and VII. 1. 

a. Even in their irregularities the comparison of German adjectives 
correspond often to the English: gut, besser, der (das, die) beste, 
nah, naher, der (das, die) nachste. 

But unlike English are the following irregularities: 

gross, grosser, der (das, die) grosste. (-t only is added, the stem 
ending in -ss); hoch, hoher, der (das, die) hochste. (c falls out 
before the -er of the comparative, as it does also in the positive before 
inflection: der hohe Baum). 

2. Adjectives in the comparative and superlative degree are 
inflected exactly as in the positive: Ein langerer Stock—a longer 
stick; der langere Stock—the longer stick; ein besserer Hut—a 
better hat. 

3. The uninflected adjective in the positive and comparative degrees 
serves as the adverb, there being only a few true adverbs in the German 
language: gern (or gerne)—gladly and lange—for a long time. 

4. In the superlative degree the adverb differs from the adjective 
in being made up of the preposition an plus the dative neuter singular 
of the article and the adjective: am -sten: Sie schreibt am schon- 
sten—She writes most beautifully (of all). 


Use of the Articles 


93 


a. The adverbial form is always used in German when in English 
we use the superlative without the article or the expression “at its (his, 
her) best”: Die Frau ist am schonsten, wenn sie verliebt ist— 
Woman is most beautiful (at her best), when in love. 

5. Besides the absolute superlative, used when actually comparing 
one manner or state with several others, there is a superlative made 
up of the preposition auf plus the neuter accusative of the article and 
adjective and denoting merely a very high degree in which no com¬ 
parison is implied: Die Dame war aufs schonste gekleidet—The 
lady was most beautifully gowned. 

N. USES OF THE ARTICLES AND NOTES ON ADJECTIVE 
INFLECTION 


1. Uses of the articles. 

a. The definite article is used in German, when not used in English 
in the following cases: 

(1) With generic and abstract nouns, cf. XIII. 

(2) With proper^ nouns when modified by an adjective and with 
names of feminine countries, cf. XVII, XVIII, XVIII. 1, and XIX. 

(3) With titles of relationship, and of dignity: Die Mutter sagt— 
Mother says: Der Herr Doktor sagt—Doctor says. 

(4) With names of meals, days, months (cf. XXII) and seasons: 
das Fruhstiick—breakfast, das Mittagsessen—lunch, das Aben- 
dessen—supper, der Montag—Monday, hence am Montag—on 
Monday, der Januar, hence im Januar—in January, der Friihling 
—spring, hence im Friihling—in spring. 

(5) With the words Kirche, Schule and Stadt: Ich gehe in die 
Kirche. 

(6) In place of the possessive with parts of the body and clothing, 
unless emphasis is laid upon the possession: Er fuhr mit der Hand in 
die Tasche—He ran his hand into his pocket. 

(7) In place of the indefinite article in a distributive sense cf. LX. 

b. The indefinite article is omitted in German, where it is used in 
English in the following places: 

(1) With a noun in the predicate giving merely the occupation or 
nationality of a person: Er ist Schweizer—He is a Swiss. Sein Vater 
war Advokat—His father was a lawyer. 

But if such nouns are modified, one uses the article: Sein Vater 
war ein ausgezeichneter Advokat—His father was an excellent 
lawyer, (cf. XVII, XVIII, XIX). 

(2) In the expressions A hundred and A thousand: Hundert 
(tausend) Menschen—A hundred (a thousand) people. But not in 
the expressions one hundred, one thousand: Ein hundert, ein tau¬ 
send. 


94 


Adjective Inflection 


(3) After als in the phrases: Sie arbeitet als Kochin—She. is 
working as a cook. (With this whole expression contrast: Ich arbeite 
wie ein Dienstmadchen—I am working like a servant). 

2. Notes on the inflection of adjectives. 

a. Adjectives alone in the predicate cf. II. 2. 

b. The adjectives ganz—whole and halb—half are uninflected 
when they stand before a noun but are not preceded by the article: 
Ganz Berlin, Halb Deutschland—All of Berlin, Half of Germany. 
But if the article precedes, they are inflected: Das ganze Berlin, etc. 
cf. XVII, XVIII. 

c. Uninflcted also are adjectives in -er made from proper nouns, 
usually names of cities. These adjectives are spelt with a capital and 
are indeclinable: Die Berliner Strassen—Berlin streets, Der Schwei- 
zer Kase—Swiss cheese. 

Learn this old saying and locate on a map the cities mentioned: 
Wenn ich hatte Venidiger Macht, Augsburger Pracht, Niirn- 
burger Witz, Strassbiirger Geschiitz, Ulmer Geld, so war’ ich 
Herr der Welt—If I had Venetian power, Augsburg splendor, Nurem- 
burg wit, Strassburg artillery, Ulm money, I should be master of the 
world. 

d. All other adjectives, of whatever degree, must be inflected weak 
or strong, (cf. App. II. A. B. C. D. E. and M. 2). 

e. Adjectives, spelt with a capital, but retaining their adjective 
inflection, are used as nouns, cf. CXVII. 

f. After a personal pronoun in the plural, the German uses the 
weak ending of the adjective: Wir Deutschen fiirchten Gott, 
sonst nichts auf der Welt—We Germans fear God, but nothing else 
in the world. (Bismarck). 

O. USES OF THE GASES 

1. The nominative case is used: 

a. To construe the subject of the verb: Der Mann liebt seine 
Frau. 

b. To construe the predicate nominative after sein and werden: 
Der Prinz wurde Konig—The prince became king. Dieser ist der 
Mann—This is the man. 

(1) After werden one may also use zu with the dative: Der Prinz 
wurde zum Konig. 

2. The accusative is used: 

a. To construe the direct object of a verb: Eine Frau liebt ihren 
Mann—A woman loves her husband. 

b. With some intransitive verbs, in which the noun in the accusative 
repeats the idea of the verb: Er starb einen gliicklichen Tod—He 
died a happy death. 


Use of the Cases 


95 


c. In an adverbial use, to express duration or extent of time, cf. L. 

d. Always after the list of prepositions given in LI. 

e. After the list of prepositions given in LII only when the possible 
question would be Wohin?—Whither? (Not Wo?—Where?) 

3. The genitive is used: 

a. To express possession: Das Haus meines Vaters—My father's 
house. 

b. In an adverbial use to express indefinite time, cf. XCV. 

c. In some phrases, showing a former much wider adverbial use of 
the genitive: Nicht meines Wissens—not to my knowledge; gebeug- 
ten Hauptes—with bent head; stehenden Fusses (Schiller)—by 
fast courier. Such genitives are always in the singular number. 

d. Always after the prepositions given in XCVI. and the following 
less common: ausserhalb—out side of, diesseits—this side of, (in) 
mitten—in the midst of, innerhalb—inside of, jenseits—on the 
other side of, beyond, kraft—by virtue of, langs—along by the side of, 
laut—according to, mittels—by means of, oberhalb—above in the 
same horizontal plane, um—willen—for the sake of, ungeachtet— 
notwithstanding, zufolge—in consequence of. 

(1) With halb and um—willen the personal pronoun changes 
its form from meiner (deiner, etc.) to meinet, deinet, etc.: um 
meinet willen—for my sake, deinethalb—on thy account. 

e. Formerly often with verbs cf. App. II. 1. 

4. The dative is used: 

a. To construe the indirect object of verbs taking two objects, 
cf. CXII. 

b. To construe the sole object of many intransitive verbs, cf.CXIII. 

c. Always after the prepositions given in CXI. and the following 
less common: binnen—within (time), entgegen—towards (post¬ 
positive), gegenuber—opposite, nebst—together with, samt—to¬ 
gether with. 

d. After the prepositions given CX, only when the possible question 
would be Wo?—Where, in what place? (Never Wohin?—Whither, 
to what place?) 

e. After many adjectives, the adjective being postpositive, cf. 
CXIV. 

f. Very frequently to express POSSESSION, especially with parts 
of the body or clothing, where the German regularly avoids the pos¬ 
sessive adjective: Er sah mir in die Augen—He looked into my eyes. 
Cf. App. II. N. 1. a. (6). 

APPENDIX III. GERMAN VERBS 

German verbs present the same types of (1) weak, (2) strong, (3) 
mixed and (4) irregular verbs as in English. The strong, mixed and 
irregular verbs must be learned by practice, but a verb that is strong, 
mixed or irregular in English is USUALLY the same in German and 
often presents the same vowel sequence or irregularity: 


96 


Verbs 


(1) love, loved, loved— lieben, liebte, geliebt. 

live, lived, lived— leben, lebte, gelebt. 

(2) sing, sang, sung— singen, sang, gesungen. 

drink, drank, drunk— trinken, trank, getrunken. 

lie, lay, lain— liegen, lag, gelegen. 

sit, sat, sat— sitzen, sass, gesessen. 

(3) bring, brought, brought— bringen, brachte, gebracht. 

think, thought, thought— denken, dachte, gedacht. 

(4) See paragraphs D. and E. below. 

The tenses, too, are formed as is English, the present and imperfect 
being simple tenses, the rest compound, unlike the tenses in Latin and 
Greek, where there are many more simple tenses formed by adding 
different sets of endings to various stems. 

Since, as in English, there are but two simple tenses, the present and 
the imperfect, and since the compound tenses are made up always of 
either of the present (cf. XLVI and LXXXII. 1 and LXXX. 1) of the 
auxiliary plus the infinitive or participle, or of the imperfect (cf. 
LXXXII. 2 and LXXXIII. 2) of the auxiliary plus a participle or an 
infinitive, it is evident, that, as in English, it is necessary only to learn 
the principal parts of the verbs and the present and imperfect tenses 
in order to be able to form all tenses. In German it is necessary to know 
the present and imperfect indicative and subjunctive. 

A. PRINCIPAL PARTS 

1. Weak verbs 2. Strong verbs 

lieben, liebte, geliebt singen, sang, gesungen. 

Note 1. All infinitives end in -(e)n. 

Note 2. The tense sign of the imperfect tense is for weak verbs 
-(e)te; liebte, for strong verbs a vowel change: sang. 

Note 3. The perfect participle begins with ge-, except: 

a. Verbs having an inseparable prefix, cf. XCVII. 2. 

b. Foreign verbs ending in and accented on the syllable -ier: 
regieren, regierte, regiert, marschieren, marschierte, mar- 
schiert. 

Note 4. The perfect participle of weak verbs ends in -t, of strong 
in -(e)n. 

3. Mixed verbs 4. Irregular verbs 

nennen, nannte, genannt sein, war, gewesen 

Note 1. Mixed verbs in their principal parts show the vowel change, 
characteristic of strong verbs and the imperfect tense sign -te and the 
-t of the participle characteristic of weak verbs. Like nennen in this 
respect are the verbs listed LXXIV. 1. a. and the following: brennen, 
brannte, gebrannt —to burn; rennen, rannte, gerannt —to run; 
senden, sandte, gesandt —to send; wenden, wandte, gewandt— 
to turn (Eng. wend). 


Verbs, Cont. 


97 


Note 2. Irregular verbs show in their principal parts some unique 
consonantal change. 

The commonest of the verbs irregular in their principal parts are 
given in Lesson Twenty-three under Groups IV and V. To them may 
be added the following: hauen, hieb, gehauen —to hew, strike; 
leiden, litt, gelitten —to suffer; schneiden, schnitt, geschnitten— 
to cut; sieden, sott, gesotten —to boil; ziehen, zog, gezogen —to 
move (intr.); to pull. 

B. PRESENT TENSES 


1. Regular weak or strong verb. 


a. Indicative 
Sing. Plu. 

ich singe wir singen 
du singst ihr singt 
Sie singen 

er singt sie singen 


b. Hort. and Imperative 
Sing. Plu. 

singen wir 
sing(e) singt 
singen Sie 


c. Subjunctive 
Sing. Plu. 

ich singe wir singen 

du singest ihr singet 

Sie singen 

er singe sie singen 


Note 1. In the indicative the first person singular ends in -e, the 
third in -t. 


Note 2. In the subjunctive both the first and the third person 
singular end in -e. 

Note 3. The first and third person plural and the second person of 
formal address, singular and plural, indicative and subjunctive, end 

in -en. 


Note 4. The second person singular of informal address ends, as in 
English, in -(e)st in the indicative and in -est in the subjunctive. 

Note 5. The second person plural of formal address ends in the 
indiciative in -(e)t, in the subjunctive in -et. 

Note 6. The hortatory of the first person plural differs from the 
indicative and subjunctive only in that the subject follows the verb, 
as in the poetical English form: Now tread we a measure, quoth young 
Lochinvar. 

Note 7. Similarly, the imperative of formal address differs from 
the indicative and subjunctive only in that the subject follows the 
verb, as it does when expressed in English: Get you gone! 

Note 8. The imperative of the second person singular ends in -(e). 

Note 9. The imperative of the second person plural ends in -(e)t, 
exactly as in the indicative. 

2. Strong verbs having a as the root vowel of the infinitive, 
a. Indicative b. Hort. and Imper. c. Subjunctive 

Sing. Plu. Sing. Plu. Sing. Plu. 

ich lasse wir lassen lassen wir ich lasse wir lassen 

*du lasst ihr lasst lass(e) lasst du lassest ihr lasset 

Sie lassen lassen Sie Sie lassen 

er lasst sie lassen er lasse sie lassen 

*Cf. CXXIV. 1. 


98 


Verbs, Cont. 


Note 1. The umlaut, which appears in the vowel in the second and 
third persons singular of the indicative, is confined to the indicative. 
It appears neither in the subjunctive nor in the imperative. 

Note 2. Besides the verbs having a in the infinitive the verbs 
laufen, lief, gelaufen—to run and stossen, stiess, gestossen— 
to push modify their root vowel in the second and third persons singular 
present indicative: du laufst, er lauft; du stosst, er stosst. 

Note 3. Verbs having a in the third person singular of the present 
indicative do not add the ending -t to a stem ending in -t. There are 
only these three: braten, briet, gebraten, er brat—to roast; halten, 
hielt, gehalten, er halt—to hold; raten, riet, geraten, er rat—to 
advise. 


3. Strong verbs described in XXXVII. 2. and XXXVII. 3. b. c. 


a. Indicative 
Sing. Plu. 

ich lese wir lesen 

*du liest ihr lest 

Sie lesen 

er liest sie lesen 

*Cf. CXXIV. 1. 


b. Hort. and Imper. 
Sing. Plu. 

lesen wir 
lies lest 

lesen Sie 


c. Subjunctive 
Sing. Plu. 

ich lese wir lesen 

du lesest ihr leset 

Sie lesen 

er lese sie lesen 


Note 1. Strong verbs which change e to i or ie in the second person 
singular of the present indicative, have the change also in the second 
person singular imperative, but not in the subjunctive, cf. CXXV and 
CXXVI. 


Note 2. Besides the verbs having e change to i, the verb erloschen, 
erlosch, erloschen—to extinguish changes its 6 to i in the second and 
third persons singular of the indicative and second person singular of 
the imperative: du erlischest, er erlischt, erlisch! 

4. The modal auxiliaries and wissen, cf. XL. 

a. Indicative b. Hort. and Imper. c. Subjunctive 

Sing. Plu. Sing. Plu. Sing. Plu. 

ich kann wir konnen * (wanting) ich konne wir konnen 

du kannst ihr konnt du konnest ihr konnet 

Sie konnen Sie konnen 

er kann sie konnen er konne sie konnen 

* The hortatory and imperative forms are wanting for all the modals 
except wollen. Wollen and wissen have a second person singular 
imperative showing the vowel of the infinitive: wolle and wisse. 
The plural and formal forms are, of course, regular. 

Note 1. The modals and wissen are irregular only in the singular 
of the present tense, where their forms look like, and historically are, 
past forms. Compare ich kann, du kannst, er kann with ich war, 
du warst, er war. 


Verbs, Cont. 


99 


5. Haben, cf. XLIII. 1 and CXXVI. 


a. Indicative 
Sing. Plu. 

ich habe wir haben 

du hast ihr habt 

Sie haben 

er hat sie haben 


b. Hort. & Imper. 
Sing. Plu. 

haben wir 
hab(e) habt 
haben Sie 


c. Subjunctive 
Sing. Plu. 

ich habe wir haben 

du habest ihr habt 

Sie haben 

er habe sie haben 


6. Sein, cf. XLIII. 2 and CXXVI., and CXXIV. 7. a. 

a. Indicative b. Hort. & Imper. c. Subjunctive 

Sing. . Plu. Sing. Plu. Sing. Plu. 

ich bin wir sind seien wir ich sei wir seien 

du bist ihr seid sei seid du seiest ihr seiet 

Sie sind seien Sie Sie seien 

er ist sie sind er sei sie seien 


7. Werden, cf. XLIII. 3 and CXXVI, and CXXIV. 4, a. 


a. Indicative 
Sing. Plu. 

ich werde wir werden 

du wirst ihr werdet 

Sie werden 

er wird sie werden 


b. Hortatory and Imper. 
Sing. Plu. 

werden wir 
werde werdet 
werden Sie 


c. Subjunctive 
Sing. Plu. 

ich werde wir werden 

du werdest ihr werdet 

Sie werden 

er werde sie werden 


C. IMPERFECT TENSES 


1. Weak verbs, 
a. Indicative 

ich liebte wir liebten 

du liebtest ihr liebtet 

Sie liebten 

er liebte sie liebten 


b. Subjunctive 
ich liebte wir liebten 

du liebtest ihr liebtet 

Sie liebten 

er liebte sie liebten 


Note 1. The first and third persons of the singular imperfect, indica¬ 
tive and subjunctive, have no ending, the -te being tense sign. 

Note 2. All the other persons have the same endings as in the 
present tense. 

Note 3. All forms of a weak verb in the imperfect tense are iden¬ 
tical with the corresponding form of the subjunctive. 


2. Strong verbs, 
a. Indicative 

ich ging (sah) wir gingen (sahen) 
du gingst (sahst) ihr gingt (saht) 
Sie gingen(sahen) 

er ging (sah) sie gingen (sahen) 


b. Subjunctive 

ich ginge (sahe) wir gingen (sahen) 
du gingest (sahest) ihr ginget (sahet) 
Sie gingen (sahen) 

er ginge (sahe) sie gingen (sahen) 


Note 1. Strong verbs in the imperfect indicative are inflected like 
weak verbs, cf. App. III. C. 1. Notes 1 & 2. 


100 


Modal Auxiliaries 


Note 2. The imperfect subjunctive of strong verbs has the ending 
-e in the first and third persons of the singular, otherwise the endings 
are the same as for the present subjunctive. 

Note 3. In the imperfect subjunctive of strong verbs the vowel is 
modified, if possible, i.e., a, o, u. 

3. Mixed verbs, cf. LXXIV. 1. a, LXXVIII. 3, and App. III. A. 3. 

Note 1. The mixed verbs given in App. III. A. 3 have the imperfect 
subjunctive like those in LXXVIII. 3. b. 

4. Haben, sein, werden, cf. Lesson Twenty-five Group V and 
LXXVIII. 4. 

5. Distinction between the meanings of the modals in the im¬ 
perfect indicative and in the imperfect subjunctive, where the English 
shows but one form in two functions or else has to use a periphrase. 
Review LXXIX. 

Als Kind konnte ich ganz gut reiten—As a child I COULD (WAS 
ABLE to) ride quite well. 

Ich konnte jetzt oder morgen mitgehen—I COULD (SHOULD 
BE able to) go with you now or tomorrow. 

Das musste ich schon gestern besorgen—I HAD to do that 

yesterday. 

Das musste ich gleich tun, wenn ich es fertig bringen sollte— 

I MUST (SHOULD HAVE to) do that at once, if were expected to 
finish it. 

Als Kind mochte ich viel tun, was mich jetzt nicht interes- 
siert—As a child I LIKED to do much that does not interest me now. 

Ich mochte wissen, wer es gesagt hat—I SHOULD LIKE to 
know who said it. 

Ich wollte gestern meine Freundin besuchen—I WANTED to 
visit my friend yesterday. 

Ich wollte es gerne, allein ich kann es jetzt nicht tun—I 

SHOULD LIKE to very much, but I cannot now. 

Ich durfte gestern nicht zur Schule gehen—Yesterday I 
COULD not (WAS not allowed to) go to school. 

Ich durfte aber jetzt und will nicht—I COULD (WOULD BE 
PERMITTED to) now and do not want to. 

Ich sollte gestern meine Nichte bei O’Niells treffen—Yester¬ 
day I WAS to meet my niece at O'NeiH’s. 

Ich sollte eigentlich gleich hingehen—I OUGHT really to go 

at once. 


TENSES HAVING ONE AUXILIARY IN THE PRESENT TENSE 


Verbs, Cont. 


d 

d 


g Z d 
02 0 ) 

^ ^ d ^ 

•h^3 « 


d 
d d 


d 

02 

3 

Vh 

02 

£ 


a> 

> 

* rH 

4-> 

o 


0) 

d YS 


CO 

02 


02 


£ 02 

43 a 
Z .83 


02 

3 

u 

02 

£ 

t* 

02 


43 

S-< 

02 

> 

02 

43 


02 


CO 


.£ a) 

- a 

d o 
<d o 
d £ 

• rH ,jQ 

<D r—. 

rd rrt 

■^43 

CO CO 

r5 HH 

a I 

d d 
02 <d 
3 3 
L *N 
02 02 

£ £ 


° 02 
8*2 
g « 
+> £ 

a43 

02 O 

co hh 

02 .. 


02 


O 


d 

3 ss 

S d 

I *00 

d | 

02 ,m 

dX! 


d 

03 

4-» 

02 

•OX) 


02 


s 


,§2 eg 

d*d 

02 
•fH 

CO 


.is fa « 


CO bo 


d 43 


42 CO 


d 

02 
42 
. 03 

dx3 

d 

s&ws 
02 
*oX) 

02 

42 

03 

43 

tH 
02 


03 


I 

42 

03' 


co 

02 

42 

03 


•83 


d p 
11 
if 


02 

*0D 


02 


d 

02 

B 

B 

O 

44 

02 

•OX) 


•OX) 

I I d I 

di 2 i 

.2.2 S S 

«i)d'S 

® « S » 

2 it 

& £ sl-a 


•ox) 


§ e 

g.2 


02 d 


as»| 


O 02 
44 «0 
02 

•Oi)^ 

in 

s « 
02 *5 
co 


O 02 g 

s 


SS 35 


c» 


43 a 

.83 


o 

44 

02 

•ox) 


02 

CO 

*H 

02 


><1 

l-H 

o 

XI 

3 

d 

3 


X 

X 

X 

hd 


X 

X 

X 

p3 

e+H 

02 

CO 

a» 

• pH 

3 


02 
02 CO 


02 

ffi 

d 

02 

-M 

02 

*-, 

d 

d 


3 

02 

• pH 

3 

d 


d 

3 


d 4_> 

02 a> 

*3 3 

02 02 3 Jn 


02 


02 

> 


U, u 

•p S , ~ 

>43 I »*h 
!> »*h jjj OD 

02 

*3 

Vh 

02 

£ 


d .32 

FI gS 

3 


02 

3 4-> 

t-i «5 

g -8 
* £ 
4d 3 
3 .83 


3 

u 

•*H 

£ 

l-l 

02 


43 

4-3 


d 
02 
3 
' u 
02 


® a 


p, 

3 
02 {£ 
3 ^ 
3 P 

S3 

02 ^ 
?2 02 
d ^ 

CO ■ +_) 

02 t«-4 

CO o 

d ^ 
02 d 

4-> 02 

02 * > 
S <12 

d - 

43 02 

^■s 

=s£ 

3 
d 
. d 
02 H 

o> 

X 


02 

CO 

d 

02 

44> 

-M 

02 

02 

«4-l 

J-H 

02 

PL, 


02 

> 

• pH 

44) 

C3 

02 

• pH 

3 

d 


d 

d d 

cS d 

^02 
| *0D 

C | 

02 4 I) 
42^ 
C3 c3 

43 43 

b u 
•^43 


d 

C3 

-M 

02 

•OC 


Ph ^33 


d 

p « 

S 43 

d c3 

4-) a 

02 43 

«fl 02 

I 

GO 


53 p 
3 d 

H 3 
02 H 
«» ® 

| CD 

02 I 

43 +* 

p 05 

S d 

^43 


d 

02 

43 

3 

43 

02 

C/5 


d 

3 

4-» 

02 

*0X1 


02 <N 


gf> p 

d 43 p 

• • r-< r \ ^ 

3 C/5 .p 3 


3 

43 

U. L* 

3 o 


02 

a 

a 

o 


H 

11 - 
^SidS) 

a^ I’d 
•S *g g d 

80 CO O’S 

u, ^44 
*>43 ®.2 

d d*3 

P P <tH P 

d d «3 02 

a a .s s 

o OCZ5 g 
O 


44 44 
02 02 
•ofi *ou 


CO 


43 a 

.83 


44 

02 

•OX) 


CO 

•p 

u 

02 


d 

3 

CO 

3 


02 

CO 

3 

d 

3 

d 

02 

3 

43 


02 

CO 

d 

02 

43 

44) 

*-« 

O 


02 

44) 

O 

X 


101 





102 


Verbs, Cont. 


P4 

ft 

as 

H 

O 

ft 

as 

H 

H 

Z 

ft 

ft 

ft 

Oh 

ft 

ffi 

H 


ft 


ft 


05H 

ft ^ 
eg 

hn £ 

Jh 

HN 

X 

ft 

<! 

O 

£ 

H 

O 

z 

HH 

> 

c 

as 

05 

ft 

05 

Z 

ft 

H 


4-3 P< 

gC 

d'S 

0 ) <£ 
ft g> 

*4-1 <2 

o O 


co 

45 g 

> g 

■+3 «+N 

45 

d 05 

^ 5 


02 


j>> 

'c 

O 


<u 

xfi 

d 

0 ) 


ft 


a 

a> 

73 

In ^ 
<D • 

>jrH 

Sq 


R 

d 

3 


d 

0 ) *N 

£ g 
a 9 

■a 5 

§ g 

-4_> 03 
45 ’ M 

•So °> 

| «i) 

d Jj 

a> o 

73 *p 

S s 

£ £ 

*N ^ 
•*N 2 

^ «1N 


d 

05 

ft 

03 

ft 

d 

03 

4-> 

a> 

•OX) 


53 £ 
4) 05 

.S’g 
g s 

d 41 
03 ft 
4 -» GO 

05 

•OX) 


d 

cd 

ft 


o 

4 ) 

« 4 -i 

S 

<D 

ft 

4 ) 

3 CD 
£ > 
d '-p 
^ c3 
4 ) 45 


03 ft 


d 

V 

73 

In 

CD 

£ 


ft C3.gft 
G *u« 


2g 

4) +4 
’OH 4) 
•OX) 

<D | 

*o 43 
In co 
4 ) In 

^•s 


d 

3 

43 

15 

•OX) 


*0 

u 

•fH 


5s 8 

H-I «+n 
In 

tn a 

R ® 

K ft 
ft ^ 

Ph *+4 

ft 0 

*£?■ 
4 ) 3 

ft ft 

JJ *i—I 

X! 
bC 2 
d 03 


41 


C/5 


2 ft 
d ^ 

"- 1 «4—I 
>> G 

gft 

°> 
„rHH 1 

C/5 H 

d £j 

05 > 7 ; 

£ft 

is 

*4-1 45 

^ 45 ft 

•y CO 

^•ox) -ox) g p, 
1 1 ^ I £42 
g S2 | 

73 > 

WiP 4 ) 

JS 

44 


d 

4> 

CO 

g 

a 

a 

o 

4 * 

<D 


<D 

CO 

d 

0 ) 

a 

a 


<D 

CO 

d 

a 

a 


a J< 

4> 4» 


•*H 

4 ) 

GO 


T 3 73 

S 
£ 


4 > 


£ b 


d 
v 

S 

S 

:d44 


4> 

•ox) 


* 0) 

45 CO 

.d C 

CO 45 
44 


CD 


4> 

CO 

d 

(D 


d 
4 

•*H ^ 


D 

CO 

d 

4 » 

d 


^ d 

Ih *2 
45 05 
>. CO 


I a 

44 O 

45 m 

•oX) 45 

•OX) 

05 | 
73 -M 
In CO 
45 In 


D 

05 


d 

05 

a 


-)4> ft 

o-d 

05 

•c-g 

S3 

ft p, 

50' 

dW 


4> 




|hh 

44 

D 


ft 


X 

I—I 

o 

X 


X 

X 

X 

ft 


X 

X 

X 

ft 


D 

CO 

In 

o 

d 

05 


CO 

05 

• H 

In 

0 $ 


X 

d 

c3 

co 

c3 

d 

•*H 

OJ 

00 

T3 

d 

03 

d 

05 

ft 

03 

ft 

«4N 

O 

05 

CO 

. d 

05 

ft 

44 

In 

O 

ft 


cy • w . 

•oX) r “* [a ft 

1 s> s - 


73 "o 
In >7 E -1 

• ■ri Z-J l__J 


ft 

05 

Z 

ft 

H 

H 

U 

ft 

ft 

ft 

ft 

ft 


ft 

ft 

H 


o ft 


ft 


X 

ft 

ft 

Z 

O 

o 

z 

I—I 

< 

ft 

05 

ft 

05 

Z 

ft 

H 


ft 


05 

4-3 

o 


d ^ 

d g 

yj C3 
45 -M 

•ox) ^ 

| *0X) 

d Jj 

05 45 


d 

03 

'M 

05 

•OX) 


d 

05 

+-> 

4-> 

:03 

ft 


S£g® 

ft ft S » 

^3 In 05 

•g ft , o< ) 

d 

05 

=|s 

3 -P 05 05 

^ 45 .23 •OX) 
0) 05 *0CO5 1 
> «oX) 1 


O I 

d 45 
d ^ 

•ds -M 
pd5 :c3 


(O 

05 


03 


dft ;d 

05 

ft 3 


05 

P-> 

:03 

ft 


In 

05 


a 

03 


45 

So ^ 

1 •OX) 


d 

03 

+-» 

05 

•00 


d 

05 


05 


2 C3 

^3ft 

In p, 

•*N 2 


d 

03 

05 

•OX) 


d 

05 

+-> 

•M 

03 

ft 


4> 
c n 
d 
45 

4-3 

43 

a 

05 

«+N 

In 

05 


d 

03 


_ 05 
45 •OX) 


d 

05 

+-> 

4-> 

03 

ft 

D 

05 


05 

CO 


P, CD •OX) 

d > I . 


^ a 
45 o 


05 


03 


c» 

05 


03 


H pft^ 


d 

03 

4-< 

05 

•OX) 

05 

+3 

43 

03 

ft 


d ^ 

1 | 

Sa 

o g 

iSft 


d 

05 

a 

a 

o 

ft 

05 

•OX) 


<H I <4* I 

05 "S s a 

In 2 05 


d ^ 

:03 ;3 


In 

•*H 


In 

d :c3 
0 £ 


u ft 
05 45 

d S d 
S g £ d 
g§:5j> 

a o & I 
0^.2 a 

45 •OX) 

•OX) 1 


X 

HH 

o 

X 


X 

X 

X 

ft 


05 

In 

:03 


co 
05 
In 

- -d 

ft 3 


d 

d 53 

B g 

a s 
§ a 

ft o 

^44 


X 

05 X 
•OX) ><| 

ft 

05 . 

In 

:03 

In 
05 


a 

CO 
0) 
• H 

In 

d 


d 

05 

g 

a 

o 


X! 

d 

03 

co 

<3 


•OX) 


gft 

05 p ° 7-1 

I ^S«0C d 
d a d 
^ o d 
b dft o 
S 2 d *h 
& «cg 
1 - K I S 

g.2 

d Ih 
p D 03 
05 d ^ d 

Sg.gd 

a s^ 5 « 


d 

05 

ft 

3 

ft 


05 

CO 

d 

05 

ft 


o ft 

ka 45 

45 •ox) 

•OX) | 

I -*-* 
i. t 
S « 


a 

o 

ft 

05 

•OX) 


U 

O 

ft 


05 


In ° 

« ^ 





Conditional Tenses 


103 


2. The conditional, the auxiliary in the IMPERFECT SUB¬ 
JUNCTIVE. 

ich wiirde—tun wir wiirden—tun 

du wiirdest—tun ihr wiirdet—tun 

Sie wiirden—tun 

er wiirde—tun sie wiirden—tun 

Note. The conditional is nothing but the future with the auxiliary 
shifted into the imperfect subjunctive. For its use cf. LXXX. 2. b. 
Note 1. and LXXXI. 2. b. Note. 


G. TENSES HAVING TWO AUXILIARIES, ONE IN THE IM¬ 
PERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE, THE OTHER THE INFINITIVE 

1. The perfect conditional, 
b. Subjunctive. 

ich wiirde—getan haben wir wiirden—getan haben 

du wiirdest—getan haben ihr wiirdet—getan haben 

Sie wiirden—getan haben 

er wiirde—getan haben sie wiirden—getan haben 

Or 

ich wiirde—gekommen sein wir wiirden—gekommen sein 
du wiirdest—gekommen sein ihr wiirdet—gekommen sein 
Sie wiirden—gekommen sein 

er wiirde—gekommen sein sie wiirden—gekommen sein 

Note 1. The conditional perfect is nothing but the future perfect 
with the auxiliary shifted into the imperfect subjunctive. Its use 
corresponds to its use in English. 

Note 2. For the use of haben and sein in the perfect infinitive cf. 
LXXXII, LXXX, and XCIX. 

H. COMPOUND TENSES OF THE MODAL AUXILIARIES 
WITH AND WITHOUT A DEPENDENT INFINITIVE 

1. Without a dependent infinitive (more frequent in German than 
in English). 

Ich habe es gekonnt—I was able (to do) it. 

Ich hatte es gemusst—I had had (to do) it. 

Ich habe es nicht gewollt—I did not want to. 

Ich hatte es nicht gedurft—I had not been allowed to. 

Ich habe es friiher gemocht—I used to like to. 

Ich hatte es nie gesollt—I had never been expected to. 

Note that the German must express the object es, where the English 
says TO, leaving the infinitive to be supplied. 

2. With a dependent infinitive. The modal participle now assumes 
the form of the modal infinitive: 


104 


Modal Auxiliaries 


Ich habe es tun konnen (not gekonnt!) 

Ich hatte es sagen mussen (not gemusst!) 

Ich habe es nicht lesen wollen (not gewollt!) 

Ich hatte nicht gehen diirfen (not gedurft!) 

Ich habe friiher reiten mogen (not gemocht!) 

Ich hatte nie hingehen sollen (not gesollt!) 

Like the modals in this respect are lassen and some other verbs, 
notably sehen and horen: 

Ich habe mein Buch auf dem Tisch liegen lassen (not gelassen). 

Ich habe den Herrn aus dem Hause kommen sehen (not 
gesehen). 

Ich habe die Dame singen horen (not gehort). 

J. USE OF TENSES 

1. In general the tenses are used in German as in English, even in 
using the present for the future cf. XLIV. 

2. For divergent uses cf. XLVII, XLV and LXXXVII, LXXXIV.2. 

3. The German likes to substitute the convenient imperfect sub¬ 
junctive for the conditional (or for sollte plus the infinitive), cf. 
LXXXII. 2.b and LXXXI. 2 b: Ich ginge for ich wiirde gehen. 

4. More especially it prefers the pluperfect subjunctive to the long 
and awkward perfect conditional cf. LXXXII. 2. Cf. Macbeth: "Had 
I died an hour before this chance, I had lived (would have lived) a 
blessed time.” 

Ich hatte es nicht gedacht—I should not have thought so. 

Ich ware nicht eingeschlafen—I should not have gone to sleep. 

a. This substitution of the pluperfect subjunctive for the perfect 
conditional becomes OBLIGATORY when the verb is a modal auxil¬ 
iary with a dependent infinitive: Ich hatte es nicht tun sollen— 
I ought not to have done it (but I did). 

Note that the irregularity of the English modals necessitates our 
putting the past idea into the infinitive (have done) instead of into 
the verb (ought, imperfect subjunctive, cf. LXXIX. 1). The irregularity 
here is purely in the English, cf. French j’aurais du y aller—I ought 
to have gone there (but I did not). Think through this difference in the 
two languages so that you will understand the difference to be due to 
the English irregularity and then learn by rote: Ich hatte es nicht 
tun konnen (mussen, mogen, diirfen, sollen, wollen), translating 
them for future use. 

5. The German has a present participle in -end, but its use is 
almost exclusively adjectival: Ein singender Vogel—a singing bird, 
Auf einem Steine sitzend—Sitting (Seated) on a stone. 

a. For the English present participle the German uses 

(1) When the participle is dependent on another verb, the infinitive: 

Ich hore sie singen—I hear her singing. 


Use of the Subjunctive 


105 


Exception: After the verb kommen, the German uses the perfect 
participle: Er kam gelaufen (gesprungen, geschwommen, etc.)— 
He came running (jumping, swimming, etc.). 

(2) After the prepositions (an)statt and ohne, the infinitive 
with zu: 

Ohne mich anzusehen—Without looking at me. 

(An)statt mich anzusehen—Instead of looking at me. 

(3) When the participle is equivalent to a temporal, causal or 
other clause, the German employs the clause: 

Da ich horte, dass Sie in der Stadt waren—Hearing you were in 
the city (causal); Als ich horte, dass Sie in der Stadt waren— 
Hearing that you were in the city (temporal); Indem sie aufsprang, 
sah sie ihn—Springing up, she saw him (concomitant actions). 

6. The German uses or omits zu with the infinitive almost as the 
English does, zu being omitted only with the modals, and with infini¬ 
tives dependent upon the following verbs: helfen, heissen (meaning 
to BID a person do a thing). 

Caution. When the English employs the synonym of a modal it 
uses TO with the infinitive: I am able to, I have to, I ought to, etc., 
but the German employs always the modal and therefore NO zu: 
Ich kann, ich muss, ich sollte, etc. 

7. To express purpose the German uses um and the infinitive 
with zu: Ich komme, um Sie zu besuchen—I come (in order) to 
visit you. 

a. If, however, the subject of the two clauses is different, one must 
use a clause introduced by damit followed by the subjunctive: Damit 
ich besser lernte, gab man mir Privatunterricht—In order that 
I should learn better, they gave me private instruction. 

K. USES OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE 

1. The subjunctive is used for non-fact (unreal and ideal) condi¬ 
tions, cf. LXXX. 1. b. 2. b. and LXXXVII. 2. 

2. The subjunctive is used for indirect quotations, cf. LXXXI. 
1. b. 2. b. and LXXXVIII. 2., including indirect commands with 
sollte, cf. LXXX. 2. b. Note 2, and CXXIX. 

3. The subjunctive is used in future wishes and in exhortations, 
cf. CXXX and CXXXI. 

4. The subjunctive is used in clauses of purpose, App. J. 7. 

5. The imperfect subjunctive is used in the polite softening of a 
statement: 

Das dachte ich nicht—I should not think so. 

Ich mochte wissen—I should like to know. 

Das konnte wahr sein—That might be true. 


106 


Impersonal and Reflexive Verbs 


So far these phrases correspond to the English practice, but the 
German goes somewhat farther: Nicht, dass ich wiisste—Not to 
my knowledge. 

Note. The subjunctive is less used in conversation than gram¬ 
matical rules demand and its use is governed more by feeling (Sprach- 
gefiihl) than by rule. In general, statements not asserted as facts 
(i. e., unreal and ideal conditions, wishes, indirect quotations, unac¬ 
complished purpose, and sometimes indefinite ideas cf. 5 above) are 
put into the subjunctive. 

L. IMPERSONAL, REFLEXIVE AND RECIPROCAL VERBS 

1. Impersonal verbs, cf. XXXIV. 4. 

To these add: 

(a) Es friert—It is cold. Es friert mich (or Mich friert)—I am 
chilly. Es taut—It is thawing. 

b. Time expression with auf: Ein Viertel auf vier—3: 15; drei 
Viertel auf vier—3: 45 cf. Halb vier—3: 30. 

c. The expressions: Es klopf t—Someone is knocking; Es klingelt— 
Someone is ringing; Es lautet—The bell is ringing. 

d. Various verbs corresponding to English usage: Es geschieht— 
It happens; Es scheint—It seems; Es fallt mir ein—It occurs to 
me; Es fallt mir auf—It strikes me; Es kommt darauf an—It 
depends; Es trug sich zu—It happened. 

e. Idiomatic phrases: Wie geht es Ihnen? How are you? Es tut 
mir leid—I am sorry; (but also personally: Er tut mir leid—I am 
sorry for him); Es gibt keinen Ausweg—There is no alternative; Es 
gibt allerlei Leute auf der Welt—There are all kinds of people in 
the world, cf. Lesson Fourteen Wortschatz; Es ist (wird) mir zu 
Mut(e)—I feel. cf. Heine: Oft wird es mir sogar zu Mute, als sei 
das Meer eigentlich meine Seele selbst—Often I feel as if the sea 
were really my soul itself. Es gelingt mir—I succeed; Jetzt gilt es! 
—Now is the time to show what you can do! Es gilt meinen Kopf— 
My head is at stake. 

Note. Gel ten, like tun and geben, is not always impersonal; Ein 
Prophet gilt nirgends weniger als in seinem Vaterland und in 
seinem Hause—A prophet is without honor in his own country and 
in his own house. Deutsches Geld gilt nicht in Amerika—German 
money is not usable in America. 

2. Reflexive and reciprocal verbs, cf. XXXVII. 5, CXXIV. 5, 6, 
App. II, J. 3. and K. 1. 2. 3. and Note. 

a. Verbs governing the dative take the dative when reflexive: Ich 
schmeichle mir—I flatter myself, cf. CXII. CXIII. 

b. A rather large number of verbs are always reflexive in German, 
though not so in English: sich befinden—to be, sich betragen—to 
behave, sich erinnern (an with the acc.)—to remember (erinnern— 


Separable Prefixes 


107 


to remind), sich irren—to be mistaken, sich schamen—to be 
ashamed, sich wundern—to be surprised (not to wonder: I wonder— 
ich mochte wissen), sich freuen—to be glad, sich einbilden (dat.)— 
to imagine, etc. 

c. Paradigm. 

Sing. Plu. 

ich irre mich wir irren uns 

du irrst dich ihr irrt euch 

Sie irren sich 

er irrt sich sie irren sich 

OR 

ich bilde mir ein wir bilden uns ein 

du bildest dir ein ihr bildet euch ein 
Sie bilden sich ein 

er bildet sich ein sie bilden sich ein. 

d. Idiomatic uses of the reflexive, the verb being impersonal. Es 
fragt sich—The question is. Es lohnt sich der Miihe (Notice the 
genitive der Miihe)—It is worth the trouble; and even with intran¬ 
sitive verbs: Hier wohnt es sich gut—Living is pleasant here. 

e. The reflexive is sometimes used as a substitute for the passive, 
when no ambiguity can possibly arise: Die Tiir off net sich—The 
door opens or is opened; Das Buch hat sich gefunden—The book 
has been found. 


M. VERBS WITH PREFIXES 

1. Prefixes always inseparable, cf. XCVII. 

a. To these may be added the prepositions hinter, voll and wider 
when used as prefixes: Er hinterging mich—He deceived me. Er 
vollbrachte ein Kunstwerk—He achieved a work of art. Er wider- 
stand mir—He opposed me. 

Note. Wider forms one separable compound: widerhallen—to 
echo. 

b. Also the prefix miss—in so far as it never stands alone, but the 
infinitive with zu may be written either zu missverstehen or miss- 
zuverstehen. Similarly irregular is the participle with miss-: The 
ge- is present (because miss-, like a separable prefix, receives the 
accent), but it may stand either before or after the miss-: miss- 
gebraucht or gemissbraucht. 

c. The general effect of the various inseparable prefixes. 

(1) be- makes an intransitive verb transitive: Ich habe lange 
gestanden—I have been standing a long time; Ich habe das Examen 
gut bestanden—I stood the examination well. 

Note. The be- of begegnen is etymologically bei-, hence the 
verb is intransitive and governs the dative. 


108 


Inseparable and Variable Prefixes 


(2) ent (emp-) denotes separation: Ich habe mein Buch genom- 
men—I took my book; Ich habe das Beispiel der Geschichte 
entnommen—I took the example from history. 

(3) er- (a) has the force of the English re-: Ich zahle von eins 
bis zehn—I count from one to ten; Ich erzahle die Geschichte— 
I recount the story. 

(b) Implies attainment either of the object expressed in the verb 
or of some object through the action of the verb: 

Das haben wir erzielt—We attained that (das Ziel—goal). 

Das haben wir erreicht—We attained that (reichen—to reach for) 

(4.) ge- impossible to define. 

(5.) ver- (a) English for-:vergessen—to forget; vergeben—to 
forgive. 

(b) pejoritive sense: fiihren—to lead; verffihren—to lead astray. 

(6.) zer- to pieces: brechen—to break; zerbrechen—to smash. 

2. Prefixes always separable, cf. XCVIII. 

a. The separable prefix wieder—again forms one inseparable verb: 
wiederholen—to repeat: Wiederholen Sie das, bitte—Please 
repeat that. 

Note. Compare the separable prefix wieder and its single excep¬ 
tion with the inseparable prefix wider and its single exception, M. 1. a. 
Wieder and wider are etymologically the same (cf. English again and 
against), hence the confusion. 

3. Prefixes that are sometimes separable, sometimes inseparable: 
durch, um, unter, fiber. 

a. When separable, they behave in every way like separable 
prefixes, cf. XCVIII: umgehen, ging—um, umgegangen—to go 
around. 

b. When inseparable, they behave in every way like inseparable 
prefixes, cf. XCVII.: umgehen, umging, umgangen—to evade. 

c. When separable, they usually fulfill one or more of the following 
conditions: (a) They are intransitive, (b) retain their literal meaning, 
(c) are translatable by an Anglo-Saxon word. 

Note. Unter and fiber frequently take the prefixes hin- and her-. 

Examples: Da die Strasse versperrt war, gingen wir um—As the 
street was closed, we went around. Die Badewanne lauft fiber—The 
bathtub is running over. Als der Fuchs an die Mauer kam, sprang 
er leicht hinfiber—When the fox came to the wall, he jumped lightly 
over. 

d. Conversely, when inseparable, they usually fulfill one or more 
of the following conditions: (a) they are transitive, (b) have a figurative 
meaning, (c) are best translated by a Latin derivative. 


Passive Voice 


109 


Examples: Das Automobil iiberfuhr das Kind—The automobile 
ran over the child. Der Feind iiberfiel das Heer—The enemy fell 
upon the army. 

Unterbrechen Sie mich nicht—Do not interrupt me! Sie unter- 
wirft sich seinem Willen—She submits to his will. 

Das iiberrascht mich sehr—That surprises me very much. 

Uberlegen Sie die Sache noch einige Tage—Consider the matter 
a few days more. 

Note. Verbs having one of these four prefixes should be learned 
on occasion. 

N. PASSIVE VOICE, CF CXIX, to CXXIII 

1. For the construction after lassen, cf. LXIX. 

Similarly, after the verbs sehen and horen the English employs a 
perfect participle, but the German employs an active infinitive: Ich 
habe das Lied singen horen—I have heard the song sung, cf. App. 
III. H. 2. 

a. Comparing the above with App. III. J. 5. a. (1), we find a 
possible ambiguity of translating the sentence: Wer hat seinen Vater 
taufen sehen—Who has seen his father baptize (others)? or Who has 
seen his father baptized? The context must decide. 

2. Do not confuse the real passive voice with the common con¬ 
struction consisting of the verb sein—to be plus a participle used as 
an adjective. 

Examples: Die Tiir ist geschlossen—The door is closed. Christ 
ist geboren—Christ is born. 

These sentences mean that the action has already taken place and 
the speaker is merely describing the result, vs. Die Tiir wird in diesem 
Augenblick geschlossen—The door is being closed this minute. 

Therefore, when in doubt as to whether a passive or sein should be 
used, turn the statement into the active. If the time remains the same: 
Somebody is closing the door—then use the passive. If the time 
changes: Someone has closed the door, (therefore it is now closed)!— 
then use the verb sein. 

APPENDIX. IV. WORD-ORDER 
A. POSITION OF THE VERB, cf. LIII, LIV, LV 

1. Independent word-order, cf. LIII, LIV. 

2. Dependent word-order, cf. LV. 

a. When the wenn—if of the condition is omitted, the verb of the 
clause stands in the place of the omitted wenn, i.e., first. Compare 
English: Were I you; Macbeth: “Had I died an hour before this 
chance,” for; If I were you; If I had died an hour before this chance. 
Examples: Wenn ich das gewusst hatte or Hatte ich das gewusst. 
Wenn ich dann gestorben ware or Ware ich dann gestorben. 


110 


Word-Order 


b. Similarly, when one element of a compound conjunction, such 
as als ob, is omitted, the inflected verb takes the place of the omitted 
element: Als ob das Meer meine Seele sei or, as Heine wrote it: 
Als sei das Meer eigentlich meine Seele selbst. 

c. When, in dependent clauses, a modal auxiliary is used in a per¬ 
fect tense with a dependent infinitive, the inflected verb precedes the 
two infinitives instead of standing last: Da ich das nicht hatte 
wissen konnen—Since I could not have known that. Weil ich es 
sonst hatte tun sollen—Because I should have had to do it otherwise. 

B. POSITION OF ADVERBS 

1. In general adverbs of time precede adverbs of manner and ad¬ 
verbs of manner precede adverbs of place: Ich bin gestern gliicklich 
nach Hause gekommen—I got home safely yesterday. 

2. For the position of nicht, cf. XXXVI. Do not forget, however, 
that NOT—A is kein. 


C. POSITION OF OBJECTS 

1. When there are two objects, both nouns, the indirect precedes, 
as in English when no TO is expressed with the indirect object: Ich 
habe dem Mann das Buch geliehen—I lent the man the book. 

2. When there are two objects, both personal pronouns, the direct 
precedes, as in English: Ich habe es ihm geliehen—I lent it to him. 

3. When, of two pronoun objects, one is a demonstrative, the per¬ 
sonal pronoun precedes the demonstrative, as in English when no 
TO—is expressed: Geben Sie mir das!—Give me that. 

4. When there are two objects, one of which is a noun, the other a 
pronoun, the pronoun precedes, as in English: Geben Sie es dem 
Mann—Give it to the man. Geben Sie ihm das Buch—Give him 
the book. 

Summary: If one avoids wherever possible (1 and 3) the use of TO 
with the indirect object in English, the order is always the same in 
German. 

5. For the position of the reflexive pronoun, cf. XXXV. 

D. POSITION OF SEPARABLE PREFIXES, cf. XCVIII. 2. 

APPENDIX V. NUMERALS 

1. The cardinal numbers. 

a. For the numerals from one—eins to twenty-zwanzig, cf. Lesson 
VIII. Wortschatz. 

b. From twenty to a hundred by tens: dreissig, vierzig, fiinfzig, 
sechzig, siebzig, achtzig, neunzig, hundert, cf. App. II. N. 1. 
b. (2). 

Note. Only dreissig, sechzig, seibzig present even a slight 
irregularity. 


Numerals and Idioms 


111 


c. From twenty to thirty, etc., the German counts like the Eng¬ 
lishman: one and twenty, two and twenty, etc.: einundzwanzig, 
zweiundzwanzig, etc., einunddreissig, etc. 

d. Cardinal numbers are not inflected. 

2. The ordinal numbers. 

a. To form the ordinal from the cardinal, one regularly adds -t to 
the cardinals below twenty and -st to those including and above 
twenty: zweit, viert, neunt, etc., zwanzigst, einundzwanzigst, 
dreissigst, etc. 

b. Irregular are as in English: first—erst, third—dritt, eighth— 
acht. Second—zweit is regular in German. 

Note. The ordinal stem is never found alone, the ordinal being 
always inflected. When used adverbially, the ordinals have the ending 
—ens: erstens, zweitens, etc. 

c. From the ordinals are derived fractions, of neuter gender, and 
ending in -tel (Teil, part) and -stel, cf. App. V. 2. a. 

APPENDIX VI VERBAL IDIOMS 

1. English HAVE. 

Ich habe ein Buch—I have a book. 

Ich muss es tun—I have to do it, cf. 2. Ex. 1. 

Ich brauche es nicht zu tun—I do not have to do it, cf., 2, Ex. 2. 

Ich lasse mir ein Kleid machen—I am having a dress made. 

2. English MUST. 

Ich muss es tun—I must do it, cf. 1. Ex. 2. 

Ich darf es nicht tun—I must not do it, cf. 1. Ex. 3. 

Sie werden wohl hungrig sein—You must be hungry, cf., XLVII. 
Similarly: 

Sie werden wohl hungrig gewesen sein—You must have been 
hungry. 

3. English KNOW. 

Ich weiss es—I know it. 

Er weiss zu schweigen—He knows how to be silent. 

Ich kenne ihn—I know him. 

Ich kann Deutsch—I know German. 

Ich mochte wissen—I should like to know, I wonder. 

4. English MAY. 

Ich mag gehen oder nicht—I may go or not. 

Ich darf gehen—I may (i.e. have permission to) go. 

Darf ich Sie nach Hause begleiten—May I see you home? 

5. English to BE, to be to, to be said to, to be about to, to claim to, 
to be probably, to be able, to be right, to be named. 


112 


Verbal Idioms, Cont. 


Ich bin die Lehrerin—I am the teacher. 

Ich soil Sie unterrichten—I am to teach you. 

Sie sollen alle kluge Madchen sein—You are said to be all bright 
girls. 

Ich wollte Sie fragen, als Sie mich unterbrachen—I was about 
to ask you when you interrupted me. 

Er wollte das nicht gelernt haben—He claimed not to have 
learned that. 

Er mochte zehn Jahre zahlen—He was probably ten years old. 

Wer kann es mir sagen?—Who is able to tell me? 

Wer hat recht?—Who is right? 

Wie heissen Sie?—What are you named? 

Numerous other verbs in German are translated by the verb TO BE 
and an adjective: sich fiirchten—to be afraid, wachen—to be awake, 
schweigen, II. 1.—to be silent, etc. 

6. English SHOULD. 

Ich sollte es tun—I should (i.e. ought to) do it. 

Er sagte, ich sollte es tun—He said I should do it (for me to do it), 
cf. LXXX. 2. b. Note 2. 

Wenn es regnen sollte—If it should rain, cf. LXXX. 2. b. Note 2. 

Ich wiirde es tun, wenn ich konnte—I should do it, if I could, 
cf. LXXX. 2. b. 


7. English WOULD. 

Er wiirde hingehen, wenn er diirfte—He would go, if he were 
allowed. 

Ich sagte, ich wiirde hingehen—I said I would go, cf. LXXXI. 
2. b. 

Sie sass (stand, etc.) jeden Tag am Fenster—She would sit 
(stand, etc.) every day at the window, cf. LXXXVI. 

8. English COULD. 

Ich wiirde hingehen, wenn ich konnte—I should go, if I could 

(were able). 

Ich wiirde hingehen, wenn ich diirfte—I should go, if I could 
(were permitted). 

9. English MIGHT. 

Das konnte wahr sein—That might be true. 

Note that mochte usually means SHOULD LIKE, cf. 3. Ex. 5. 

10. English HELP. 

Er hilft mir—He helps me. 

Ich konnte nicht umhin—I could not help (laughing, etc.) 

Ich kann nichts dafiir—I cannot help it. 

11. English GONE. 

Sie sind in die Stadt gegangen—They have gone to town. 

Er ist schon fort—He is already gone. 


Verbal Idioms, Cont. 


113 


12. English DONE. 

Wir haben es oft getan—We have often done it. 

Das ist jetzt fertig—That is done, i.e. finished. 

13. English NAME. 

Sein Name ist Heinrich—His name is Henry. 

Er heisst Heinrich—His name is Henry. 

Man nennt ihn Heinz—They call him Hal. 

14. English PUT, PLACE. 

Ich setze das Glas auf den Tisch. (to put—to set, causative of 
sitzen). 

Ich lege das Buch auf den Tisch (to put—to lay, causative of 

liegen). 

Ich stelle den Stuhl in die Ecke (to put—to stand, causative of 
stehen). 

Ich fahre mit der Hand in die Tasche (to put—to run). 

Ich stecke die Sachen in den Koffer (to put—to stick, to cram) 

Note. English PUT must be translated by a verb which describes 
the action performed. The German verbs putzen and platzen mean 
respectively TO BRUSH and TO BURST. 


I. IDolfcslieber. 


Sttlle IRacbt 


©tiffe 9£atfjt, betlige ! 2lffeS ftbliift, ehtfant matbt 

9tur ba§ traute bo<bbeilige $aar. £olber $nabe, mit lodtgem £aar, 

©djlaf itt biutntliftber fftub T , ©tblaf in bimmliftber fftub 1 . 

©tiffc SRatbt, bcilige £irten crft funbgematbt. 

$>urtb ber (£ngel ^affeluja, tiJnt eS taut bun fern unb nab: 

(Shrift ber IRettcr ift ba, Gbrift ber better ift ba! 

©tiffe 9tatbt, bcitige Sftatljt! ©otteS ©oljn, o mie lacbt 

£ieb r auS beinent giJttlitbcn UJtunb, ba unS ftbldgt bie rettenbe ©tunb\ 

Gbrift, in beiner ©eburt, Gbrift in beiner GJeburt! 


© tTannenbaum 


© Xattnenbautn, o £annenbaunt, mie trcn ftnb beine SBIatter! 

© Xamtenbaunt, ,o £annenbaunt, mie tren ftnb beine 231jitter! 

$u griinft nidjt nur sur ©ommeraeit, both autb im 2Binter, menn eS ftbtteit, 
© £annenbaunt, o £amtettbaunt, mie tren ftnb beine flatter! 

© Sanncnbaum, o £amtenbaunt, bn lannft ntir febr gefaffen; 

© Sannenbaunt, o Xamtenbaunt, bn fattnft ntir febr gefaffen; 

2Bie oft bat nidjt jur 2Beibnatbt§jeit f ein 23aunt oon bir mitb bodj erfreut, 
© Xannenbaum, o £annenbaunt, bu fannft ntir febr gefaffen; 

© Samtenbaunt, o Sannenbaunt, bcin Stleib miff ntitb maS lebren: 

© Samtcnbaunt, o Xannettbaunt, bein SHeib miff ntitb maS lebren: 

$>ie £offnung unb 23eftdnbigfeit, gibt £roft nnb 8raft an affcr Beit: 

© Samtenbaunt, o Xamtenbaunt, bein ®lcib miff ntitb maS lebren* 


II. (Sebtcbte von Ifoetne (1797-1856). 


frUbltnaslteb. 


Du bist wte eine tsiume. 


fieife aiebt burd) mein GJetniit 
fiieblidjes ©eldute. 

^Hinge, Heines ^riiblingSlieb, 
ftling, biitattS ins 2Beite. 


£>u bift mie eine 23lume, 

©o bolb unb fdjiht unb rein; 

3<b fdjau' bitb an, unb 2Bebntut 
©djleitbt mir in§ £era btnein. 


SHing bitmap bis an baS £auS, 
2Bo bie 23lunten ftmeften, 

2Benn bu eine fflofe fibauft, 

©ag, itb laf? fte griiften. 


ffttir iffS alS ob itb bte ^dttbe 


2lufS ^aubt bir legen fofft% 
23etenb, baft ©ott bitb crbalte 
©o rein unb fdjiht unb bolb. 


114 


115 


Ibirtenunabe. 

$ihtig tft ber £irtenfnabe, 

©rimer ^iigct tft fettt Sbron, 

Ueber fcittcm £anbt bie Sonne 
Sft bie ftbntere, golbne ®ron r . 

Sbnt su f5iif?cn liegen Stfjafe, 

SScitbc S^ntet^fer, rotbefrenjt; 
&aOaliere ftttb bte $iitber, 

Unb ftc toanbeln ftola gefbreijt. 

£offtbanfbieler fmb bte Efltflein; 
Unb bte $Sgcl nttb bte SHib', 

Sflit ben bitten, ntit ben ©IStflein, 
Stnb bte $antntermuftci. 

Unb bag tfttngt nnb ftngt fo Itcblidi, 
Unb fo lieblitb ranftbcn brein 
SBafferfalt nnb £annenbannte, 

Unb ber $bnig ftblmnntert ein. 

Unterbeffen ntuf? regieren 
$cr 9Jlinifter, fetter £unb, 

$effen fnnrrigcg ©ebelle 
SBiberballet in ber fflimb*. 

Stblafrig lalli ber jnnge ftihttg: 
„3>ag regieren tft fo fitter, 

2ltbr ifb toollt', ba# id) $n £aufe 
Stbon bei ntetner ^bn^tn mar’! 

„$n ben airmen ntetner ^iWgin 
JRubt ntein ®bntg§fjaubt fo meitb, 
Unb in ibren lieben 2lugen 
Siegt ntein mterntefUidj fHeitb’". 


Die Xorelet. 

$tb toeif? nic^t r toag foil eg bebeuten, 
$af? itb fo tranrig bin; 

Gin aWiirdjen ang alien Bcitcn, 

$ag fomntt mir nitbt ang bent Sinn. 

$ie Suft ift m% nnb eg bunfelt, 

Unb rnbig flieftt ber ^bcin; 

$er ©ibfcl beg 23ergeg funfelt 
Snt 2lbenbfonnenf(bein. 

$ie f(bonfte Jungfrau fti?et 
Sort oben munberbar, 

8b* golbncg ©efcbnteibe bliijct, 

Sie fiintntt ibr gotbeneg £aar. 

Sie farnntt eg ntit golbenent Slanttne, 
Unb ftngt ein fiicb babei; 

Sag bat cine nmnberfante 
©etoaltige Stflclobei* 

Sen Stbiffcr int fleinen Stbiffe 
Grgreift eg ntit nrilbcnt 2Beb; 

Gr ftbant nitbt bie ^ebfenriffe, 

Gr fdjant nnr binanf in bie £bb r * 

3cb glanbe, bie SBellen berftblingen 
2tm Gnbe Stbiffcr unb $abn; 

Unb bag bat ntit ibrent Singcn 
Sie Sorelei getan. 


116 


III. Das Bucb Ibiob. 

$ag 1. $aditel, 6—12. 

(£g begab ftdj abcr auf einem Sag, ba btc ®inber ©otteg fanten unb bor ben £errn 
traten, fam bcr Satan an# nntcr fanen. 

Ser £err aber farafa gu bem Satan: flBo fommft bn bcr? Satan antmortete bent 
£errn, nnb farad): 3d) babe bag fianb umber burfajogen. 

Ser £err farad) sunt Satan: £aft bn nid)t Slfat gebabt auf meinen Shtedjt &iob? Senn 
eg ift feineg gleidjen nifat im fiattbe, f(^lerf)t nnb redjt, gotte3fitrd)tig nnb rneibet bag 
2fafe. 

Satan antmortete bem £errn, unb farad): SCHeinft bn, bat £tob umfonft ©£)tt 
fiirdjtet? 

£aft $n bofa fan, fein £aug nnb afleS, mag er bat, ringg umber bermabret. $n baft 
bag 2Berf feiner £iinbe gefegnet, nnb fein ®nt bat fid) anggebreitet tm £anbe. 

2lber rede beine £anb ang, nnb tafte an alleg, mag er bat, mag gilfg, cr mirb bid) 
ing Slngeftfat fegnen? 

S>er £err farafa sum Satan: Siebe, allcg, mag er bat, fei in betner £attb; obne aflein 
an fan fclbft lege betne £anb nidjt. Sa gtng ber Satan ang bon bem £erro. 

******* ttnb ^tob ftarb alt nnb Sebeng fatt. 


IV. Hus (Soetbe’e “Ifauef'-JErster Hetf. 

IProloe tm Ibtmmel. 

diabbaet. 

•Sie Sonne tout nafa alter SBetfe 
$n Sriiberfabarcn SBettgefang, 

Unb fare borgeffarieb’ne Oteife 
$odenbet fie mit Somtergang. 

3br Slnblid gibt ben (Sngeln Stcirfe, 

SBemt feiner fte ergriinben mag; 

Sie unbegreiflidj boben SBcrfe 
Sinb berrlifa, mie am erften Sag. 

fabrics. 

Unb febned nnb nnbegreiflid) ffanede 
Srebt ftfa nmber bcr (Srbe Arafat; 

©g merbfelt ^arabiefegbede 
Wit tiefer, febanerboder 9ta<bt; 

Gg ffadnmt bag SJteer in breiten $Iitffen 
2lm tiefen Qknnb ber $etfen anf, 

Unb &elg nnb Sfteer mirb fortgeriffen 
3n emig fdjnedent Sbbarcnlauf. 

Sttidjael. 

Unb Stiirmc branfen nm bie 9Bette, 

$om 9Jteer anfg £anb, bom Sanb aufg SWeer, 

Unb bilben miitcnb eine $etie 
Ser tiefften SBirfung ringg nmber. 

Sa flammt ein blfacnbeg $crbeeren 
Sent ^Bfabe bor be£ Sonnerfdtfagg; 

Sod) beine Soten, £crr, berebren 
Sag fanfte 2Banbeln beineg Sagg. 

3n brei. 

Ser Slnblitf gibt ben Gmgeln Stcirfe, 

Sa feiner bid) ergriinben mag, 

Unb alle beine boben 2Berfe 
Sinb berrfieb, mie am erften Sag. 


9Jiebbtftobbele§* 


$er £err. 

9Hebbiftobbcle3. 

$cr £err. 
9ttedbift0bbefe3. 
$>er £err. 
9ftebbiftodbele3. 


$er £err. 


SJicdbiftodbele^. 

$cr £err. 

SfledbtftobbeteS. 


$o, bu o £err, bid) einmat toteber nob ? ft, 

Hub frogft, toie odes fid) bet ung befinbe, 

Uttb bu mid) fottft getoiibnlitb gerne fob’ft, 

So ftebft bu midi oud) unter bent ©efinbe. 

SBerjeit )\ id) tonn ttidjt bobe SBorte mod)en, 

Hub toenn mid) audj ber gonje ®rei§ oerbbbnt; 

9Jletn ^otbo§ briicbte bid) gemif? sunt fiodjen, 

£iitt T ft bu bir nidjt bo£ £od)en obgerodbnt. 

$on Sonn’ ttnb 2Belteit toeij? id) nic^t^ ju fogen, 

3dj febe nur, toic ftdj bie SEdenfdien biogen. 

$er Heine ©ott ber SBctt bteibt fteta bon gteidjem Sdjlog, 
Unb ift fo nmnberticb, ot§ brie ont erften Xog. 

©in toenig beffer rtmrb T er leben, 

£iitt T ft bu ibm nidjt ben Sdjein be§ £immeI3lidjt§ gegeben; 
©r nennt'S $ernunft unb broudjfg adein, 
i9?ur tierifdjer ol3 jebe§ £ier su fein. 

©r fd)cint mir, mit $ertoub bon ©w. ©noben, 

2Bie eine ber tongbeinigen ©itoben, 

$ie immer ftiegt unb ftiegcnb fbringt 
Unb gtcid) im ©m3 ibr o3te3 Siebdjen ftngt; 

Unb tng T er nur nod) immer in bent ©rofe! 

$n jeben Ciuorf bcgriibt er feine S^afe. 

£oft bu mir iueiter nid)t3 3 u fogen? 

^ommft bu nur immer onsuUogcn? 

3ft ouf ber ©rbe emig bir ttid)t3 redjt? 

Wein, £err! id) finb’ e3 bort, mie immer, berstid) fd)ted)t, 
$ie 9ttenfd)en bouem mid) in ibren 3ontmertogen, 

3d> mag fogar bie nrmen fetbft ni«bt btogen. 

®emtft bu ben $ouft? 

$>cn $oHor? 

Sfteinen ®ned)t! 

^iirnjobr! ©r bient ©mb auf befottbere SBeife. 

9ft<bt irbifeb ift be3 £orcn Xrnnf nod) Sbeife. 

3bn treibt bie ©cibrung in bie $erne; 

©r ift fub feiner Xodbeit balb benmfit: 

$om £immet forbert er bie fdjihtften Sterne, 

Unb oon ber ©rbe jebe bbd)fte Bttfi, 

Unb ode 9tdb T unb ode $erne 
S3efriebigt nidjt bie tiefbewegte S3ruft. 

SBenn er mir jet?t on# nur Dcrtuorren bient, 

So tt>erb r td) ibtt both in bie ®Iorbeit fiibren. 

9Bei# bod> ber ©iirtner, mtfnn bo§ Sauntjben griint, 

^of? S8Iilt r unb $rud>t bie tiittft f gcn ^obre sieren. 

SBo§ tnettet %f)T? ben fodt 3b* n0 # bertieren! 

SBenn ^br mir bie ©rtaubniS gebt, 

^bn meinc Strode fatbt su fiibren. 

So tang r er ouf ber ©rbe tebt, 

So tong fei bir’§ nid)t oerboten. 

©§ irrt ber Sftenfcb, fo tiong’ er ftrebt. 

2)o bonr id) ©u<^; benn mtt ben Xoten 


118 


£ab r id) midi mentals gent befamgen. 

meiften Ueb r id) mir bie boflcn, frifc^en aBangen* 
Siir einen Seidjnam bin id) nid)t $u £au§. 

$er £err. 

Stfun gut! c$ fci bir iiberlaffen! 

Bieb r biefeit ©eift t»on feittcm Urguefl ab, 

Unb fiibr* ibn, Eannft bu ibn erfaffen, 

2luf beittcm aBege mit berab, 

Unb fteb' befdjcimt, mean bu befennen muf?t: 

Gin guter Sflettfd) in fcinem bnnieln Grange 
$ft ftdj be§ redden aBegeS mold bettmfct. 

2WebbiftobbeteS. 

Sdjon gnt! nur banert e§ nid)t lange. 

Sttir ift fiir meinc aBette gar nidjt bange. 
aBenn id) jn ntcincm Bmetf gelange, 

Grtaubt 3b* mir Xriuntbb au§ bolter S3rnft. 

©tanb foil cr freffen nnb mit Suft, 

3Bie meinc 3JiuIjme, bie berubmte ©djtange* 

$cr £err. 

$u barfft and) ba nnr frei erfdjeinen; 

$dj bnbe betnc$gieidien nie gebafd. 

$on atten ©eiftern, bie berneinen, 

3ft mir ber <£d)att am menigften snr Baft. 

$eS 9)tcnfjben £atigteit tamt attjulctcbt erfddaffen, 

Gr liebt ftd) batb bie unbebingtc 9inb T ; 

$runt gcb f tdj gem ibm ben ©efetten an, 

$er reijt nnb mirEt, unb mitf*, al§ Teufel, fdjaffen. 
$)odj Ujr, bie edjten ©otterfflbne, 

Grfrent end) ber Iiebenbig reidjen 'Sdjflne! 

$>a§ aBerbenbe, ba§ emtg mirEt nnb lebt, 

Umfa# f end) mit ber Siebe botben ^djranEen, 

Unb ma3 in fcbmanEenber Grfdjeinung fdjmebt, 
23efeftigt mit bauernben ©ebaitEcn. 

9Webbiftobbele§. 

(altein) $on Beit su Beit feb r id) ben Stftcn gem, 

Unb biite midj, mit ibm $u bredjen. 

G§ ift gar b«bfd) bon einem grofjen £errn, 

©o menfdjlid) mit bem Teufel fetbft an fbredjen. 


******* ^ att f tf ^metier £eit fiinfter m 

Glerettct ift ba§ eble ©Neb 
$er ©eiftermett bom aSflfen: 
„aBer immer ftreben ft(b bcmiifjt, 
$en Eonnen mir ertflfen." 



119 


V. Hlso spracb Zaratbustra. 

Don ^rtebricfy Htei^fcfye. 

2U8 Baratbnftra in bie ttciifjfte ©tabt fam, bie an ben SBiitbcrn liegt, fanb er 
bafetbft biel $olf Oerfammelt auf bcm barite; benn eg mar oerbefaen morben, baf? man 
einen ©eiltdnser febcn fottc. Unb Baratbnftra faracb alfo jam $olf: 

Sdj lebre end) ben Uebermenfdjcn. $)er SPZenft^ ift etmag, bag iibermunben merben 
foil. SBag babt ibr getan, fan $n itberminben? 

2lde SBefen bigber fdjufen etmag iiber ftdj binang: nnb far modt bte (Sbbe biefer 
gro^en Slut fein nnb licber nod) sunt £iere suritdgebn, alg ben 9ttenfdjen itbermtnben? 

9Bag tft ber Stffe fiir ben SO^enfcben? (Sin ©eladjter ober cine ffamerslidje ©dfam. 
Unb ebenbag fod ber SJlenffa fiir ben Ucberntenfdjen fein: ein ©eladjter ober eine 
fdjnterslicbe ©djarn. 

8br babt ben 2Beg tmnt SBurnte sunt SWenfdjcn gcntafat, nnb uielleg ift in end) 
nodj 2Burm. (Sinft mart far 2lffen, nnb and) jeijt nod) ift ber SJienfdj ntebr 2Iffe alg 
irgenb ein Stffe. 

2Ber aber ber SBeifefte oon cufa ift, ber ift and) nur ein Bmiefaalt nnb Bmitter non 
$flanse nnb non ©cfacnft. Slber beiffa id) cudj su ©efaenftem ober ^ftansen merben? 

©el)t, idj lebre end) ben Ucberntenfdjen. 

$>er ttebermenfd) ift ber ©inn ber (Srbe. (Suer SBide fage: ber Ueberntenfdj fci 
ber ©inn ber ©rbe! ************ 

9tid)t enre ©iinbe — eure ©eniigfantfeit fdjreit gen £intntel, ener ©eis fetbft in 
enrer ©iinbe fdjreit gen ^imntel! 

SBo ift bod) ber $lfa, ber cud) ntit feiner Bunge letfe? 2Bo ift ber SBabnftmt, ntit 
bem far geinfaft merben ntiiffet? 

©ebt, icb lebre end) ben Uebermenfdjen: ber ift biefer SBlfa, ber ift biefer 
SBabnftnn! — 

2llg Barafauftra fo gefarod)en batte, ffarie (Siner ang bent $otfe: „2Bir bbrten 
nun genug non bent ©eiltanser; nun lafit nng ibn and) feben!" Unb adeg SSoIf lad)te 
iiber Barafauftra. $>er ©eiltanser aber, meldjer gianbtc, bafi bag SBort ibm gdlte, 
rnafate fifa an fein 2Berf. 

Barafauftra aber fabc bag $olf an unb munberte ftfa. Samt farad) er alfo: 

$er Sftenfd) ift ein ©eil, gefnifaft jmifcben £I)ier nnb Ucberntenfd), — ein ©eil 
iiber einent Slbgrnnbe. 

©in gefifarlid)eg £initber, ein gcfifarlidjeg 2luf=bcnt=2Bcge, ein gefcfarlifaeg 3uriid= 
blitfett, ein gefifarlidjeg ©(banbern nnb ©tebenbtcibcn. 

SBag grof? ift ant Sftenfdjen, bag ift, baf? er eine Srittfc nnb fein Bujctf ift: mag 
geliebt merben fann ant SJtenfdben, bag ift, ba§ er ein Uebergang nnb ein Untergang ift. 

3?cb liebe bie, mettbe nitbt su icben miffett, eg fei benn atg Untergebcnbe, beitn e§ 
finb bie ^innbergebenben. 

Srb Itebe bie groffan $Beracbtenbcn, meii ftc bie groffan $8erebrcnben ftnb nnb $feile 
ber ©ebnfn(bt nacb bent anberen Ufer. 

liebe bie, mcldje nitbt erft binter ben ©terncn einen ®rmtb futbcn, nntersu* 
geben nnb Dbfcr sn fein: fonbern bie fttb ber ^®rbe obfcm, ba^ bie @rbe einft beg Ueber= 
ntenf(ben merbe. 

liebe ben, melcber lebt, bamit er erfenne, nnb meldicr erfennen mid, barnit 
einft ber Ucbermenf(b lebe. Unb fo mid er feinen Untergang. 

^tb liebe ben, meltber arbeitet nnb erfinbet, ba# er bcm Ucbemtenfdjcn bag ^ang 
bane nnb su ibm Grbe, £l)ier nnb ^flange oorbereite: benn fo mid er feinen Untergang. 


120 


3cb Me ben, toetcber feme £ugenb Uebt: bettn £ngenb ift 923itte aunt Untergang 
ttttb eitt $feil ber ©ebnfudjt. 

3dj tiebe ben, welder utc^t einen Srobfcn ©eift fiir ftdj auriiefbebatt, fottbern gana 
ber ©eift feitter £ugenb fern wifi: fo fefireitet er alg ©eift iiber bie Sriicfe. 

3<b tiebe bett, met<f)er ang feiner £ugenb feinen £ang ttttb fern 23erbangnift madjt: 
fo tuitt er ttm feitter £ugenb toitten ttod) leben uttb rtiebt tttebr leben. 

3dj liebe bett, toclcber nid)t a« bide Xugenben babett toil!, (Sine Sugenb ift tttebr 
£ngenb alg ^toei, ttteil fte tttebr Shtoten ift, att bett ftd) bag $erbiingnift bdngt. 

$dj tiebe bett, beffett ©eele fid) berfcbtoenbet, ber nidjt $anf babett ntiff ttttb nid)t 
anriicftgibt: betttt er febentt itttttter uttb toil! ftcb itiibt betoabren. 

8<b Me ben, toelcber ftcb f<bdmt, menu ber SBiirfel an feinem ©liitf fiillt, uttb ber 
bann fragt: bin id) bentt ein fatfd) ©bider? — benn er mitt an ©runbe geben. 

3(b liebe beu, ttteldjer gotbene 2Borte feineu £atcn boraug mirft unb intnter nocb 
utebr baft, alg er berfbridjt: benn er mitt f eaten Untergang. 

3<b ticbe ben, toelcber bie Butiinftigen reebtfertigt nub bie 23ergangenen erliift: 
benn er mitt an ben ©egenhmrtigen a« ©runbe geben. 

3dj tiebe ben, toelcber feinen ©ott aiid)tigt, meit er feinen ©ott tiebt: benn er tmtft 
ant Borne feineg Oiotteg ju ©rmtbe geben. 

$cb tiebe ben, beffen ©eele tief ift and) in ber SScrtounbung nnb ber an einent 
flfleinen (Srlebniffe an ©ruttbe geben tann: fo gebt er gerne iiber bie SBriicfe. 

3dj ticBe ben, beffen ©ede iiberoott ift, fo baft er ftcb fdber bergiftt, nnb atte $inge 
in ibnt ftnb: fo toerbeit atte $>ittge fein Untergang. 

$dj liebe ben, ber freicn ©eifteg nnb freien £craeng ift: fo ift fein £obf ttnr bag 
(gingetoeibe feineg £eraeng, fein £era aber treibt ibn sum Untergang. 

$d) tiebe atte bie, tuelcbe toie fdjtocre Srobfen ftnb, cinaeltt fattenb ang ber bunften 
fBotte, bie iiber ben 2Jlenfcbett bdttgt: fte oertiinbigen, baft ber 23lit? tommt, nnb gebn 
a(g ^erfiinbiger an ©rmtbc. 

©ebt, icb bin ein SBerfiinbiger beg 23lifteg, nnb ein fdftocrer Xrobfen ang ber 
SBotte: biefer S3liij aber beif?t Uebermcnfd). — 


VOCABULARY 


A 

a, an—ein; not a—kein 

able (to be)—konnen, XX., LXXIV. 

above—oben 

according to—nach 

account (on—of)—wegen 

(on this—)—deswegen 
ache—Weh, das 
acquainted—bekannt, CXVIII 
active—tatig 
advise—Rat, der 
advise, to—raten, I. 1. 
affair—Sache, die 
affirm, to—bejahen 
after—nach (prep) 

nachdem (conj) 

afternoon—Nachmittag, der,—e 

again—wieder 

against—gegen, wider 

age—Alter, das 

air—Luft, die, -**e 

all—all, ganz 

(—right)—gut; schon. 

(—the same)—einerlei; gleich 
alleviate, to—mildern 
allow, to—erlauben 
almost—fast 
alone—allein 
aloud (to read)—vor 
already—schon 
also—auch 

although—obgleich, obschon 
America—Amerika, das 
and—und 
and so—also 
angry—zornig 
anguish—Angst, die 
animal—Tier, das, -e 
anoint, to—salben 
answer—Antwort, die 
answer, to—antworten (intr.) 

beantworten (trans.) 
ape—Affe, der, Irreg. II 
apple—Apfel, der, 

April—April, der 
approach, to—sich nahern 
arm—Arm, der, -e 
around—um, (prep.) 

umher (adv.) 

arrival—Ankunft, die, -**e. 
arrogance—Hochmut, der 
art—Kunst, die, -**e. 
article—Artikel, der 
as—als, wie 

ashamed (to be)—sich schamen 
at—an, bei, neben, zu. 


attempt, to—versuchen 
August—August, der 
aunt—Tante, die 
autumn—Herbst, der 
awake (to be)—wachen 


B 

back—Rucken, der 
bad—schlecht, schlimm 
bake, to—*backen, I. 2. 
ball—Ball, der 
bank—Bank, die 
baptize, to—taufen 
bathe, to—baden 
battle—Schlacht, die 
be, to—sein, V (sometimes *werden, V) 
—sich befinden 
—(impersonally)—*geben, I. 3. 
be, to—able—konnen, XX 
—about to—wollen, XX 
—ashamed—sich schamen 
—awake—wachen 
—determined—wollen, XX 
—expected to—sollen, XX 
—frightened—sich fiirchten 
—matter—fehlen 
—named—heissen, ie, ei. 

—permitted—diirfen, XX 
—probably—mogen, XX 
—right—recht haben, V 
—said to—sollen, XX 
—“up” to—treiben, II. 1 
beautiful—schon 
beautify, to—verschonern 
beauty—Schonheit, die 
because—weil 
become, to—*werden, V. 
bed—Bett, das, -en 
beer,—Bier, das 
before—vor (prep.) 

—bevor, ehe, (conj.) 
befriend, to—befreunden 
begin, to—*anfangen, I. 1. 
beginning—Anfang, der 
behind—hinter 
belief—Glaube(n), der 
believe, to—glauben 
bell—Glocke, die 
below—unten 
bench—Bank, die, -**e 
better—besser 
between—zwischen 
Bible—Bibel, die 
big—gross, (comp.”) 
bind, to—binden, III. 3. 


121 


122 


Vocabulary 


bird—Vogel, der, -** 

birth (to give)—**gebaren. Lesson 34. 

bite, to—beissen, II, 2. 

bite (act)—Biss, der 

—(amount bitten)—der Bissen 
bitter—bitter 
black—schwarz 
blessed—selig 
blind—blind 
blind, to—blenden 
blood—Blut, das 
bloody—blutig 
blue—blau 
board—Tafel, die 

boarding-house (school)—Pension, die 

boat—Boot, das, -e 

body—Korper, der 

book—Buch, das 

both—beide 

bottle—Flasche, die 

bouquet—Strauss, der 

box—Kasten, der 

boy—Knabe, der, Irreg. II. 

—Junge, der, Irreg. II. 
bracelet—Armband, das 
bread—Brot, das, -e 
break, to—*brechen, III, 1. 
bright—hell, licht 
bring, to—bringen, LXXIV. 1. a 
broad—breit 
brother—Bruder, der, -** 
brown—braun 
burden—Last, die 
but—aber, allein, sondern 
butter—Butter, die 
button—Knopf, der 
buy, to—kaufen 
by—an, neben, von 

C 

cabbage—Kohl, der,—kopfe 
cake—Kuchen, der 
calf—Kalb, das 
call, to—nennen, LXXIV. 1. a 
—rufen, ie, u 
can—cf. to be able, XX 
carnation—Nelke, die 
carriage—Wagen, der 
carry, to—*tragen, I. 2 
cast off, to—*verstossen, ie, o 
castle—Burg, die 
catch, to—*fangen, I. 1 
(to—cold)—sich erkalten 
cellar—Keller, der 
century—Jahrhundert, das, -e 
chair—Stuhl, der 
chamber—Kammer, die 
change, to—andern 
Charles—Karl 
cheese—Kase, der 
cherry—Kirsche, die 


chew, to—kauen 

child—Kind, das 

chin—Kinn, das, -e 

chivalrous—ritterlich 

church—Kirche, die 

citizen—Burger, der 

city—Burg, die; Stadt, die, -**e 

claim, to—to be,—wollen, XX 

class—Klasse, die 

clear—klar 

clearness—Klarheit, die 
cloak—Mantel, der,-” 
clock—Uhr, die 
cloister—Kloster, das, 
cloth—Tuch, das 
clothe, to—kleiden 
cloud—Wolke, die 
clove—Nelke, die 
coffee—Kaffee, der 
cold—kalt (comp.”) 

—Kalte, die 

cold, (to catch)—sich erkalten 
collect, to—sammeln 
collection—Sammlung, die 
comb—Kamm, der 
comb, to—kammen 
come, to—kommen, I. 4 
come (to—in)—hereinkommen. I. 4 
commandment—Gebot, das, -e 
comrade—Kamerad, der, Irreg. II. 
contain, to—*enthalten, I. 1 
cook, to—kochen 
cook—Koch, der 
—Kochin, die 
cool—kiihl 
cordial—herzlich 
correct—richtig 
cousin—Cousine, die 

Vetter, der, -n 
countenance—Antlitz, das, -e 
country—Land, das 
(to or in the—)—auf 
courage—Mut, der 
cow—Kuh, die -”e 
crazy—toll 
crown—Krone, die 
crown (imperial)—Kaiserkrone 
crown, to—kronen 
cry, to—weinen 

D 

daily—taglich 
dance, to—tanzen 
darn, to—stopfen 
daughter—Tochter, die, 
day—Tag, der, -e 

—day after tomorrow—iibermorgen 

—day before yesterday—vorgestern 
dazzle, to—blenden 
dead—tot 
deaf—taub 


Vocabulary 


123 


deal (a great—)—viel 

dear—lieb; teuer 

death—Tod, der,—falle 

debt—Schuld, die 

debtor—Schuldiger, der 

December—Dezember, der 

deed—Tat, die 

deep—tief 

defy, to—trotzen 

deny, to—verneinen 

devil—Teufel, der 

devour, to—*fressen I. 3 

die, to—*sterben, III. 1 

difference—Unterschied, der 

difficult—schwer 

dig, to—*graben, I. 2 

dirty—schmutzig 

discourse, to—reden 

distress—Not, die 

do, to—tun. IV 

dog—Hund, der 

domain—Reich, das, -e 

door—Tiir, die 

dove—Taube, die 

down—nieder 

downstairs—u n t en 

dream—Traum, der 

dreamer—Traumer, der 

dream, to—traumen 

dress—Kleid, das 

dress, to—kleiden 

drink, to—trinken, III. 3 

drive, to—fahren, I. 2. (intr.) 

—treiben, II. 1. (trans.) 
dry—trocken 
dull—dumm 
during—wahrend 
duty—Pflicht, die 
dwell, to—wohnen 

E 

ear—Ohr, das, -en 
earth—Erde, die 
easy—leicht 
eat, to—*essen, IV 
—*fressen I. 3 
eight—acht 
eighth—acht 
eighteen—achtzehn 
eighty—achtzig 
eleven—elf 
eleventh—elft 
embrace, to—umarmen 
embrace—Umarmung, die 
emperor—Kaiser, der 
empress—Kaiserin, die 
end—Ende, das, -n 
end, to—enden (intr.) 
enemy—Feind, der 
English—englisch, Englisch, das 
enough—genug 


especial—besonder 
eternity—Ewigkeit, die 
Europe—Europa, das 
even—eben, sogar, selbst 
evening—Abend, der, -e 
every—all; jed 
everybody—alle 
everything—alles 
everywhere—iiberall 
evil—libel; Dbel, das 
except—ausser 
exception—Ausnahme, die 
exercise—tjbung, die 
experience, to—*erfahren, I. 2 
explain, to—erklaren 
explanation—Erklaurung, die 
eye—Auge, das, -n 

F 

fall, to—*fallen, I. 1 
false—falsch 
family—Familie, die 
famine—Hungersnot, die 
far—weit, fern 
fashion—Mode, die 
fast—fest 
fat—fett 

father—Vater, der, 

fatherland—Vaterland, das 

fear, to—sich fiirchten 

feather—Feder, die 

February—Februar, der 

feel, to—empfinden, III. 3 

fellow—Teufel, der 

feminine—weiblich 

fever—Fieber, das 

fiery—feurig 

fifteen—fiinfzehn 

fifth—fiinft 

fifty—fiinfzig 

fifteenth—fiinfzehnt 

fill, to—fiillen, einschenken 

find, to—finden, III. 3 

fine—schon 

finger—Finger, der 

fire—Feuer, das 

fire-place—Kamin, der, -e 

first—erst 

fish—Fisch, der 

fish, to—fischen 

five—fiinf 

flatter, to—schmeicheln 
flea—Floh, der 
flee, to—fliehen, II. 3 
flesh—Fleisch, das 
flight—Flucht, die 
flower—Blume, die 
fly—Fliege, die 
fly, to—fliegen, II. 3 
foam—Schaum, der 
foliage—Laub, das 


124 


Vocabulary 


follow, to—folgen 
food—Essen, aas 
foot—Fuss, der 
for—fur (prep.) 

—denn (conj.) 
forbid, to—verbieten, II, 3 
forest—Wald, der, -**er 
forget, to—*vergessen, I. 3 
forgive, to—*vergeben, I. 3 
form, to—bilden 
forth—fort 
forty—vierzig 
fortress—Burg, die 
four—vier 
fourth—viert 
fourteen—vierzehn 
fox—Fuchs, der 
France—Frankreich, das 
free—frei 
free, to—befreien 
freedom—Freiheit, die 
fresh—frisch 
Friday—Freitag, der -e 
friend—Freund, der 
—Freundin, die 
friendliness—Freundlichkeit, die 
friendship—Freundschaft, die 
frightened (to be —)—*erschrecken, 
III. 1 

from—von, aus 

front (in—of)—vor 

fruit—Obst, das; Frucht, die, -“e 

full—voll 

furniture—Mobel, das 
future—Zukunft, die 

G 

garden—Garten, der, 
gardener—Gartner, der 
—Gartnerin, die 
gas—Gas, das 
gate—Tor, das, -e 
generous—freigebig 
gentle—mild, sanft 
gentleman—Herr, der, Irreg. II 
German—deutsch, Deutsch, das 
German—Deutsch (adj-noun) 

Germany—Deutschland, das 
get, to—bekommen, I. 4 (trans.) 

—*werden, V. (intr.) 
get (to—up)—aufstehen, IV 
gift—Gabe, die 
give, to—*geben, I. 3 
glass—Glas, das 
glove—Handschuh, der, -e 
go, to—gehen, V 
go (to—away)—sich entfernen 
(to—out)—hinausgehen, IV. 

(to—to sleep)—*einschlafen, I. 1 
God—Gott, der, - # *er 
gold—Gold, das 


good—gut 
gracious—gnadig 
granddaughter—Enkelin, die 
—son —Enkel, der 
—mother —Grossmutter, die, -** 
—father —Grossvater, der, -** 
—parents —Grosseltern, die 
grass—Gras, das 
grateful—d a nkbar 
grave—Grab, das 
gray—grau 
great—gross (comp.*’) 

(a—deal)—viel 
green—griin 
greet, to—griissen 
greeting—Gruss, der 
grow, to—*wachsen, I. 2 

—(become—*werden, V) 
guest—Gast, der 
gymnastics(to do—)—turnen 


H 

half—halb; Halfte, die 
ham—Schinken, der 
hammer—Hammer, der, -** 
hand—Hand, die -”e 

(right—)—Rechte, die (adj-noun) 
hand, to—reichen 
hail—Hagel, der 
hail, to—hageln 
hair—Haar, das, -e 
hairpin—Haarnadel, die 
hallowed—geheiligt 
hand—Hand, die, -**e 
handsome—schon 
hang, to—*hangen, I. 1 
happen, to—**geschehen, II. 3 
hard—hart, schwer 
harshness—Harte, die 
hat—Hut, der 
hatpin—Hutnadel, die 
hate, to—hassen 
have, to—haben, V 
have, to (plus participle)—*lassen, 1 
have (to—to)—miissen, 

XX., LXXIV. 1. a 
he—er 

head—Kopf, der; Haupt, das 

heap—Haufe(n), der 

hear, to—horen 

hear (to—prayer)—erhoren 

heat—Hitze, die 

heat, to—heizen 

heart—Herz(en), das, 

—(by—) auswendig 
heathen—Heide, der, Irreg. II 
heavy—schwer 
help, to—*helfen, III. 1 
help—Hilfe, die 
helper—Heifer, der 



Vocabulary 


125 


her—sie 

—(to—)—ihr 
her—ihr (adj.) 
herbs—Kraut, das 
here—hier; da; her 
hide—Haut, die, -"e 
hide, to—*verbergen, III. 1 
high—hoch(stem: hoh) (comp/*) 

—(—cost of living)—Teurung, die 
him—ihn 

—to—)—ihm 
his—sein 

hold to—*halten, I. 1 

home—nach Hause; (at—)—zu Hause 

hope, to—hoffen 

horn—Horn, das 

hot—heiss 

hour—Stunde, die 

—(for hours)—stundenlang 
house—Haus, das 
how—wie 

human being—Mensch, der, Irreg. II 

human—menschlich 

hunger—Hunger, der 

hungry—hu ngrig 

hunt—Jagd, die 

hunt, to—jagen 

—(hunt for)—suchen 
hunter—Jager, der 
hurt, to—weh tun, IV 
husband—Mann, der, -**er 

I 

ice—Eis, das 
iceberg—Eisberg, der 
if—wenn, ob 
in—in (prep.) 

—ein (prefix) 
into—in; bis in 
indeed—ja 

Indian—Indianer, der 
injustice—Unrecht, das 
ink—Tinte, die 
instead of—(an) statt 
interesting—interessant 
interest, to—interessieren 
immediately—sogleich 
island—Insel, die 
it—es 

Italy—Italien, das 
its—sein 

J 

January—Januar, der 

Japan—Japan, das 

joy—Freude, die 

July—Juli, der 

jump, to—springen, III. 3 

June—Juni, der 

just—eben 


K 

keep, to—bewahren 
kill, to—toten 
kind—Art, die 

—(what—)—was fin- 
kind—f reu ndlich 

kindergarden—Kindergarten, der, -** 

kiss—Kuss, der 

kiss, to—kiissen 

knee—Knie, das, -e 

kneel, to—knieen 

knife—Messer, das 

knight—Ritter, der 

know, to—kennen, LXXIV. 1. a 

—konnen, XX., LXXIV. 1. a 
—wissen, XX., LXXIV. 1. a 


L 

lack, to—fehlen 
lady—Dame, die 

—(young—)—Fraulein, das 
lamb—Lamm, das 
land—Land, das 
large—gross (comp.") 
last—letzt 
laugh, to—lachen 
lay, to—legen 
lazy—faul 

lead, to—fiihren; leiten 
leader—Fiihrer, der 
leaf—Blatt, das 
learn, to—lernen 
leg—Bein, das, -e 
less—weniger 

lesson—Aufgabe, die; Stunde, die 
let—*lassen, I. 1 
letter—Brief, der 

—Buchstabe(n), der 
lie, to—liegen, III, 4 
—liigen 
lie—Liige, die 
life—Leben, das 
lift, to—aufheben, II. 4 
light—Licht, das 
—leicht 
—licht; hell 
lighten, to—blitzen 

—erleichtern 
like—ahnlich; gleich 
like, to—mogen, XX 

—gern (with verb)— 
literal—wortlich 
little—klein 
live, to—leben 

—wohnen 
load—Last, die 
long—lang 

—(a time)—lange 
look, to—schauen 
loose—los 



126 


Vocabulary 


lose, to—verlieren, II. 3 
lord—Herr, der, Irreg. II 
loud—laut 
love—Liebe, die 
love, to—lieben 


M 

maid—Magd, die, -**e 
mail—Post, die 
mail-box—Briefkasten, der 
make, to—machen 

man—Mann, der, -"er; Mensch, der, 
Irreg. II 
many—viele 

—(—a)—manch 
March—Marz, der 
masculine—mannlich 
mass—Messe, die 
master—Herr, der, Irreg. II 
matter, to—fehlen 
may—mogen; diirfen. XX. ff. 
me—mich 

meal—Essen, das; Mahl, das 

mealtime—Mahlzeit, die 

mean, to—bedeuten 

meat—Fleisch, das 

meerschaum—Meerschaum, der 

meet, to—begegnen 

melt, to—*schmelzen, II. 4 

merchant—Kaufmann, der, -leute 

metal—Metall, das, -e 

might—Macht, die, -”e 

mighty—machtig 

mild—mild, 

milk—Milch, die 

milk, to—*melken, II. 4 

miller—Muller, der 

minute—Minute, die 

misfortune—Ungluck, das 

miss—Fraulein, das 

mode—Mode, die 

Monday—Montag, der, -e 

monk—Monch, der 

month—Monat, der, -e 

morning—Morgen, der 

mother—Mutter, die, -**e 

mountain—Berg, der 

mountain range—Gebirge, das 

mouse—Maus, die, -"e 

mouth—Mund, der 

move, to—sich bewegen 

Mr.—Herr, der, Irreg. II 

Mrs.—Frau, die 

much—viel 

muscle—Muskel, der, -n 
museum—Museum, das, -en 
must—miissen, XX. LXXIV. 1. a 
—future tense, XLVII 
my—mein 


N 

nail—Nagel, der, -*• 
name—Name(n), der 
named (to be—)—heissen, ie, ei 
narrow—schmal (comp.**) 
near—nah (comp**.; sup: nachst) 
near—neben, an (prep) 
necessary—notig 
need—Not, die 
needle—Nadel, die 
neither—nor—weder—noch 
nephew—Neffe, der, Irreg. II 
nest—Nest, das 
net—Netz, das, -e 
never—nie 
new—neu 
next—nachst 
niece—Nichte, die 
night—Nacht, die, -**e 
—(at—)—nachts 

night (to spend the—)—iibernachten 

nightly—nachtlich 

nine—neun 

nineteen—neu nzehn 

ninety—neu nzig 

ninth—neunt 

no—nein 

no (not a)—kein 

no (I thank you)—ich danke 

no one—niemand 

noise—Larm, der 

none—kein 

not—nicht 

nothing—nichts 

November—November, der 

now—jetzt 

number—Nummer, die; Zahl, die 
nut—Nuss, die, -**e 

O 

oak—Eiche, die 
obey—gehorchen 
October—Oktober, der 
of—von; an 
—(at the house—)—bei 
often—oft 
old—alt (comp.”) 
one—ein; eins 
one—man (imp. pro.) 
one’s self—sich 
only—allein, (conj.) 

—nur (adv.) 
open—often 
oral—miindlich 
order (in—to)—um—zu 
(in—that)—damit 
other—ander 
our—unser 
out (of)—aus 
over—fiber 


Vocabulary 


127 


owe, to—schuldig sein, V. 

—verdanken 
ox—Ochs, der, Irreg. II 

P 

page—Seite, die 

pair—Paar, das, -e 

paper—Papier, das, -e 

park—Park, der 

part—Teil, der 

part, to—scheiden, II., 1 

path—Pfad, der 

pen—Feder, die 

—(fountain—)—Fiillfeder, die 
pepper—Pfeffer, der 
permit—erlauben 

(to be —ed)—diirfen, XX 
(to have permission)—diirfen XX. 
philosopher—Philosoph, der, Irreg. II 
photograph, to—photographieren 
photographer—Photograph, der, Irreg. 
II 

physical—korperlich 
pick, to—pfliicken 

—(to—up)—aufheben, II. 4 
piece—Stuck, das, -e 
pigeon—Taube, die 
place—Ort, der, *'er 
plan—Plan, der 
plant—Pflanze, die 
plant, to—pflanzen 
play, to—spielen 
please, to—*gefallen, I. 1 
pleasure—Lust, die, -"e 
plum—Pflaume, die 
poison—Gift, das 
poisonous—gif tig 
post-office—Post, die 
posy—Strauss, der 
pound—Pfund, das, -e 
power—Kraft, die, -"e 
preach, to—predigen 
prefer, to—lieber (plus verb): compar. 

—am liebsten (plus verb): 
superlative, 
prepare, to—bereiten 
prince—Fiirst, der, Irreg. II 
probably (to be—)—mogen XX 
—future tense, XLVII 
pupil—Schuler, der 
—Schiilerin, die 

Q 

quiet—still; Stille, die 
question—Frage, die 
question, to—fragen 
quite—ganz 

R 

rain—Regen der 
rain, to—regnen 


reach, to—reichen 
read, to—**lesen, I. 3 

(to—aloud)—**vorlesen, I. 3 
reading-piece—Lesestiick, das, -e 
red—rot 

redeem, to—erlosen 

refresh, to—erfrischen 

refreshment—Erfrischung, die 

relieve, to—erleichtern 

remain, to—bleiben, II. 1 

represent, to—*vertreten, I. 3 

reserve—Scheu, die 

retire, to—sich entfernen 

revive, to—erquicken 

ribbon—Band, das 

ride, to—reiten, II. 2 

ride—Ritt, der 

right—recht; Recht, das, -e 

right (all—)—gut; schon. 

right (to be—)—recht haben V 

ring—Ring, der 

ripe—reif 

road—Weg, der; Strasse, die; 

—Bahn, die 
rock—Fels(en) der 
roof—Dach, das 

room—Zimmer, das; Kammer, die; 

—Stube, die 
rose—Rose, die 
rough—roh 
round—rund 
rule, to—regieren 
Russia—Russland, das 

S 

sack—Sack, der 
sad—traurig 
sail—Segel, das 
salad—Salat, der 
salt—Salz, das 
salty—salzig 

same—einerlei; gleich; selb 

Saturday—Samstag, der -e 

save, to—retten 

say, to—sagen 

school—Schule, die 

scissors—Schere, die 

sea—Meer, das 

see, to—**sehen, I. 3 

seem, to—scheinen, II. 1 

seize, to—greifen, II. 1 

self—sich (mich, uns, etc.) 

—selbst (intensive) 
sell, to—verkaufen 
September—September, der 
servant—Knecht, der 
serve, to—dienen 
set, to—setzen 

(to—free)—befreien 
seven—sieben 
seventeen—siebzehn 


128 


Vocabulary 


seventh—siebent 

seventy—siebzig 

shade—Schatten, der 

shady—schattig 

shall (commands)—sollen, XX 

shame—Scham, die 

sharp—scharf 

she—sie 

sheep—Schaf, das, -e 
shepherd—Schafer, der 
shield—Schild, der 
shine, to—scheinen, II. 1 
shiny—blank 
ship—Schiff, das, -e 
shoe—Schuh, der, -e 
shoot, to—schiessen, II. 3 
short—kurz 
shorten, to—verkiirzen 
should—soil te (n) 
shoulder—Schulter, die 
show, to—zeigen 
shy—scheu 
sick—krank 
side—Seite, die 
silver—Silber, das 
skin—Haut, die, -**e 
since—da (causal) 

—seitdem (temporal) 

—seit (prep.) 
sing, to—singen, III. 3 
sink, to—sinken, III. 3 
sit, to—sitzen, IV 
six—sechs 
sixteen—sechzehn 
sixth—secht 
sixty—sechzig 
slaughter, to—schlachten 
sleep, to—*schlafen, I. 1. 

(to go to—) *einschlafen, I. 1. 
sleepy—schlafrig 
slumber—Schlummer, der 
slumber, to—schlummern 
sly—schlau 
small—klein 
smell—riechen, II. 3. 
smash—*zerbrechen, III. 1. 
snow, to—schneien 
so—so; es 

(and—)—also 
soap—Seife, die 
soft—weich 
some—etwas (sing.) 

—einige (plu.) 
something—etwas 
somewhat—etwas 
son—Sohn, der 
soon—bald 

sorry (to be—)—leid tun 
sound—Laut, der, -e 
sound, to—tonen 
soup—Suppe, die 
sour—sauer 


south—Siiden, der 
speak, to—*sprechen, III. 1. 

(to—to)—griissen 

spend, to—zubringen, LXXIV. 1. a. 

(to—night)—iibernachten 
spite (in—of)—trotz 
splendor—Herrlichkeit, die 
sponge—Schwamm, der 
spoon—Loffel, der 
spring, to—springen, III. 3. 
staff—Stab, der 
stand, to—stehen, IV. 
starve, to—verhungern 
state—Staat, der, -en 
stay, to—bleiben, II. 1. 
steal, to—**stehlen, III. 
steam—Dampf, der 
step, to—*treten, I. 3. 
stick, to—*stechen, III. 1. 
stiff—steif 
still—still (adj.) 

—noch (adv.) 
stove—Ofen, der, 
street—Strasse, die 
strength—Kraft, die 
stretch, to—strechen 
strict—streng 
strike—*schlagen, I. 2. 
strong—stark (comp.”) 
struggle—Kampf, der 
student—Student, der, Irreg. II. 
study, to—lernen 

—studieren 
stupid—dumm 
such (a)—(ein) solch 
suffice, to—geniigen 
sun—Sonne, die 
Sunday—Sonntag, der, -e 
sunlight—Sonnenlicht, das 
sunny—sonnig 
summer—Sommer, der 
swan—Schwan, der 
sweet—suss 

sweetheart—Schatz, der 
swim—schwimmen, III. 2. 

Switzerland—Schweiz, die 
sword—Schwert, das 

T 

table—Tisch, der 

take, to—*nehmen, III. 1, bringen; 

(to—medicine)—*einnehmen, 

III, 1. 

(to—from)—*entnehmen, III. 1. 
tall—gross, (comp.”) 
tame—zahm 
taste, to—schmecken 
tea—Tee, der 
teach, to—lehren 
ten—zehn 
tenth—zehnt 


Vocabulary 


129 


text—Text, der 

than—als 

thank, to—danken 

that—der, das, die (adj. and pro.) 

that—dass (conj.) 

theatre—Theater, das 

their—ihr 

them—sie 

then—dann 

there—da, dort, dahin. 
therefore—also 
they—sie 
thick—dick 
thief—Dieb, der 
thimble—Fingerhut, der 
thin—diinn 
thing—Ding, das, -e 
—Sache, die 

think, to—denken (an, von) 

third—dritt 

thirsty—durstig 

thirteen—dreizehn 

thirty—dreissig 

this—dies; heute. 

thorn—Dorn, der, -en 

though—doch 

thought—Gedanke(n), der 

threaten to—drohen 

through—durch 

throw, to—*werfen, III. 1 

thunder—Donner, der 

thunder, to—donnern 

Thursday—Donnerstag, der, -e 

thus—so 

time—Zeit, die; Mai, das 
(times—mal) 
tired—miide 
title—Tit el, der 
to—zu (with infinitive) 

—es (with infinitive omitted) 
to—zu (persons); nach (places) 
today—heute 
together—zusammen 
tomorrow—morgen 

(day after—)—iibermorgen 
tone—Ton, der 
too (also)—auch 
too—zu 

towards—nach; gegen 

town (in or down)—in die Stadt 

travel, to—reisen 

treat, to—behandeln 

tree—Baum, der 

trifle—Kleinigkeit, die 

true—wahr; treu 

trunk—Koffer, der 

trust, to—trauen 

try, to—versuchen 

Tuesday—Dienstag, der, -e 

twelve—zwolf 

twelfth—zwolft 

twig—Zweig, der 


two—zwei 
twenty—zwanzig 
twentieth—zwanzigst 

U 

ugly—hasslich 
uncle—Onkel, der 
under—unter 

(—linen)—Wasche, die 
understand, to—verstehen, IV 
until—bis (prep, and conj.) 

(not—)—erst 

up—auf; (to be “up” to)—treiben, 
II. 1 

upon—auf 
upstairs—oben 
us—uns 

usual—gewohnlich 
V 

vain—eitel 
valley—Tal, das 
very—sehr 

(—much)—sehr 
village—Dorf, das 
visit, to—besuchen 
vocabulary—Wortschatz, der 
voice—Stimme, die 

W 

waffle—Waffel, die 

wait, to—warten 

walk, to—gehen, IV; wandern; 

wall (outer)—Mauer, die 

want, to—wollen, XX 

war—Krieg, der 

warm—warm (comp.**) 

warm, to—warmen 

wash, to—*waschen, I. 2. 

watch—Uhr, die 

water—Wasser, das 

way—Weg, der 

way—Weise, die 

we—wir 

wear, to—*tragen, I. 2 
weave, to—weben, II. 4 
week—Woche, die 
Wednesday—Mittwoch, der 
well—gut 
weep, to—weinen 
what—was 

(—ever)—was 
when—wann; wenn; als; 

(—ever)—wenn 
where—wo; wohin 
whether—ob 

which—der, das, die; welch 
while—wahrend (prep.) 

—indem (conj.) 


130 


Vocabulary 


while—Weile, die 

white—weiss 

whither—wohin 

who—wer; der, das, die; 

whole—ganz 

wide—weit 

wife—Weib, das,- 

wild—wild 

will—Wille(n), der 

(to—)—wollen. XX 
wind—Wind, der 
window—Fenster, das 
windy—windig 
wine—Wein, der 
winter—Winter, der 
with—mit; bei; 
without—ohne 
wolf—Wolf, der 
woman—Frau, die; Weib, das 
word—Wort, das 
world—Welt, die 


would—wiirde(n) 
write, do—schreiben, II. 1 
writing (in)—schriftlich 
wish, to—wiinschen 

Y 

year—Jahr, das -e 
yellow—gelb 
yes—ja 

yesterday—gestern 

(day before—)—vorgestern 

yet—noch 

(not—)—noch nicht 
you—Sie (du, ihr) 
your—Ihr (dein, euer) 
young—jung 

(—lady)—Fraulein, das 
(—man)—Jiingling, der, -e 
youth—Jugend, die 
youth—Jiingling, der, -e 


WORTSCHATZ 


A 

Abend, der, -e—evening 
aber—but 

abtun, IV.—to take away 
acht—eight, eighth 
achtzehn—eighteen 
Affe, der, Irreg. II., ape 
ahnlich—like 
alle—everybody 
alles—everything 
allein—alone 
conj.—but 
als—as, than, when 
als ob—as if 
als wenn—as if 
also—therefore, and so 
alt—old (comp.**) 

Alter, das—age 
Amerika, das—America 
ander—other 
andern—to change 
Anfang, der—beginning 
*anfangen, I.i—to begin 
Angst, die—anguish 
Ankunft, die, -**e,—arrival 
anstatt—instead of 
Antlitz, das, -e,—countenance 
Antwort, die—answer 
antworten—to answer 
Apfel, der, -**,—apple 
Arm, der, -e,—arm 
Armband, das—bracelet 
Artikel, der,—article 
Art, die,—kind, variety 
an—to, at, by, in 
auch—also, too 
auf—on, upon, to, of, in 
aufheben, II, 4,—to lift 
Aufgabe, die,—lesson 
aufstehen, IV.—to arise 
auf tun, IV—to open 
Auge, das, -n,—eye 
aus—out of, from 
Ausnahme, die,—exception 
ausser—except 
aussern—to express 
auswendig—by heart 

B 

*backen, I. 2.—to bake 
Bad, das,—bath 
baden,—to bathe 
Bahn, die,—road, path 
bald —soon 
Ball, der,—ball 
Band, das,—ribbon 
Bank, die,—bank 
Bank, die, -**e,—bench 
Baum, der,—tree 
beantworten—to answer 


bedeuten—to mean 

befinden, sich, III. 3,—to be 

befreien—to free 

befreunden—to befriend 

begegnen—to meet 

beginnen, III. 2.—to begin 

behandeln—to treat 

bei—by, at the house of, of 

beide—both 

Bein, das, -e,—leg 

beissen, II. 2.—to bite 

bejahen—to affirm 

bekannt—acquainted, CXVIII 

bekommen, I, 4,—to get, i.e. obtain 

bereiten—to prepare 

Berg, der,—mountain 

besonder—especial 

besser—better 

besuchen,—to visit 

bevor—before (conj.) 

bewahren,—to keep 

bewegen, sich—to move 

Bibel, die,—Bible 

Bier, das,—beer 

bilden,—to form 

binden, III. 3.—to bind 

bis—until (prep, and conj.) 

Biss, der,—bite (act) 

Bissen, der,—bite (what is bitten off) 
Bett, das, -en,—bed 
bitter—bitter 
Bitterkeit, die—bitterness 
blank—shiney 

Blatt, das,—leaf, sheet of paper 
blau—blue 

bleiben, II. 1.—to remain 
blenden—to dazzle 
blind—blind 
blitzen—to lighten 
Blume, die,—flower 
Blut, das,—blood 
Boot, das, -e,—boat 
braun—brown 
Braut, die, -**e.—fiancee 
*brechen, III. 1.—to break 
breit,—broad, wide 
Brief, der,—letter 
Briefkasten, der,—mail-box 
bringen, LXXXIV. 1. a.—to bring 
—to take 

Brot, das, -e,—bread 
Bruder, der, -**,—brother 
Buch, das,—book 
Buchstabe(n), der,—letter 
Burg, die,—castle, city 
Burger, der,—citizen 
Butter, die,—butter 

C 

Cousine, die,—cousin (f) 

131 


132 


WORTSCHATZ 


D 

da—there (adv.) 

—since (conj.) 

Dach, das,—roof 
dahin—thither 
Dame, die,—lady 
damit—in order that 
damit (da+mit)—with it 
dankbar—grateful 
danken—to thank 

ich danke—No, thanks 
dann—then 
das—the (article) 

—that (dem. adj.) 

—that (dem. pro.) 

—which (rel. pro.) 
dass—that (conj.) 
dein—thy 

denken, LXXIV. 1. a—to think 
denken an—to think of 
denken von—to have opinion of 
denn—for (conj.) 
der—the (article) 

—that (dem, adj.) 

—that (dem. pro.) 

—who (rel. pro.) 
deswegen—on that account 
deutsch—German (adj.), CXVIII 
Deutschland, das,—Germany 
dick—thick 
die—the (article) 

—that (dem. adj.) 

—that (dem. pro.) 

—who (rel. pro.) 

Dieb, der,—thief 
dienen—to serve 
Dienstag, der, -e,—Tuesday 
dies—this (adj. and pro.) 

Ding, das, -e,—thing 

doch—though 

Dorf, das,—village 

Dorn, der, -en,—thorn 

dort—there 

donnern—to thunder 

Donnerstag, der, -e,—Thursday 

drei—three 

dreissig—thirty 

dreizehn—thirteen 

dritt—third 

drohen—to threaten 

dumm—stupid 

diinn—thin 

durch—through 

diirfen, LXXIV. 1. a.—to be permitted 
durstig—thirsty 

E 

eben—just, even 
ehe—before (conj.) 

Eiche, die—oak 

ein—one (adj. and pro.) 

—a (indef. article) 


ein—in (prefix) 
eins—one (in counting) 
einander—one another 
einige—some (plu.) 

einerlei—all the same (lit. of one kind) 

♦einnehmen, III. 1—to take (medicine) 

einschenken—to pour in 

*einschlafen, I. 1.—to go to sleep 

Eis, das,—ice 

Eisberg, der,—iceberg 

eitel,—vain 

elf—eleven 

elft—eleventh 

empfinden, III. 3.—to feel 

Ende, das, n,—end 

enden—to end 

englisch—English (adj.) 

Englisch—English (noun) 

Enkel, der,—grandson 
Enkelin, die,—granddaughter 
entfernen, sich,—retire 
♦enthalten, I, 1.—to contain 
er—he, it 
Erde, die,—earth 

*erfahren, I. 2.—to experience, to find 
out 

erfrischen,—to refresh 

Erfrischung, die,—refreshment 

erhoren,—to grant prayer 

erkalten, sich,—to catch cold 

Erkaltung, die,—cold (illness) 

erkennen, LXXIV, 1. a.—to recognize 

erklaren,—to explain 

Erklarung, die,—explanation 

erlauben—to permit, to allow 

erleichtern,—to relieve 

erlosen—to redeem 

erquicken—to revive 

*erschrecken, III. 1.—to fear 

erst—first 

erst—not—until 

erzahlen—to relate 

es—it 

—there (intro, pro.) 

*essen, IV.—to eat 
Essen, das,—food, meal 
etwas—some (sing)—something 
—somewhat 

euer—your (second per. plu.) 

Europa, das,—Europe 
Evangelium, das,—gospel 
Ewigkeit, die,—eternity 

F 

*fahren, I. 2.—to drive 
♦fallen, I. 1.—to fall 
falsch—false 
Familie, die,—family 
♦fangen, I. 1.—to catch 
fast—almost 
faul—lazy 


WORTSCHATZ 


133 


Februar, der,—February 
fehlen,—to lack 
Feind, der,—enemy 
Fels(en), der,—rock 
feu rig—fiery 
Fenster, das,—window 
fern—far (away) 
fest—fast, certain 
fett—fat 
Feuer, das,—fire 
Feder, die,—feather, pen 
Fieber, das,—fever 
finden, III. 3.—to find 
Finger, der,—finger 
Fingerhut, der,—thimble 
finster—dark 

Finsterniss, die, -e,—darkness 

Fisch, der,—fish 

fischen—to fish 

Flasche, die,—bottle 

Fleisch, das,—meat 

Flucht, die,—flight 

Fliege, die,—fly 

fliegen, II. 3,—to fly 

fliehen, II. 3,—to flee 

Floh, der,—flea 

folgen—to follow 

fort—forth, away 

Frage, die,—question 

fragen,—to question 

Frankreich, das,—France 

Frau, die,—woman, wife, Mrs. 

Fraulein, das—young woman, Miss 

frei—free 

reigebig—generous 
Freiheit, die,—freedom 
Freitag, der, -e,—Friday 
*fressen, I. 3.—to eat (as animals) 
Freude, die,—joy 
Freund, der,—friend 
Freundin, die,—friend (f) 
Freundlichkeit die—kindness 
Freundschaft, die,—friendship 
Friede(n), der—peace 
friedfertig,—peaceful 
frisch—fresh 
Frucht, die, -**e,—fruit 
fruchtbar—fruitful 
Fuchs, der,—fox 
fiihren,—to lead 
fiillen,—to fill 

Fullfeder, die,—fountain pen 

fiinf—five 

fiinft—fifth 

fiinfzehn—fifteen 

fiinfzig—fifty 

fur—for (prep.) 

fiirchten,—to fear 

(—sich)—to be afraid 
Fiirst, der, Irreg. II.—prince 
Fuss, der,—foot 


G 

Gabe, die,—gift 
ganz—whole, all 
Garten, der, -**,—garden 
Gartner, der,—gardener 
Gartnerin, die,—gardener (f) 

Gas, das, -e,—gas 

Gast, der,—guest 

**gebaren, a, o,—to give birth 

Gebirge, das,—mountain range 

Gebot, das, -e,—commandment 

Gedanke(n), der,—thought 

*geben, I. 3.—to give, imper. to be 

*gefallen, I. 1.—to please 

gegen—against, towards (time) 

geheiligt—hallowed 

gehen, IV.—to go, to walk 

gehorchen,—to obey 

gelb—yellow 

genug—enough 

geniigen—to suffice 

gern—gladly 

**geschehen, I. 3.—to happen 
gestern—yesterday, this 
gewohnlich—usual 
Gift, das, -e,—poison 
Glas, das,—glass 
Glaube(n), der,—belief 
glauben—to believe 
gleich—like 
Glocke, die,—bell 
gnadig—gracious 
Gold, das,—gold 
Gott, der, -**er,—god, God 
Grab, das,—grave 
*graben, I. 2.—to dig 
Gras, das,—grass 
grau—gray 

greifen, II. 2.—to seize 

gross,—big, large, tall (comp.**) 

Grosseltern, plu.—grandparents 

Grossmutter, die, -**,—grandmother 

Grossvater, der, -**,—grandfather 

griin—green 

Gruss, der,—greeting 

grussen—to greet, to speak to 

gut—good, well 

Giite, die—goodness 


H 

Haar, das, -e,—hair 
Haarnadel, die,—hairpin 
haben, V.—to have 
Hagel, der,—hail 
hageln—to hail 
halb—half 
Halfte, die,—half 
*halten, I. 1.—to hold 
Hammer, der, -**,—hammer 
Hand, die, -**e,—hand 


134 


WORTSCHATZ 


Handschuh, der, -e,—glove 
*hangen, I. 1.—to hang 
hart—hard (comp.**) 
hassen—to hate 
hasslich—hateful, ugly 
Haufen, der,—heap 
Haupt, das,—head (fig.) 

Haus, das,—house 

Haut, die, -**e,—hide, skin 

heben, II. 4.—to lift 

Heide, der, Irreg. II.—heathen 

Heil, das,—salvation 

heiss—hot 

heissen, ie, ei,—to be named 

heizen—to heat 

*helfen, III. 1.—to help 

hell—bright 

Herbst, der,—autumn 

hereinkommen, I. 4.—to come in 

Herr, der, Irreg. II,—lord, master, Mr, 

Herrlichkeit, die,—glory 

Herz(en), das,—heart 

herzlich—cordial 

heute—today, this 

Hilfe, die,—help 

Himmel, der,—heaven 

hinausgehen, IV.—to go out 

hinter—behind 

Hitze, die,—heat 

hoch—high (hoher, hochst) 

—(stem hoh) 
hoffen,—to hope 
horen—to hear 
Horn, das—horn 
Hund, der, -e,—dog 
Hunger, der,—hunger 
Hungersnot, die,—famine 
hu ngrig—hungry 
Hut, der,—hat 
Hutnadel, die,—hatpin 


I 

ihr—her, their, (to) her, ye 
I hr—your 
in—in, into 
indem—while 
Indianer, der—Indian 
Insel, die,—island 
interessant—interesting 
interessieren—to interest 
Italien, das,—Italy 

J 

ja—yes, why!, just 

jagen—to hunt 

Jager, der,—hunter 

Jagd, die,—hunt 

Jahr, das, -e,—year 

Jahrhundert, das, -e,—century 


Januar, der,—January 
japan, das,—Japan 
jed—every 

jen—that (adj. and pron.) 
jetzt—now 
Jugend, die,—youth 
Juli, der,—July 
jung—young, (comp.**) 

Junge, der, -n, Irreg. II—boy 
Jiingling, der, -e,—young man 
Juni, der,—June 

K 

Kaffee, der,—coffee 
Kaiser, der,—emperor 
Kaiserin, die,—empress 
Kaiserkrone, die,—imperial crown 
Kalb, das,—calf 
kalt,—cold (comp.”) 

Kalte, die,—cold 

Kamerad, der, Irreg. II.—comrade 

Kamin, der, -e,—fire-place 

Kamm, der,—comb 

kammen,—to comb 

Kammer, die,—chamber, room 

Kampf, der,—struggle 

Karte, die—card 

Kase, der,—cheese 

Kasten, der,—box 

kauen—to chew 

kaufen—to buy 

Kaufman, der, -leute,—merchant 

kein—no, not a 

Keller, der,—cellar 

kennen, LXXIV. 1. a.—to know 

Kind, das,—child 

Kindergarten, der,—kindergarten 

Kinn, das, -e,—chin 

Kirche, die,—church 

klar—clear 

Klasse, die,—class 

Kleid, das,—dress 

kleiden—to dress 

klein—little, small 

Kleinigkeit, die,—trifle 

Kloster, das, -**,—cloister 

Knabe, der,—Irreg. II.,—boy 

Knecht, der,—servant 

Knie, das, -e,—knee 

knieen—to kneel 

Knopf, der,—button 

Koch, der,—cook 

kochen—to cook 

Kochin, die,—cook (f) 

Koffer, die,—trunk 
Kohl, der, -kopfe,—cabbage 
kommen, I. 4.—to come 
konnen, LXXIV. 1. a.—to be able 
Kopf, der,—head 
Kopfweh, das,—headache 
Korper, der,—body 


WORTSCHATZ 


135 


kosten—to cost 
Kraft, die, -**e,—power 
kraftig—strong 
krank—sick (comp.**) 
Kraut, das,—herbs 
Krieg, der,—war 
Krone, die,—crown 
Kuchen, der,—cake 
kiihl—cool 
kurz—short (comp.”) 
Kuss, der,—kiss 
kiissen—to kiss 


L 

lachen—to laugh 
lang—long (comp.”) 
lange—for a long time 
Larm, der,—noise 

♦lassen, 1.1.—to let, to leave, to have 

Last, die,—load 

Land, das,—land, country 

Laub, das,—foliage 

*laufen, I. 4.—to run 

laut—loud 

Laut, der, -e,—sound 
leben—to live 
Leben, das,—life 
legen—to lay 
lehren—to teach 
leicht—easy 

leid (Es tut mir)—I am sorry 

leiten—to lead 

lernen—to learn 

**lesen, I. 3.—to read 

Lesestiick, das, -e,—reading piece 

letzt—last 

Licht, das,—light 

licht—bright 

lieb—dear 

Liebe, die,—love 

lieben,—to love 

lieber—comp, of lieb and of gern. 

liebsten, am—superlative of gern. 

liegen, III. 4.—to lie 

Literatur, die,—literature 

Loffel, der,—spoon 

los—loose 

Luft, die -"e,—air 

Luge, die,—falsehood 

liigen—to tell a lie 

Lust, die, --*e,—desire, a mind 


M 

machen—to make 
Macht, die, -**e,—might 
machtig—mighty 
Magd, die, -*-e,—maid 
Madchen, das,—girl 
Mahl, das,—meal 


Mahlzeit, die,—mealtime 

Mai, das,—time (also mal) 

man—one 

manch—many a 

Mann, der, -**er,—man 

mannlich—manly, masculine 

Mantel, der, -**,—cloak 

Marz, der,—March 

Mauer, die,—(outer) wall 

Maus, die, -**e,—mouse 

mein—my, mine 

*melken, II. 4.—to milk 

Mensch, der, Irreg. II.,—human being 

menschlich—human 

Meer, das, -e,—sea 

Meerschaum, der,—meerschaum clay 

Messe, die,—mass (church) 

Messer, das,—knife 
Metall, das, -e,—metal 
mich—me 
Milch, die,—milk 
mild—gentle 
Milde, die,—gentleness 
mildern—alleviate 
Minute, die,—minute 
mit—with 

Mittwoch, der,—Wednesday 
Mobel, das,—furniture 
Mode, die,—fashion 
mogen, LXXIV. 1. a.—to be probably 
—to like 

Monat, der, -e,—month 
Monch, der,—monk 
Montag, der, -e,—Monday 
Morgen, der,—morning 
morgen—tomorrow 
miide—tired 
Muller, der,—miller 
Mund, der,—mouth 
Museum, das, museum 

plu. die Museen 
Muskel, der, -n,—muscle 
miissen, LXXIV. 1. a.—to have to 
Mut, der,—courage 
Mutter, die, -**,—mother 

N 

nach—toward, to, at, after, according to 
nachdem—after (conj.) 

Nachmittag, der, -e,—afternoon 

Nacht, die, -**e,—night 

nachtlich—nightly 

nachts—at night 

Nadel, die,—needle, pin 

Nagel, der, -”,—nail 

nah—near (comp.”, sup. nachst) 

nahern, sich,—to appraoch 

Name(n), der,—name 

neben—near, by 

nebst—together with 

Neffe, der,—Irreg. II.,—nephew 


136 


WORTSCHATZ 


♦nehmen, III, 1.—to take 
nein—no 

Nelke, die,—clove, carnation 

nennen, LXXIV. 1. a.—to call 

Nest, das,—nest 

Netz, das, -e,—net 

neu—new 

neun—nine 

neunt—ninth 

neu nzehn—nineteen 

nicht—not 

nicht wahr?—Is it not? 

Nichte, die—niece 
nichts—nothing 
nie—never 
noch—still, yet 
noch nicht—not yet 
Not, die,—distress 
notig—necessary 
nur—only 

Nuss, die, -**e,—nut 
O 

ob—if, whether 
oben—up above, 

—upstairs 
obgleich—although 
obschon—although 
Obst, das,—fruit 
Ochs, der,, Irreg. II.—ox 
oder—or 

Ofen, der, -•*,—stove 
oft—often 
ohne—without 
Ohr, das, -en,—ear 
Ol, das,—oil 
Onkel, der,—uncle 
Ort, der, -**er,—place 

P 

Paar, das, -e,—pair, couple 
Papier, das, -e,—paper 
Park, der, -e,—park 
Pfad, der,—path 
Pfeffer, der,—pepper 
Pfennig, der—penny 
Pflanze, die,—plant 
pflanzen—to plant 
Pflaume, die,—plum 
Pflicht, die,—duty 
pfliicken—to pluck, pick 
Pfund, das, -e,—pound 
Philosoph, der,—Irreg. II.,—philoso¬ 
pher 

Photograph, der,—Irreg. II.,—photog¬ 
rapher 

photographieren—to photograph 
Plan, der,—plan 
Post, die—post-office, mail 
predigen—to preach 


R 

Rat, der,—advice, counsel 
*raten, I. 1.—to advise 
Recht, das, -e,—right, justice 
recht—right, just; die Rechte—right 
hand 

recht (ich habe)—I am right 

reden—to discourse 

Regen, der,—rain 

regieren—to rule 

regnen—to rain 

Reich, das, -e,—domain 

reichen—to hand 

reif—ripe 

reisen—to travel 

reiten, II. 2.—to ride 

Reiter, der,—trooper 

retten,—to save 

richtig—correct 

riechen, II. 3.—to smell 

Ring, der,—ring 

Ritt, der,—ride 

Ritter, der,—knight 

roh—rough, coarse 

Rose, die,—rose 

rot—red 

rufen, ie, u,—to call, shout 
rund—round 
Russland, das,—Russia 

S 

Sache, die,—affair, thing 
Sack, der,—sack 
sagen—to say, tell 
Salat, der, -e,—salad 
salben—to anoint 
Salz, das,—salt 
salzig—salty 

sammeln, sich,—collect one’s self 
Sammlung, die,—collection 
Sammstag, der, -e,—Saturday 
sanft—gentle 
sauer—sour 
Schaf, das, -e,—sheep 
Schafer, der,—shepherd 
Scham, die,—shame 
schamen, sich,—to be ashamed 
scharf—sharp 
Schatten, der,—shade 
schattig—shady 

Schatz, der,—treasure, sweetheart 
schauen—to look 
Schaum, der,—foam 
scheiden, II. 1.—to part 
scheinen, II. 1.—to shine, to seem 
Schere, die,—scissors 
Scheu, die,—reserve 
scheu—shy 

schiessen, II. 3.—to shoot 
Schiff, das, -e,—ship 


WORTSCHATZ 


137 


Schild, der,—shield 
Schinken, der,—ham 
Schlacht, die,—battle 
schlachten—to slaughter 
*schlafen, I. 1.—to sleep 
♦schlagen, I. 2.—to strike 
schlau—sly 
schlecht—bad 
Schlummer, der,—slumber 
schlummern—to slumber 
schmeicheln—to flatter 
*schmelzen, II. 4.—to melt 
schmutzig—dirty 
schneien—to snow 
schon—already, all right 
schon—fine, handsome, beautiful 
Schonheit, die—beauty 
schreiben, II. 1.—to write 
schriftlich—in writing 
Schuld, die,—guilt, debt 
Schuldiger, der,—debtor 
Schule, die,—school 
Schuler, der,—pupil 
Schiilerin, die,—pupil (f) 

Schuh, der, -e,—shoe 

Schulter, die,—shoulder 

Schwamm, der,—sponge 

Schwan, der,—swan 

schwarz—black 

Schweiz, die,—Switzerland 

schwer—heavy, difficult 

Schwert, das,—sword 

schwimmen, III, 2,—to swim 

sechs—six 

sechst—sixth 

sechzehn—sixteen 

Segel, das,—sail 

**sehen, I. 3.—to see 

sehr—very 

Seife, die,—soap 

sein, V.—to be 

sein—his, its 

seit—since (prep.) 

seitdem—since (conj. time) 

Seite, die—side, page 
selbst—self, even 
selig—blessed 
setzen—to set 

sich—ref. pro. of all third persons 

sie—she, her, they, them 

Sie—you 

sieben—seven 

siebent—seventh 

siebzehn—seventeen 

Silber, das,—silver 

singen, III. 3.—to sing 

sitzen, IV.—to sit 

so—thus, after wenn—clauses: then 

sogar—even, indeed 

sogleich—immediately 

Sohn, der,—son 

solch—such, ein solcher—such a 


sollen—to be expected to, to be said to 

sollte—should 

Sommer, der,—summer 

sondern—but 

Sonne, die—Sun 

sonnig—sunny 

Sonntag, der, -e,—Sunday 

spenden,—to give 

spielen—to play 

*sprechen, III. 1.—to speak 

springen, III. 3.—to jump 

Staat, der, -en,—state 

Stab, der,—staf 

Stadt, die, -‘*e,—city 

stark—strong 

Stecken, der,—rod, stick 

*stechen, III, 1.—to stick, prick 

stehen, IV.—to stand 

**stehlen, III. 1.—to steal 

steif—stiff 

*sterben, III. 1.—to die 

still—quiet 

stillen—to quiet 

Stimme, die,—voice 

stopfen—to darn 

Strasse, die,—street, road 

Strauss, der,—bouquet 

strecken—to stretch 

streng—strict 

Stube, die,—room 

Stuck, das, -e,—piece 

Student, der, Irreg. II.—student 

studieren—to study 

Stuhl, der,—chair 

stumpf—dull 

Stunde, dei.—hour, lesson 

stundenlang—for hours 

suchen—to hunt for 

Suppe, die,—soup 

siiss—sweet 

T 

Tafel, die,—board, blackboard 

Tag, der, -e,—day 

taglich—daily 

Tal, das,—valley 

Tante, die,—aunt 

tanzen—to dance 

Tat, die,—deed 

tatig—active 

taub—deaf 

Taube, die,—dove, pigeon 

taufen—to baptize 

Theater, das,—theatre 

Tee, der,—tea 

Teil, der,—part, share 

teuer—dear, expensive 

Teufel, der,—devil, fellow 

Teurung, die,—high cost of living 

Text, der,—text 

Tier, das, -e,—animal 


138 


WORTSCHATZ 


Tiger, der,—tiger 

Tinte, die,—ink 

Tisch, der,—table 

Titel, der,—title 

Tochter, die. -**,—daughter 

Tod, der, -falle,—death 

toll—mad 

Ton, der,—tone 

tonen—to sound 

Tor, das, -e,—gate 

tot—dead 

toten—to kill 

*tragen, I. 2.—to carry, wear 
trauen—to trust 
Traum, der,—dream 
traumen—to dream 
Trau mer, der,—dreamer 
traurig—sad 

Traurigkeit, die,—sorrow 

treiben, II. 1.—to drive, to do 

*treten, I. 3.—to step 

trinken, III. 3.—to drink 

trocken—dry 

trosten—to comfort 

trotz—in spite of 

trotzen—to defy 

Tuch, das,—cloth 

tun, IV.—to do 

Tiir die,—door 

turnen,—to do gymnastics 

U 

libel—evil 

t)bel, das,—evil 

liber—over 

liber all—everywhere 

liber morgen—day after tomorrow 

libernachten—to spend the night 

tjbung, die,—exercise 

Uhr, die,—clock, watch 

um—around; with zu in order 

um—willen—for the sake of 

umarmen—to embrace 

Umar mu ng, die,—embrace 

und—and 

ungern—neg. of gern 
Ungliick, das,—misfortune, unhappi¬ 
ness 

Unrecht, das,—injustice, wrong 
uns—us 
unser—our 

unten—below, downstairs 
unter—under 

Unterschied, der,—difference 
Universitat, die,—university 

V 

Vater, der, -**,—father 
Vaterland, das,—mother country 
Vaterunser, das,—Lord’s prayer 


*verbergen, III. 1.—to hide 

verbieten, II. 3.—to forbid 

verdanken—to owe (thanks for) 

*vergeben, I, 3.—to forgive 

♦vergessen, I, 3.—to forget 

verhungern—to starve 

verkiirzen—to shorten 

verlieren, II, 3.—to lose 

verneinen—to deny 

verschonern—to beautify 

verstehen, IV.—to understand 

*verstossen, ie, o.—to cast off 

versuchen—to attempt, to tempt 

Versuchung, die,—temptation 

*vertreten, I. 3.—to represent 

verwandt, CXVIII.—related 

Veste, die,—firmament 

Vetter, der, -n,—cousin (m) 

viel—much; a great deal,—viele—many 

vier—four 

viert—fourth 

vierzehn—fourteen 

vierzig—forty 

Vogel, der, -**,—bird 

voll—full 

von—from, of, by 

vor—before, in front of (prep.) 

vorgestern—day before yesterday 

**vorlesen—to read aloud 

W 

wachen—to be awake, to watch 
*wachsen, I. 2.—to grow 
Waffel, die,—waffle 
Wagen, der,—carriage 
wahr—true 

wahrend—during (prep.); while (conj.) 

Wald, der, -**er,—forest 

wandern—to wander 

warm—warm (comp.**) 

warmen—to warm 

warten—to wait 

warum—why 

was—what; was fur—what kind of 
Wasche—under linen, laundry 
*waschen, I. 2.—to wash 
Wasser, das,—water 
wasserig—watery, aqueous 
weben, II. 4,—to weave 
wer—who 

weder—noch,—neither—nor 

Weg, der,—way, road 

wegen—on account of 

weh—woe, (Es tut mir weh—It hurts 

me) 

Weib, das—wife, woman 
weiblich—feminine 
weich—soft 
weil—because 
Wein, der,—wine 
weinen—to cry, weep 


WORTSCHATZ 


139 


Weise, die—way, manner 
weisen, II. 1.—to point out 
weiss—white 
weit—far 

Weite, die,—distance 
welch—which 
Welt, die,—world 
weniger—less 

*werden, V.—to become, get, grow 
with inf.—future tense 
with part.—passive voice 
♦werfen, III. 1.—to throw 
wider—against 
wie—how, as 
wieder—again 
wild—wild 
Wille(n), der,—will 
Wind, der,—wind 
windig—windy 
Winter, der,—winter 
wir—we 

wissen, LXXIV. 1. a.—to know 

wo—where 

Woche, die—week 

wohin—whither, where 

wohl—prob ably 

wohnen—to dwell 

Wolf, der,—wolf 

Wolke, die,—cloud 

wollen, LXXIV. 1. a.—to will 


Wort, das—word 
Wortschatz, der,—vocabulary 
wiirde—would 
wiinschen—to wish 

Z 

Zahl, die,—number 
Zahnweh, das—toothache 
zahm—tame 
zehn—ten 
zehnt—tenth 

Zeichen, das,—token, sign 
Zeit, die,—time 
*zerbrechen, III. 1.—to smash 
Zeuge, der, Irreg. II,—witness 
Zimmer, das,—room 
Zorn, der,—anger, wrath 
zu—to, for 

zu—too (not too = also) 

zubringen, LXXIV. 1. a.—to spend 

Zukunft, die,—future 

Zunge, die—tongue 

zusammen—together 

zwanzig—twenty 

zwanzigst—twentieth 

zwei—two 

Zweig, der—twig 

zweit—second 

zwischen—between 

zwolf—twelve 










































































